Mackie Swimming Pool V70 User Manual
Outputware  
Xprint V7.0  
User’s and Administrator’s Guide  
Redakteur  
Fujitsu Siemens Computers GmbH Paderborn  
33094 Paderborn  
e-mail: email: [email protected]  
Tel.: (089) 61001-1??  
Fax: (++49) 700 / 372 00001  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Sprachen: En  
Edition June 2002  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
Printing with Xprint V7.0  
Managing print jobs  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Interoperability  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows NT  
Appendix  
Continued  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Related publications  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
1
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
Target groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Structure of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Notational conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
Other publications in this set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
2
Introduction to Xprint V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Xprint V7.0 from the user’s point of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Mercator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Xprint V7.0 R/3 kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Xprint V7.0 elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Options for printing documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
2.4.1  
2.4.2  
3
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Selecting a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Using Xprint V7.0 options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Printing parts of a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Printing files with special content types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Creating printouts with special formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Using Loadable Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
3.4  
3.4.1  
3.4.2  
3.4.3  
3.4.4  
3.4.4.1 Using Public Loadable Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
3.4.4.2 Using Private Loadable Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
3.4.5  
Copying print files before printing and deleting them after printing .  
33  
3.4.6  
3.4.7  
3.4.8  
3.4.9  
3.5  
3.6  
3.6.1  
3.6.2  
Defining separator pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Printing several copies of a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Requesting notification of the result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Using further options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Using other Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Job templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Printing a document via a globally defined job template . . . . . 44  
Defining customized job templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
4
Managing print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Selecting a print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Displaying print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Modifying a submitted print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Redirecting print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4.5  
Deleting print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
5
5.1  
5.2  
5.2.1  
5.3  
5.3.1  
5.3.2  
5.3.3  
5.3.4  
5.3.5  
5.3.6  
5.4  
5.4.1  
5.4.2  
5.4.3  
5.4.4  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Xprint V7.0 architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
The Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Administrative tasks under Xprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Configuring Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Deleting Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Modifying Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Changing the status of Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Displaying information on Xprint V7.0 objects . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Administering Xprint V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Rules for configuring the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Defining an Xprint V7.0 domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Configuring hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Configuring printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Configuring gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
6
6.1  
Configuring Xprint V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Administering hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Configuring the first host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Configuring a new host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Administering hosts (users only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Configuring Xprint V7.0 on a stand-alone system . . . . . . . 101  
Introducing Xprint V7.0 into a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Configuring a new host in an existing Xprint V7.0 network . . . 105  
Predefined printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Configuring predefined printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Extending the list of predefined printers . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Administering devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Adding a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Deactivating a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Reactivating a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
Removing a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Reconnecting a printer to another system . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Reconnecting a printer to a different port . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Replacing an existing printer with a new one . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Assigning a security level to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Administering printer groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Setting up a new printer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Adding a printer to a printer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Removing a printer from a printer group . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
Deactivating a printer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130  
6.1.1  
6.1.2  
6.2  
6.2.1  
6.2.2  
6.2.3  
6.3  
6.3.1  
6.3.2  
6.4  
6.4.1  
6.4.2  
6.4.3  
6.4.4  
6.4.5  
6.4.6  
6.4.7  
6.4.8  
6.5  
6.5.1  
6.5.2  
6.5.3  
6.5.4  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6.5.5  
6.5.6  
6.6  
Reactivating a printer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
Deleting a printer group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
Administering users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Defining a user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Entering a defined user for other hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
Deleting a host from a user’s host list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Modifying user privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Deleting a user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137  
Resetting user print quotas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
Displaying information on users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
Assigning a security level to a user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
Administering permission lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
Creating a permission list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
Modifying a permission list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
Deleting a permission list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Granting or denying specific users access to a printer . . . . . 148  
Granting or denying specific users access to a printer group . . 149  
Granting or denying specific users access to a form . . . . . . 149  
Granting or denying specific printers access to a form . . . . . 150  
Allowing or prohibiting administration of supervisors . . . . . . 151  
Administering fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Adding a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
Deleting a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154  
Modifying the attributes of a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155  
Administering forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156  
Adding a form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157  
Deleting a form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158  
Modifying the attributes of a form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Default forms for printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160  
Administering filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Adding filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162  
Deleting filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167  
Modifying the attributes of a filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168  
Assigning a filter to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
Removing a filter from a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170  
Administering public loadable resources . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Defining a loadable resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171  
Deleting a loadable resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173  
Displaying the definition of a loadable resource . . . . . . . . . 173  
Administering global job templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Defining a job template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174  
Deleting a job template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Customizing job templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177  
Administering PCLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179  
6.6.1  
6.6.2  
6.6.3  
6.6.4  
6.6.5  
6.6.6  
6.6.7  
6.6.8  
6.7  
6.7.1  
6.7.2  
6.7.3  
6.7.4  
6.7.5  
6.7.6  
6.7.7  
6.7.8  
6.8  
6.8.1  
6.8.2  
6.8.3  
6.9  
6.9.1  
6.9.2  
6.9.3  
6.9.4  
6.10  
6.10.1  
6.10.2  
6.10.3  
6.10.4  
6.10.5  
6.11  
6.11.1  
6.11.2  
6.11.3  
6.12  
6.12.1  
6.12.2  
6.12.3  
6.13  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6.13.1  
6.13.2  
6.13.3  
6.13.4  
6.13.5  
6.14  
6.14.1  
6.14.2  
6.14.3  
6.14.4  
6.14.5  
6.15  
6.15.1  
6.15.2  
6.15.3  
6.15.4  
6.16  
6.16.1  
6.16.2  
6.16.3  
6.16.4  
Adding a PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Deleting a PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181  
Assigning a comment to a PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182  
Assigning a PCL to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183  
Defining a PCL yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185  
Administering recovery rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Defining a recovery rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186  
Assigning a recovery rule to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190  
Canceling the assignment of a recovery rule to a printer . . . . 190  
Modifying recovery rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191  
Deleting a recovery rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192  
Administering servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Adding a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193  
Deleting a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196  
Changing the status of a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197  
Modifying the attributes of a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198  
Administering supervisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Adding a supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200  
Activating or deactivating supervisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203  
Modifying the attributes of a supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Deleting a supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205  
7
7.1  
7.2  
Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207  
Accessing BSD printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Basic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209  
Configuring printers for BSD Xprint V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 210  
Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Gateway characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Setting up a gateway connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Gateways to BSD spoolers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214  
Gateways to other Xprint V7.0 domains . . . . . . . . . . . . 219  
Gateways to DPRINT spoolers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Administering gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Configuring an additional connection from an existing gateway 227  
Deleting a gateway connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229  
Deactivating a gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230  
Activating a gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232  
Obtaining information on a gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233  
7.2.1  
7.2.2  
7.3  
7.3.1  
7.3.2  
7.3.3  
7.3.4  
7.3.5  
7.4  
7.4.1  
7.4.2  
7.4.3  
7.4.4  
7.4.5  
8
Installing Xprint V7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Configuring the local area network (LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235  
Setting the language for the Xprint V7.0 system . . . . . . . . 236  
8.1  
8.2  
8.3  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
8.4  
Installation (new) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237  
Installing with cpio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Installing with pkgadd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238  
Installing with sd method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239  
Installation (users only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241  
Installation with pkgadd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242  
Product licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Types of licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243  
Installing a license key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245  
8.4.1  
8.4.2  
8.4.3  
8.5  
8.5.1  
8.5.2  
8.5.3  
8.5.4  
9
9.1  
9.2  
9.3  
9.3.1  
9.3.2  
9.3.3  
9.3.4  
9.3.5  
9.3.6  
9.3.7  
9.3.8  
9.4  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249  
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
Installation and license key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250  
Integration with Wprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251  
Start-up and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252  
Printer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253  
Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254  
Interoperability with the BS2000 DPRINT system . . . . . . . . 254  
WINDOWS 2000 special files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255  
Limitations and restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257  
10  
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259  
Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260  
Filling out the worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261  
Selection criteria list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266  
Special cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267  
SNMP Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268  
Axis box support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270  
TV-CC integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270  
Fax and mail support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273  
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Preface  
Xprint V7.0 is the output management system developed by Océ Software  
Laboratories Namur S.A. for use in heterogeneous networks. It is available for  
many open system platforms, for Microsoft Windows NT® and Windows 2000®.  
It can also interact with systems such as MS-DOS®/MS Windows, BS2000 and  
BSD UNIX.  
Some limitations exists according to the platform, please refer to chapter 9  
“Xprint V7.0 for Windows”.  
This manual describes how to install, configure and use Xprint V7.0, the  
different chapters being designed to meet the specific requirements of different  
groups of users.  
1.1  
Target groups  
This manual is written for the following target groups:  
●
Users  
If you want to print files via Xprint V7.0 as a general user, this manual tells  
you what options are available for doing this and how to manage existing  
print jobs.  
●
●
System administrators  
This manual contains information for the system administrator on how to  
install and configure Xprint V7.0 locally on his/her system.  
Xprint V7.0 administrators  
If you are responsible for administering Xprint V7.0 in a network, this manual  
informs you of the options you have for doing this and how to make the best  
use of these to achieve your goals.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
     
Structure of the manual  
Preface  
1.2  
Structure of the manual  
The individual chapters of this manual deal with various aspects of using and  
configuring Xprint V7.0 on UNIX systems. All the special features of Xprint V7.0  
on the Windows platforms are presented in a separate chapter. You should read  
the following chapters, depending on which tasks you have to perform:  
●
Chapter 2 - “Introduction to Xprint V7.0” starting on page 5  
This chapter describes Xprint V7.0 from the points of view of the user and  
the administrator. You should in any case read the sections relevant to you.  
These will tell you about the possibilities you have for printing under Xprint  
V7.0 and what steps you might have to take when configuring Xprint V7.0.  
●
●
●
●
Chapter 3 - “Producing Output with Xprint V7.0” starting on page 15  
This chapter describes how to print documents using the Xprint V7.0  
commands.  
Chapter 4 - “Managing print jobs” starting on page 49  
This chapter describes how to manage existing print jobs using the Xprint  
V7.0 commands.  
Chapter 5 -“Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0” starting on page 67.  
This chapter provides an introduction to managing Xprint V7.0 and  
describes the basic aspects of this task.  
Chapter 6 - “Configuring Xprint V7.0” starting on page 95  
This chapter describes how to configure Xprint V7.0 on a stand-alone  
system or in a network using the Xprint V7.0 commands. Furthermore, it tells  
you how to manipulate the various Xprint V7.0 objects in order to achieve  
specific goals.  
●
●
Chapter 7 -“Interoperability” starting on page 207  
This chapter describes the possible ways of having Xprint V7.0 interact with  
other spooler systems.  
Chapter 8 - “Installing Xprint V7.0” on page 235  
This chapter tells you how to install Xprint V7.0 on your system and what to  
consider when doing this.  
2
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preface  
Notational conventions  
●
Chapter 9 - “Xprint V7.0 for Windows” on page 249  
While the other chapters of this manual describe Xprint V7.0 on UNIX  
systems, this one presents the differences on the Windows platforms.  
●
●
●
The “Appendix” starting on page 259 contains important tables, summaries  
and a worksheet for configuring Xprint V7.0.  
The glossary explains the most important terms in connection with Xprint  
V7.0.  
The index helps you to quickly find the information you need.  
1.3  
Notational conventions  
The following notational conventions are used throughout this manual:  
Convention  
Use  
“double quotes”  
For references within the manual and to other  
manuals.  
italics  
For variable parts of commands.  
fixed pitch  
In continuous text for commands, options, file names,  
constants, and screen output and menu texts as well  
as invariable parts of examples.  
bold  
For emphasis in continuous text.  
For your input in sample dialogs.  
fixed pitch and  
bold  
●
Actions you must perform.  
Refers to important information which you should  
note.  
i
Refers to important information which warns of  
potential damage.  
!
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other publications in this set  
Preface  
1.4  
Other publications in this set  
Xprint V7.0 - Application Programming Interface (API)  
This manual is written for application programmers with a sound knowledge of  
the C programming language who also have a basic knowledge of the adminis-  
tration and general operation of Xprint V7.0 . API (Application Programming  
Interface) allows the programmer access to the functions of the Xprint V7.0  
system via a programming interface. This manual contains information on the C  
functions and C data structures comprising the API.  
Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual  
This manual serves primarily as a reference book. It contains detailed infor-  
mation on commands and the corresponding options.  
Xprint V7.0 - Graphical User Interface  
Mercator is the graphical user interface for Xprint V7.0. This manual gives an  
introduction to the product and an overview of the functions available.  
4
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
This chapter describes the concepts of Xprint V7.0, which you must be familiar  
with in order to use this product. It describes the objects comprising Xprint V7.0  
and how these objects interact.  
2.1  
Xprint V7.0 from the user’s point of view  
From the point of view of the user, Xprint V7.0 represents a number of  
commands and a graphical interface used for printing files. For the user, the  
entire Xprint V7.0 system consists of a number of output devices on which  
documents can be produced (see figure below). Output devices can be printers,  
fax devices and e-mail addresses. For historical reasons, the word printer is  
often used instead of output device in the rest of this manual. Similarly, you  
should understand the term printing as producing an output.  
Figure 1: The Xprint V7.0 system  
As a user, the first things you deal with are the local workstation on which you  
are working, and the output devices of the Xprint V7.0 system. You can use any  
of the visible output devices for printing your documents. It may however be the  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
           
Xprint V7.0 from the user’s point of view  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
case that you are unable to access some of the visible output devices because  
you have not been granted the necessary rights to use them.  
There may also be groups of output devices available. These device groups  
combine several output devices to provide quicker spoolout. When printed via a  
device group, the print jobs are distributed evenly over the devices in the group  
so that jobs can be processed quickly even at times of high print load. In a  
network, Xprint V7.0 is completely transparent. This means that it does not  
matter whether an output device is connected to your host or to another host in  
the network. You can use the output devices just as if they were connected  
directly to your host.  
It is even possible to send print jobs to output devices outside your own Xprint  
V7.0 domain, provided that the required gateways are configured. In addition to  
the devices of other Xprint V7.0 domains, you can also use devices which are  
not connected to the Xprint V7.0 of a system but to a computer running BSD-  
UNIX,  
MS-DOS/MS-Windows or BS2000 (see the following figure).  
Figure 2: Using Xprint V7.0  
6
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 from the user’s point of view  
As an Xprint V7.0 user you can also decide which interface you want to use on  
your system.  
See the following figure for your options:  
Figure 3: User‘s options  
The various interfaces offer you the following options:  
●
●
●
The menu interface allows you to perform all actions via a graphical user  
interface.  
Using the command line interface, you can perform all actions by entering  
Xprint V7.0 commands.  
The XPG emulation allows the use of the X/Open commands lp, lpstat,  
cancel.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Mercator  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
●
The application programming interface API enables applications to access  
the Xprint V7.0 system via C function calls.  
2.2  
Mercator  
Mercator is the graphical user interface for Xprint V7.0. It allows the adminis-  
trator to have easy access to Host, Devices, Device groups and Job properties.  
It also provides a quick overview of what is happening in the whole print domain  
or a subset of it.  
One can interface Mercator with several third party viewers, in order to preview  
the pcl or PostScript files to print (Windows platforms only).  
The User Guide gives you an introduction to the product. For more detailed  
information, see the online help which is available for each window.  
2.3  
Xprint V7.0 R/3 kit  
Xprint V7.0 can be optimally interfaced with SAP R/3 V4.x, and has been  
certified by SAP as an Output Management System (certification BC-XOM).  
The Xprint V7.0 R/3 kit offers the following advantages:  
–
–
–
–
–
accurate and timely information on the print documents  
real-time asynchronous status feed-back  
tracking of documents  
improved performance  
better support of output devices  
You can find more information on the Xprint V7.0 R/3 kit in the Xprint V7.0  
Reference Manual.  
2.4  
Xprint V7.0 elements  
This section describes the elements comprising Xprint V7.0 and the possibilities  
Xprint V7.0 offers its users.  
8
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 elements  
2.4.1 Xprint V7.0 objects  
Xprint V7.0 is an object-oriented system. This is also reflected in the way Xprint  
V7.0 is used. Almost all the Xprint V7.0 commands can be used with the  
different object types, which is why the number of Xprint V7.0 commands is  
relatively low. The following section provides an overview of the available  
objects and their use.  
The following objects are defined in Xprint V7.0. The parentheses contain the  
short name of the Xprint V7.0 objects for use in Xprint V7.0 commands:  
●
The Xprint V7.0 system (-sys)  
The Xprint V7.0 system refers to all the Xprint V7.0 objects which are  
combined in a common administrative unit, what is called an Xprint V7.0  
domain. Within the Xprint V7.0 system the Xprint V7.0 administrator is  
allowed to perform all the administrative tasks.  
●
Gateways (-gtw)  
Gateways allow you to make a connection from one Xprint V7.0 domain to  
another Xprint V7.0 domain or to other spooler systems. Via these gateways  
you can use the output devices and device groups of the other system  
involved.  
Gateways to DPRINT (spooler system for BS2000 systems) or BSD spooler  
systems (spooler systems supporting the BSD lpr protocol) allow users of  
the local Xprint V7.0 domain to access the output devices and device groups  
in these spooler systems. Conversely, it is also possible to access the  
printers and printer groups of the local Xprint V7.0 domain from DPRINT and  
BSD spooler systems.  
Exchanging data with DPRINT requires that the local gateway be  
defined on a platform which has openFT installed.  
i
●
Hosts (-hos)  
Under Xprint V7.0 the term host refers to every computer defined in an  
Xprint V7.0 domain. Hosts are divided into different classes: master, slave  
and parasite hosts. The difference lies in the way they handle the Xprint V7.0  
database.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
   
Xprint V7.0 elements  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
The Xprint V7.0 database contains all the data Xprint V7.0 needs to access  
Xprint V7.0 resources. This includes information on the defined hosts, users,  
devices and device groups as well as on forms and all the other Xprint V7.0  
objects. Only the print jobs are stored on the server responsible for their  
execution.  
●
Servers (-srv)  
Servers are the Xprint V7.0 objects which administer incoming print jobs and  
are responsible for scheduling them. Each server administers its own print  
queue which contains all the print jobs for the devices whose supervisors  
are controlled by the server.  
●
Supervisors (-spv)  
A supervisor is directly responsible for controlling one or more devices. It  
obtains the job data from the superordinate server and forwards it to the  
backend program (see the glossary entry “Backend” on page 273). One  
supervisor may control several local devices.  
●
●
●
Device groups (-dgr)  
Devices can be combined to form what are called device groups to achieve  
better loading of all the devices in the group. If a print job is sent to a device  
group, it is printed on the first device to become available in this group.  
Devices (-dev)  
Xprint V7.0 can use devices of many different types. The devices are  
controlled by a supervisor and assigned tools, called backends. Also, a  
PCL is assigned to the device.  
Print jobs (-job)  
Print jobs are submitted by users and, as described in the previous section,  
can be modified. They are administered by the servers responsible for the  
respective print queues.  
In addition to the normal manipulation options, you can redirect all print jobs  
for a given device to another device.  
●
Forms (-frm)  
Forms are a convenient way of influencing the appearance of print jobs.  
Forms can be used to define paper and page formats, the layup (portrait or  
landscape), font, appearance of the information pages and user privileges.  
Xprint V7.0 differentiates between automatic and manual forms. Jobs using  
automatic forms can be printed at any time: these forms are mounted on  
10  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 elements  
the printer by default and usually only define the hopper or the page format  
(margins) or the font. If a specific form requires that special paper be  
mounted in the printer manually or that a font cassette be changed, a  
manual form makes sure that the job is only printed when the printer has  
been prepared.  
●
PCLs (-pcl)  
PCLs (printer capability lists) are used to define what printing options a  
device provides. Furthermore, the PCL contains information on how the  
options specified when the job is submitted can be converted to device  
commands. Xprint V7.0 is supplied with a number of PCLs for the most  
common printers, and with one generic PCL which in most cases also allows  
printing on unknown devices. A list of all the PCLs supported by Xprint V7.0  
is provided in the Reference Manual.  
●
Users (-usr)  
Xprint V7.0 differentiates between two types of user: there are users, who  
are not defined in the Xprint V7.0 system, and Xprint V7.0 users, who are  
defined in the Xprint V7.0 system. users are all users of the system on  
which Xprint V7.0 is running; the default settings for Xprint V7.0 apply to  
them. If these settings are not sufficient, the users can be defined in the  
Xprint V7.0 system.  
The administrator can make more settings for Xprint V7.0 users than for  
users:  
–
–
–
Xprint V7.0 users can access their print jobs from all the hosts for which  
they are registered.  
They can be assigned a security level and thus be granted access to  
devices with a corresponding security level.  
Print quotas can be defined for the number of jobs or print pages  
allowed, thus preventing users from making unlimited numbers of  
printouts.  
●
Filters (-flt)  
Filters have the function of converting the data sent to the device by the user  
into the format required by the device. This makes it possible, for example,  
to print normal ASCII files on PostScript printers, as Xprint V7.0 is supplied  
with the filter vppost. Two types of filter are distinguished under Xprint V7.0:  
slow filters which are executed before the Xprint V7.0 process, and fast  
filters which are used to provide a link to objects other than standard compo-  
nents.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Xprint V7.0 elements  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
●
Fonts (-fnt)  
Font types supported by the printers in use can be easily accessed through  
the definition of fonts.  
●
Job templates (-jtp)  
Job templates serve to simplify the use of frequent print commands by  
allowing the options of the xpaddcommand, which must normally be  
specified individually, to be combined in groups. These can then be specified  
via the job template.  
●
●
●
Loadable resources(-lrs)  
Loadable resources allow faster printing of jobs that use the same  
background, logo, soft font etc. They also improve job recovery. A loadable  
resource must be downloaded to the printer before it can be called by a print  
job.  
Public loadable resources can be created, modified or deleted for the whole  
system by the Xprint V7.0 administrator. Individual users can create, modify  
or delete private loadable resources, that is loadable resources that are for  
their use only.  
Permission lists (-prm)  
Permission lists make it possible to define who may use which Xprint V7.0  
resources by granting the relevant privileges. The administrator can define  
the following privileges for users under Xprint V7.0:  
–
Which users may/may not use a device or a device group in Xprint V7.0  
or other environments.  
–
–
Which users may/may not use a specific form.  
Which forms may/may not be used on a specific printer.  
Recovery rules (-rec)  
Recovery rules are used to describe how specific device conditions are  
handled. The default recovery procedure in the case of a device error can be  
overridden by a recovery rule. In the case of the device error “paper_end”,  
for example, the default is for the Xprint V7.0 system to continue trying to  
print the job until the paper cassette is refilled. You could use a recovery rule  
to specify a different procedure (for example, to suspend the print job and  
set the device to NOT_ACTIVEuntil the administrator intervenes).  
12  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 elements  
2.4.2 Options for printing documents  
In a network as well as on a stand-alone system, Xprint V7.0 provides extensive  
functionality for printing documents (see also the Reference Manual):  
●
Selecting the output device of your choice  
You can print your documents on any device in the Xprint V7.0 system which  
you are allowed to use. You can choose either an individual device or a  
device group as the destination. You can also define your personal default  
device to which every print job is sent for which you do not explicitly specify  
a destination, and you can access devices which are not available in your  
own Xprint V7.0 domain via what are called gateways.  
●
Automatic adjustment of the document type  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to send any document to any device. If the relevant  
filters are defined, the document type is automatically adjusted to the device  
type. This makes it possible, for example, to print normal ASCII files on  
PostScript printers (the filter for this conversion is supplied with Xprint V7.0).  
●
Printing several copies of a document  
For every print job you can specify how many copies of the entire job are to  
be printed. Provided the printer supports this option, you can also print  
several copies of each individual page. In this case, each page is printed  
several times before the next page is printed.  
●
●
Printing parts of a document  
You can also print parts of a document. Here it is possible to define the part  
to be printed by specifying a range of pages or strings (“print from abcto  
xyz”).  
Printing at specific times  
For every print job, you can specify a time when it is to be printed. This allows  
you, for example, to schedule longer print jobs for nighttime printing. In  
addition, you can define that print jobs which have not been printed by a  
specific time are deleted automatically.  
●
Printing at a low priority  
Xprint V7.0 allows priorities to be assigned to print jobs. These priorities are  
user-specific, which enables print jobs of specific users to be given  
preference over those of others. Less important jobs can be assigned a  
lower priority.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
 
Xprint V7.0 elements  
Introduction to Xprint V7.0  
●
Printing confidential documents  
Every user and every device under Xprint V7.0 has what is called a “security  
level”. This allows you to ensure that confidential jobs are only printed on  
those devices which feature a corresponding security level.  
●
Selecting forms  
If there are several forms defined for a device, you can specify which of these  
forms you want to use for printing. Forms define the page format and the font  
attributes of a printout. However, you can always change the specifications  
for an existing form to make it meet your specific needs, for example by  
specifying a different typeface for a specific job. This also applies if only the  
default form is defined.  
●
●
Using resources that are external to the document  
Documents can be printed using external resources like logos, soft fonts etc.  
Calls to these resources may belong to the document, or they can be  
inserted automatically by Xprint V7.0 at the top of the page.  
Notification of the result  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to define how you want to be notified of the status of  
your print jobs. You can define, for example, that in the event of an error you  
want user Brown to be notified by mail.  
●
●
Direct printer control  
You can also control a specific printer directly and define specific printer  
settings, such as the line spacing.  
Defaults for print jobs  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to combine all the options mentioned above in what  
are called job templates. In this way, you can define frequently recurring  
settings once and then simply retrieve them whenever required. These job  
templates can be defined by each user.  
●
Individual, national-language user interface  
By default, Xprint V7.0 uses the national language set for you for displaying  
messages or menus. You can easily change this language by altering the  
setting of the environment variable LANG.  
14  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Producing Output with Xprint  
V7.0  
This chapter describes how to print documents using the command line  
interface. To begin with, it introduces the basic structure of the Xprint V7.0  
commands available to the normal Xprint V7.0 user and describes how and  
where you can obtain additional information on the commands. This is followed  
by several sections explaining the most important options for printing  
documents.  
3.1  
Basic information  
This section provides an introduction to using the Xprint V7.0 commands, their  
basic structure, and how you can access the online help for these commands at  
any time.  
Available Xprint V7.0 commands  
Xprint V7.0 provides a number of commands with which you can manipulate the  
Xprint V7.0 objects. The following table shows the Xprint V7.0 commands you  
can call as a user:  
Command  
xpadd  
Use  
adding print jobs  
xpchange  
xpdel  
changing the job status  
deleting print jobs  
xpmod  
modifying existing print jobs  
displaying information on Xprint V7.0 objects  
displaying the status of Xprint V7.0 objects  
xpshow  
xpstat  
Table 1: Xprint V7.0 commands  
As an ordinary user, you can only use all these commands for the job object.  
For all other objects you can only use the xpstatand xpshowcommands. Only  
the administrator can also use all the other commands for other objects.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
     
Basic information  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Structure of Xprint V7.0 commands  
This section describes the general structure of the Xprint V7.0 commands.  
Command Object type [Selection] Options  
----------------------------------------------------  
xpadd  
xpshow -job  
xpdel -job  
-job  
-dr file1 -ct SIMPLE  
-di LONG  
13  
13  
Every Xprint V7.0 command is called using this format. The name of the  
command, e.g. xpadd, is followed by the short identifier for the object type  
consisting of three characters, e.g. -job. Furthermore, you can select from the  
objects available of the selected object type, e.g. in the case of the object type  
-job,you can select one or more specific print jobs. Finally, there are a number  
of options available for most commands which have an effect on the behavior of  
the individual commands. For detailed information on the various Xprint V7.0  
commands see the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
Online help  
For every command, you can call online help with the -?option. This online help  
works on two levels: command and option level.  
If you call an Xprint V7.0 command followed by the -?option (e.g. xpadd -?),  
command level help will be displayed, providing the general form of this  
command. This type of help displays the objects supported by the command. It  
also shows the options that are independent of the object type. Not all the  
options are displayed, however, because these depend on the use of a  
command and an object together.  
Option level help displays all the possible options of a specific object type used  
with an Xprint V7.0 command. To call the online help at option level, you must  
specify the command name as well as the relevant object type before the -?  
option (e.g. xpshow -dgr -?).  
16  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Printing files  
3.2  
Printing files  
This section describes the simplest way of printing files with Xprint V7.0. This  
might be sufficient for some users while other users will require further options.  
Use the following basic command to print a complete document on your default  
printer:  
xpadd [-job] -drselection  
If you want to print a file, you do not have to specify the object type -jobfor the  
xpaddcommand as this is the default for xpadd. The -droption (document  
reference) is used to select one or more files for printing. After this option, for  
selection, specify the names of the files to be printed. The command could have  
the following format:  
xpadd -dr file  
xpadd -dr file1 file2.txt file3.xyz  
If you have specified only one file, only this file is sent to the printer; if you have  
specified several files, these are sent to the printer as one block. This block of  
combined files or the solitary file is called a print job.  
Instead of the xpaddcommand you can also use the X/Open command lpto  
submit a print job. As with the other X/Open commands lpstat and cancel, the  
lpcommand is described in the “SINIX - Commands” manual and in the  
appendix of the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
In addition to the -droption, there are numerous possible options for controlling  
the printing process. In the following sections many of these options are listed  
according to topics. A complete alphabetical overview of all the available options  
can be found in the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual” under the command  
xpadd -job. The table below serves as a guide through this section.  
If you want to ...  
Read ...  
print a document on a specific device section “Selecting a printer” on  
page 19  
print parts of a document  
section “Printing parts of a document”  
on page 21  
print a document with special data not section “Printing files with special  
suitable for the printer content types” on page 23  
Table 2: Options for controlling the printing process  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing files  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
If you want to ...  
Read ...  
print a document with a specific  
appearance  
section “Creating printouts with  
special formats” on page 24  
print the current state of the document section “Copying print files before  
printing and deleting them after  
printing” on page 33  
add separator pages between  
documents or files  
section “Defining separator pages” on  
page 34  
print several copies of a document  
section “Printing several copies of a  
document” on page 35  
be notified of the completion of your  
print job or of other events  
section “Requesting notification of the  
result” on page 36  
print a document using further Xprint section “Using further options” on  
V7.0 options  
page 37  
print a document using predefined  
fonts or forms  
section “Using other Xprint V7.0  
objects” on page 41  
print a document using loadable  
resources  
section “Using Resources” in the  
“Reference Manual”  
print a document using a predefined section “Printing a document via a  
job template  
globally defined job template” on  
page 44  
print a document with a private job  
template  
section “Defining customized job  
templates” on page 46  
Table 2: Options for controlling the printing process  
18  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Selecting a printer  
3.3  
Selecting a printer  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to print documents on any printer within your Xprint V7.0  
domain. You can select any printer for your printout for which you have the  
required privileges.  
There are two possible ways of selecting printers or printer groups for printing  
in Xprint V7.0. Firstly, you can specify one specific printer (group) for a print job,  
and secondly, you can define one or more printers as your personal default  
printers:  
If you do not specify a specific printer (group) for your print job, Xprint V7.0 will  
select a suitable printer according to the options specified for the print job (e.g.  
double-sided printing, landscape format).  
Specifying a printer or printer group for a print job  
You can select the printer on which you want to print your document according  
to various criteria. There are the following options:  
-de destination  
This option allows you to select a printer or printer group. If you select a  
printer group, Xprint V7.0 sends your job to a device which belongs to this  
group. Xprint V7.0 has a load balancing procedure which ensures the  
jobs will be distributed effectively between the printers in the group. You  
can display a list of the available printers via the xpshow -devcommand.  
The available printer groups can be displayed with the xpshow -dgr  
command.  
-pc pcl  
Instead of selecting a specific printer by its name, you can also use the  
printer capability list pclas a criterion, e.g. POSTSCRIPT, HP-LASERJETor  
HP-DESKJET. In this case, Xprint V7.0 sends your job to any available  
printer which uses the selected PCL.  
Addressing a printer via a gateway  
You can also select a printer (group) which is not defined in your Xprint V7.0  
domain, provided it can be reached via a gateway. This applies to  
printers/printer groups which are available in other Xprint V7.0 domains or  
which are connected to computers running the DPRINT printer spooler (for  
BS2000 systems) or the BSD printer spooler (for BSD-UNIX systems and other  
systems with an lpd print server).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
       
Selecting a printer  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
To address a printer (group) via a gateway, you must specify both the name of  
the gateway and the name of the desired destination, separating the names with  
the !character. Only the administrator can find out the name of all the gateways  
available using the xpshow -gtwcommand.  
To address a printer via a gateway, specify the combination gateway!printer as  
the printer name with the -deoption.  
Defining a default destination  
With the shell variable XP_DESTINyou can define one or more printers of your  
Xprint V7.0 domain as the default destination for your print jobs. In this case,  
each print job for which you do not explicitly specify a target printer will be  
printed on this default destination. If you have defined more than one printer as  
the default destination, Xprint V7.0 will select a suitable printer.  
To define a default destination, you must set the shell variable XP_DESTINto the  
names of the desired printers and export it before submitting a print job. The  
individual printers must be separated by spaces. If you want to define the default  
destination for every session with your computer, it is recommended that you set  
XP_DESTINin a file which is processed for every login (e.g., depending on the  
shell, the file .profileor .xsessionin your HOME directory).  
Examples  
–
–
–
–
–
To print a document on device printer1:  
xpadd -dr file1 -de printer1  
To print a document on printer printer1 via the gateway linuxgtw:  
xpadd -dr file1 -de linuxgtw!printer1  
To print a document on any device belonging to the device group SP211:  
xpadd -dr file1 -de SP211  
To print a PostScript file on any PostScript printer in the network:  
xpadd -dr file2.ps -pc POSTSCRIPT  
To print a document on a device with the PCL HP-LASERJETbelonging to the  
device group SP211:  
xpadd -dr file2 -de SP211 -pc HP-LASERJET  
To configure printer printer2 as the default destination:  
XP_DESTIN=printer2; export XP_DESTIN  
–
20  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
To print file1on printer printer2:  
xpadd -dr file1  
–
To configure printers printer1and printer2 as the default destination:  
XP_DESTIN=“printer1 printer2"  
export XP_DESTIN  
To print the file file1on one of the printers printer1or printer2:  
xpadd -dr file1  
3.4  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
This section describes further options for printing files with Xprint V7.0. The  
individual subsections describe the various possibilities offered by Xprint V7.0  
for printing documents.  
3.4.1 Printing parts of a document  
In raw mode, printing parts of documents is not supported.  
i
By default, all pages of a document are printed when xpaddis used. If you want  
to print only specific parts of the file, use one of the following options to select  
the sections to be printed:  
-ps page_select  
You can select individual pages or ranges of pages for printing by using one  
of the following methods:  
You can specify individual page numbers separated by commas, e.g.  
1,6,7,16  
pages 1, 6, 7, and 16 are printed.  
You can specify a range of pages a-b where b must always be larger than a:  
18-34  
pages 18 through 34 are printed.  
3-  
all pages from page 3 onward are printed  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
       
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
--23  
pages up to page 23 are printed.  
You can specify combinations of page ranges:  
--15,17-  
all pages are printed except for page 16.  
--15,27-30,35-  
all pages up to page 15, from page 27 through page 30, and from  
page 35 onward are printed.  
--15,30,35  
all pages up to page 15, page 30, and all pages from page 35 onward  
are printed.  
Finally, you can combine individual pages and page ranges.  
The two hyphens are indispensable and must always be specified if  
you want to print up to a certain page without specifying a start  
page.They prevent the minus sign from being interpreted as the  
beginning of a new option.  
i
If you do not specify any page numbers after the -psoption, all pages of the  
document are printed (exactly as if the -psoption had not been specified).  
-fr string  
A string in your document where printing is to start. If Xprint V7.0 does  
not find the specified string, nothing is printed.  
-to string  
A string in your document where printing is to stop. If Xprint V7.0 does  
not find the specified string in your document, the document is printed up  
to the end.  
If the -psoption is combined with the -frand/or -tooption, Xprint V7.0  
searches the specified strings in the page ranges defined with -ps.  
If the print job is sent to a device that does not use a PCL, i.e. prints in  
raw mode (see section “Using further options” on page 37), the options  
-ps, -fr, and -toare ignored.  
i
22  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Examples  
–
–
–
–
To print a document from page 5 through page 10:  
xpadd -dr file1 -ps 5-10  
To print a document from page 7 to the end:  
xpadd -dr file1 -ps 7-  
To print a document from page 1 through 5:  
xpadd -dr file1 -ps --5  
To print a document from the string Example 1up to the string  
}/* main */:  
xpadd -dr file1 -fr"Example 1" -to"}/* main */"  
–
To select the page range from page 5 to page 19 and print the section  
starting with the string abcup to the string xyzin this range:  
xpadd -dr file1-ps 5-19 -fr abc -to xyz  
3.4.2 Printing files with special content types  
The basic print command requires that the contents of the specified files can be  
processed by the printer. However, sometimes this is not the case. For example,  
a PostScript printer cannot print ASCII files directly. The simple ASCII data in  
the file must be converted to PostScript format before printing.  
Xprint V7.0 can make such conversions automatically if it knows the content  
type of the file and what the printer expects. The administrator specifies the  
supported content type when configuring the printer, while the content type of  
the print data must be specified by the user when defining the print job.  
If the two types match, Xprint V7.0 can send the print job directly to the printer;  
if they do not match, Xprint V7.0 will try to convert the print job data into a format  
suitable for the printer.  
If you do not specify a content type, the following will occur automatically:  
●
Xprint V7.0 will read the start of the data. If %!are the very first characters,  
or the string %!PSoccurs in the first 15 characters, then the content type will  
be set to POSTSCRIPT.  
●
If this is not the case and only SIMPLEcharacters are detected in the first 15  
characters, then the content type is set to SIMPLE.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
 
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
●
Otherwise, the content type is set to COMPATIBLE.  
If you are printing more than one document, then the content type than is deter-  
mined for the first document will be used for all the other documents in the job.  
3.4.3 Creating printouts with special formats  
Usually, a printer is not only capable of printing data on paper but can also do  
this in different formats. Therefore Xprint V7.0 also allows you to influence the  
formatting by specifying font settings, the page format, and the character set to  
be used.  
Printing a document with different font settings  
The following options allow you to change the default font for a printout. What  
you can modify depends on the printer you use. If you use the xpshow -pcl  
command and specify the PCL set for the selected printer, you can display a list  
of the fonts, styles, character pitches etc. that are supported by the printer, e.g.:  
xpshow -pcl HP-LASERJET -di LONG.  
A font always consists of several components such as typeface, style or  
font size. You can override these at any time, for example by modifying  
the font size.  
i
If you often want to print with such customized settings, you can also  
define a special job template for this purpose. For more detailed infor-  
mation see section “Defining customized job templates” on page 46.  
-tp typeface  
This option selects the specified typeface for the print job. Printers are  
supplied with a number of predefined typefaces. A list of the typefaces  
available for your printer under Xprint V7.0 can be displayed using the  
command  
xpshow -pcl -di LONG.  
-cs character_style  
You can choose between two character styles: STRAIGHTand ITALICS.  
The default is STRAIGHT.  
-hm horizontal_motion  
The value horizontal_motion specifies the number of characters printed  
horizontally per inch.  
24  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
-vm vertical_motion  
This option is used to specify the number of lines to be printed per inch.  
Selecting the layup  
Many printers can print in PORTRAIT and in LANDSCAPE format. In most cases the  
default is PORTRAIT. The following figure illustrates the possible settings:  
Figure 4: Layup settings  
The page layup can be changed with the following option:  
-ls layup_specification  
This option specifies whether a print job is to be printed in PORTRAITor in  
LANDSCAPEformat.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
   
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Defining the margin settings  
When printing under Xprint V7.0, you can also define which part of a page is to  
be printed on. The following figure provides an overview of the possible settings  
and is followed by a description of the individual options.  
-pw  
T, B, Land Rmark the  
printer-dependent non-  
printable area.  
T
-tm  
-lm  
The values for the non-  
printable margin are  
retrieved from the values  
nppland npllof the  
corresponding PCL  
object:  
-ll  
T = B = nppl/2  
L = R = npll/2  
R
L
-ph  
-pl  
B
Figure 5: Margin settings  
26  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Xprint V7.0 always defines its printable area by means of the logical page  
specified with the options -pl(page length) and -ll(line length). The margin  
options -tm(top margin) and -lm(left margin) can also be used for defining the  
printable area within the physical page. If only the margin settings -tmand -lm  
are specified, the bottom and right margin of the logical page are defined via the  
non-printable area. If a logical page is not given, the size of the printable area is  
calculated from the size of the physical page (-phfor the page height, -pwfor the  
page width) minus the non-printable margins.  
-lm left_margin  
This option specifies the width of the left margin in inches (i), centimeters  
(c) or millimeters (m) or, if no unit is specified, in characters.  
-ll line_length  
This option defines the maximum length of a print line, which indirectly  
also determines the right margin. This can also be specified in inches (i),  
centimeters (c) or millimeters (m). If no measurement is specified and no  
left margin is defined, the value is interpreted as the number of  
characters per line. If no value is specified, the page width specified with  
the -pwoption minus the printer-specific non-printable margin widths is  
used.  
This option is controlled by the option -wm(wrap mode), i.e. the line length  
is modified if the printable line length is exceeded. For more information  
refer to the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
-tm top_margin  
This option is used to specify the width of the top margin in inches (i),  
centimeters (c) or millimeters (m) or, if no unit is specified, in characters.  
-pl page_length  
This option defines the maximum length of a printed page, and thus  
indirectly also the bottom margin. This can also be specified in inches (i),  
centimeters (c) or millimeters (m). If no measurement is specified, the  
value is interpreted as the number of lines per page. If no value is  
specified and no top margin is defined, the page height specified with the  
-phoption minus the printer-specific non-printable top and bottom  
margins is used.  
Depending on the printer, the margins on the printout may differ from the  
set values. Therefore it is advisable to print a sample copy first in order  
to adjust the values for the printer. Also bear in mind that the printable  
area is controlled by the -wmoption (wrap mode) of the xpadd -job  
command.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
       
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Switching double-sided printing on/off  
When printing jobs which comprise several pages, it often makes sense to  
change the page settings for even- and odd-numbered pages in such a way that  
they face each other as in a book. The margin settings should be set alternately  
to result in a symmetrical overall image. The following figure shows the various  
options for double-sided printing under Xprint V7.0:  
DOUBLE_WIDE & PORTRAIT  
SINGLE & PORTRAIT  
DOUBLE_NARROW & PORTRAIT  
DOUBLE_NARROW & LANDSCAPE  
SINGLE & LANDSCAPE DOUBLE_WIDE & LANDSCAPE  
Figure 6: Options for double-sided printing  
-sd side _specification  
This option is used to specify whether a form is to be printed only on one  
side (SINGLE) or on both sides. In the case of double-sided printing you  
specify the gutter for the portrait side (DOUBLE_WIDE) or for the landscape  
side (DOUBLE_NARROW). By default, single-sided printing (SINGLE) is set.  
28  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Selecting specific character sets  
Depending on the PCL, a printer supports a number of special character sets,  
e.g. ENGLISH, FRENCH, INTERNATIONALetc. If you want a job to be printed using a  
specific character set table, e.g. the character set INTERNATIONAL, you must  
specify this with the option -la character_set.  
The supported character sets can be seen in the Language field of the output of  
the xpshow -pcl pcl_name -di LONGcommand.  
Examples  
–
To print the document file1with a left margin of 5 cm and a top margin of  
34 mm:  
xpadd -dr file1 -lm 5c -tm 34m  
–
–
To print the file file1double-sided (with a vertical gutter):  
xpadd -dr file1 -sd DOUBLE_WIDE  
To print file english(created using the English character set) using the  
character set INTERNATIONAL:  
xpadd -dr english -la INTERNATIONAL  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
3.4.4 Using Loadable Resources  
The figure below gives a simplified view of how loadable resources work. This  
is explained more fully in the following paragraphs.  
Data (document)  
Loadable Resources  
Font  
This is sample text. This is  
another line. This is sample text.  
This is another line of sample  
text. This is a further line of sam-  
ple text. This is one more line of  
sample text. This is a further line  
of sample text. This is one more  
line of... This is sample text. This  
is another line of sample text.  
This is a further line of sample  
mylogo  
Logo  
mylogo  
This is sample text. This is  
Font used by text  
Text (foreground)  
another line. This is sample text.  
This is another line of sample  
text. This is a further line of sam-  
ple text. This is one more line  
of... of sample text. This is a fur-  
ther line of sample text. This is  
one more line of...This is sample  
text. This is another line of sam-  
ple text. This is a further line of  
Background  
Figure 7: Function of loadable resources  
30  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Loadable resources (such as fonts, logos etc.) can be sent to the printer  
separately from the document. The printer will merge the data and the loadable  
resource to give the required printed output.  
The resources external to the document can be defined as Xprint V7.0 objects  
called “loadable resources”. They can either be predefined by the administrator  
for the entire system and made available to all users, or they can be defined by  
each individual user as “private loadable resources”. For further information on  
creating and using loadable resources, see Chapter 4 in the “Reference  
Manual”.  
3.4.4.1 Using Public Loadable Resources  
The administrator may have configured loadable resources in the system. To  
print a document that uses resources, use the following option:  
-lr loadable resources  
With this option, you can reference a list of loadable resources.  
Examples  
–
To display the loadable resources available in the system, use the command  
xpshow -lrs  
The system displays a list of all loadable resources that can be used. For  
example, you could use any of the loadable resources listed below.  
Name Type  
---- ----  
logo Overlay  
Administrator PCL  
------------- ---------  
root  
PJL-PCL5e  
PJL-PCL5e  
font Softfont root  
Please note that only those loadable resources are displayed which  
have been defined by the Xprint V7.0 administrator. Your own job  
loadable resources in the $HOME/.Xprintfile are not displayed but can  
also be used.  
i
–
To print a document with a logo on every page:  
xpadd -dr mydocument -lr logo -cr ALL  
Xprint V7.0 is only able to insert calls to resources at the top of a page in a  
document. Other cases must be dealt with by the user. The user must call  
the resource with the appropriate escape sequence (see the printer manual)  
and with the identifier known by the printer. This identifier is shown in the  
Internal Idfield in the xpshow -lrs -di LONGdisplay.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
       
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
3.4.4.2 Using Private Loadable Resources  
Only administrators can create public loadable resources, but users can create  
private loadable resources. To do this, create a file named .Xprintin your  
home directory. You can insert as many comment lines as you like, which must  
start with the “#” character. The definition of a loadable resource starts with its  
name followed by any options allowed by xpadd -lrs. If a definition continues  
on the next line, the current line must end with a backslash character.  
Resources first have to be created with dedicated tools such as FGL or  
SIEFONT from Siemens. These tools will generate the data to be downloaded  
to the printer. The name of the generated file can be saved in a loadable  
resource object. Each resource needs its own identifier in the printer. This  
identifier has to be reflected in the resource object as the “printer internal  
identifier”. The description of a resource can be registered in a loadable  
resource object.  
Resources may be called from documents if they include printer commands that  
call the resource.  
Examples  
–
The following example shows the definition of several loadable resource  
objects.  
# Private .Xprint file  
#
# Loadable resources  
# everypage logo  
mylogo -pi 101 -pc HP-LASERJET -tp Overlay -ec  
-fi $HOME/lrs/mylogo.hp -cr ALL  
mybckgrd -pi 102 -pc HP-LASERJET -tp Overlay -ec  
-fi $HOME/lrs/mybckgrd.hp  
–
Jobs can use the loadable resources as follows:  
xpadd -dr mydocument -lr mylogo  
xpadd -dr mydocument -lr mylogo mybckgrd  
If a private loadable resource has the same name as a predefined  
(public) loadable resource, the private one is given preference when the  
name is selected. This means that first your .Xprintfile is searched for  
private loadable resoures. If none can be found, or the .Xprintfile does  
not exist, or the .Xprintfile is not readable, then the resource is  
assumed to be a public loadable resource.  
i
32  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
For inter-domain printing, resources are assumed to be available in the  
remote domain. This restricts resources to public ones.  
3.4.5 Copying print files before printing and deleting  
them after printing  
The basic command xpadd -dr file prints the specified file by adding to the  
job queue a reference to the original file. If there is some time between job  
submission and the actual printing, any changes made to the document during  
this time also affect the printout. This is not always desirable. For this reason,  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to make a copy of the data to be printed. This can be  
done using the following option:  
-cp (cp stands for copy file)  
This option causes a copy to be made of the document to be printed. This  
way the original file can immediately be edited further or can be deleted  
without these modifications affecting the printout.  
Another option causes a file to be deleted immediately after printing:  
-rm (rm stands for remove file after printing)  
This option causes all the specified files to be deleted after the printout.  
If the printout is not finished, for example due to an error or because the  
job was canceled, the files are not removed from the system. If a  
retention period was specified with the -rp retention_period option, this  
file is only deleted when this period of time has elapsed. If Xprint V7.0 is  
not active on the relevant host system at the scheduled delete time, the  
files cannot be removed.  
If the options -cpand -rmare used simultaneously, the -rmoption is  
ignored without notice and only -cpis interpreted.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
   
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
3.4.6 Defining separator pages  
With printers which are used by many users at the same time or when listing  
paper is used, it can make sense to add separator pages between the different  
print jobs. This makes it easier to distinguish the print jobs of the individual users  
or two different print jobs. For this purpose, Xprint V7.0 offers the option of  
defining print jobs with a start or end sheet. Additionally, individual files of one  
job can be separated by adding separator sheets.  
-js job_start_sheet  
-je job_end_sheet  
-sp separator_sheet  
With a print job you can specify whether start and end sheets are to be  
printed, or in the case of several documents also separator sheets between  
the documents. The variables of these options can be set to the following  
values: BRIEF, FULLand NONE. The default is NONE.  
Example  
To insert a start sheet of type BRIEFand separator sheets of type FULLfor print  
job job1:  
xpadd -dr file1 file2 file3 -jt job1 -js BRIEF -sp FULL  
34  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
3.4.7 Printing several copies of a document  
There are two possible ways of printing several copies of a document. Firstly,  
you can print the entire document, and secondly you can print each page of the  
document several times. The difference is that in the first case the copies of the  
document are sorted while in the second case they are not. The second option,  
however, might be faster if the printer itself can print several copies of individual  
pages (e.g. HP-LASERJET printers).  
You can define the number of copies for the entire document using the following  
option:  
-fc number  
number defines the number of copies of the specified documents to be  
printed. If this option is not specified, exactly one copy of each document  
is printed.  
If you have access to a printer supporting multiple printouts (e.g. an HP-  
LASERJET printer), you can use the following option to print several copies of  
each individual page:  
-fp number  
In this case, number defines how often each page of the job is to be  
printed.  
This option is not supported by PostScript printers.  
i
Examples  
–
To print three copies of a document:  
xpadd -dr file1 -fc 3  
–
To print five copies of pages 1 through 5 of a document one after the other:  
xpadd -dr file1 -ps 1-5 -fp 5  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
         
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
3.4.8 Requesting notification of the result  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to have a message about the result of a print job sent to  
you. This is particularly useful if the period of time between the job’s submission  
and its execution is fairly long (e.g. in the case of scheduled print jobs and jobs  
with a low priority). For this purpose, Xprint V7.0 provides several options for the  
xpaddcommand:  
-ev events  
With this option you can specify the events of which you want to be  
notified. Possible events are: ALL, DEVICE_ERROR, MOUNTINGand NONE. The  
default is NONEfor local jobs, or REJECTED_FROM_REMOTE_DOMAIN if the job  
was sent via a gateway (or ALLif either of the options -nmor -nais  
specified). Further settings are STARTED, COMPLETED, ABORTED, SUSPEND,  
RESUMED, DEVICE_ERROR, USER_ERROR, MODIDFIED and  
SENT_TO_REMOTE_DOMAIN (a detailed description of these keywords is  
given in the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”).  
-nm notification_method  
With this option you can specify how you want to be notified. The default  
is MAIL, other possible settings are WRITE, COMMANDand FILE (see the  
“Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual” for details).  
-na notification_address  
With this option you specify where the message is to be delivered.  
-nd comment (nd stands for notification descriptor)  
Allows you to define a comment that is to be added to the message.  
Examples  
–
To request a message to be sent to yourself via the writecommand when  
the job is completed or aborted:  
xpadd -dr file1 -ev COMPLETED ABORTED -nm WRITE  
To log all the events of the print job in the file /home/baxter/print.log:  
xpadd -dr file1 -nm FILE -na /home/baxter/print.log  
To notify user smithof every modification of the print job via mail:  
xpadd -dr file1 -ev MODIFIED -na smith  
–
–
–
To send a job to a gateway and request information in the event of an error:  
xpadd -dr file1 -de gateway1!printer1 \  
-ev REJECTED_FROM_REMOTE_DOMAIN  
36  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
3.4.9 Using further options  
This section describes further useful options of the xpaddcommand.  
Printing in raw mode  
Besides printing on predefined forms, Xprint V7.0 allows you to specify  
formatting and printer control sequences for the printer yourself. This can be  
done with the -rw option (raw mode). Xprint V7.0 sends the document to the  
selected printer without making changes to your formatting. This option is  
particularly useful if you use the xpaddcommand as a print command for an  
application program which formats the print data itself.  
Retention period of print jobs  
When the print process is finished, the information which can be displayed with  
xpshowand xpstat is also deleted from the spooler system. If you want this  
information to still be available, you can specify a period of time in minutes with  
the option -rp retention_period. This defines how long the print job is to be  
retained in the system after its completion. The default is 0 (remove immedi-  
ately).  
If you specify the keyword INFINITE, the print job remains in the system  
permanently.  
i
Printing a document directly  
To send a document directly to the printer by bypassing the print queue, you can  
use the option -dp(stands for direct printing). This option allows quick printing  
of a document; you cannot, however, modify the print job (xpmodor xpchange) or  
request information on the job (xpshow). You can only select one printer, which  
must be disabled for normal Xprint V7.0 spoolout by the Xprint V7.0 adminis-  
trator. You are only assigned a local rather than a global ID for the print job you  
submit. This local ID can be used to delete the job (xpdel) or display its status  
(xpstat).  
Initial state of a print job  
When a print job is transferred to the spooler, it is automatically assigned the  
status WAIT(waiting for printout). You can, however, also assign it the status  
SUSPEND(to defer it) or TOP(to move it to the top of the print queue) with the -st  
option if your Xprint V7.0 administrator has given you the required permission.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
37  
               
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
The -waoption (wait activation) allows you to assign the status SCHEDULEDto the  
print job. This means that the print job is added to the print queue and moves in  
it according to its priority. When it comes to the top position, the printer to which  
the job is assigned is no longer available for other jobs. Only when the print job  
is explicitly assigned the status ACTIVE(xpchange -job, option -st ACTIVE), is  
printing started. When the print job is completed, the printer is released for use  
by other print jobs again.  
Figure 8: States of print jobs  
Extended options  
The –exflag has been introduced to extend the set of pre-defined object  
attributes in a flexible way.  
The purpose of this option is twofold:  
●
●
adapt product behavior via predefined variables.  
collect and store any interesting information for the user or the administrator  
in a structured way.  
Example:  
–
–
the room number where the printer is located  
the page cost of a printer  
38  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using Xprint V7.0 options  
–
–
the e-mail adress of a user  
the operating system of a host...  
It consists in a list of strings that can be stored in all Xprint V7.0 objects. Each  
string must respect the following format: “<variable>=<value>”.  
Example:  
<command_name> <object_type> name [...] [operand] [options] -  
ex "variable1=value1" "variable2=value2" [...]  
Besides the options mentioned above, there are numerous additional options  
for printing files with Xprint V7.0. For a complete overview of all the possible  
options see the description of the xpadd -jobcommand in the “Xprint V7.0  
-
Reference Manual”.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other Xprint V7.0 objects  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
3.5  
Using other Xprint V7.0 objects  
The previous section has already mentioned a number of options which are in  
some cases closely related to each other. For example, the options for defining  
font settings and the options for defining page settings are logically connected.  
Xprint V7.0 responds to this fact by providing two objects which combine  
logically connected settings. These are the objects font (-fnt) and form (-frm).  
With the help of objects of these types, the corresponding settings can be  
defined globally and called up for printing.  
Instead of specifying several options, e.g. for defining the font settings, you only  
need to specify a single option which will activate a predefined font. Here the  
following applies:  
A font comprises all the options for font settings, a form comprises a font as well  
as all the options for page and margin settings for a printout. Fonts are assigned  
to forms and these in turn are assigned to printers. By default, every printer is  
assigned the GENERICform which defines the default settings for the printer. An  
administrator can define new fonts or forms and assign these to printers. A user  
can only assign these objects to his/her print jobs, thus overriding the default  
settings.  
Selecting a font or form does not mean, however, that all the options defined by  
this object must be accepted exactly as they are. Every user can assign to a job  
a predefined form and additionally specify single options which will override the  
settings defined by the form.  
Fonts and forms are selected with the following options:  
-ft font_name  
If you want to use a predefined font for printing your document, select the  
font font_name with the -ftoption. You must, however, make sure that the  
printer to which your print job is sent supports the selected font. You can  
display a list of the defined fonts with the xpshow -fnt command.  
-fm form_name  
form_name is the name of a predefined form on which you want to print  
your document. You can display a list of all the available forms with the  
xpshow -frmcommand.  
There are two types of form: AUTOMATICand MANUAL. This differentiation is due to  
the fact that there are forms which require manual intervention at the printer  
(e.g. changing paper or font cassettes) and others which do not.  
40  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using other Xprint V7.0 objects  
Jobs using forms of the type MANUAL, which require manual intervention  
at the printer, are only printed when Xprint V7.0 is informed that the  
required steps for printing these jobs have been performed. For this  
purpose Xprint V7.0 provides the xpmountcommand which sends this  
information to Xprint V7.0.  
i
Printing a document with a MANUAL form  
To print a document with a MANUAL form, proceed as follows:  
●
Submit the print job and select the required form:  
xpadd -job -dr file -fm form  
●
●
Prepare the target printer accordingly.  
Now tell the system that the form is mounted and printing can thus be  
started. Use the following command:  
xpmount  
By means of menus the system then asks you to specify the mounted form  
and target printer (see example). When the required specifications are  
made, the system starts printing the document.  
The xpmountcommand also provides the options -fform, -dprinter and -s  
(silent mode, i.e. the user is not asked for mount confirmation); this allows  
you to avoid the menu selection by explicitly specifying the relevant values.  
●
●
If you need to print with normal settings again, make the required changes  
on the printer.  
Notify the system of this:  
xpmount -f- -d printer  
where the option -dprinter, i.e. the printer from which the form was removed,  
must be specified.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
41  
           
Using other Xprint V7.0 objects  
Examples  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
–
To display all defined forms :  
xpshow -frm  
A list of all the available forms is displayed, which might read as follows:  
Name  
----  
Default font Layup  
------------ -----  
User perm. Mount method  
---------- ------------  
AUTOMATIC  
GENERIC GENERIC  
PORTRAIT  
PORTRAIT  
LANDSCAPE  
LANDSCAPE  
LETTER  
A5LAND  
MANUAL  
COURIER  
GENERIC  
GENERIC  
perm1  
AUTOMATIC  
MANUAL  
MANUAL  
Forms with the value MANUALin the Mount methodcolumn require  
specific manual settings to be made (e.g. mounting the correct paper,  
see section “Printing a document with a MANUAL form” on page 41).  
i
–
–
–
To print a document using the form LETTER:  
xpadd -dr file1 -fm LETTER  
To print a document via the form A5LAND, but using the font COURIER:  
xpadd -dr file1 -fm A5LAND -ft COURIER  
To print the document file1on the printer printer1 with the (manual) form  
A5LAND:  
xpadd -job -dr file1 -de printer1 -fm A5LAND  
The user mounts the required form.  
xpmount  
The following menu query is displayed:  
Please select the manual form to mount on the device.  
Selection:  
0. Unmount the form  
1. manual  
2. A5LAND  
Type number or”?” for help:  
Input: 2  
Form”A5LAND” has been selected.  
Please select the device where the form”A5LAND” will be  
mounted.  
42  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Using other Xprint V7.0 objects  
Selection:  
1. printer1  
2. printer2  
3. printer3  
Type number or”?” for help:  
Input: 1  
Device”printer1" has been selected.  
Please mount”A5LAND" on device”printer1".  
Type "y" when finished or"?" for help:  
Input: y  
Form"A5LAND" is now mounted on device"printer1".  
The printer now starts printing the document file1. When printing is  
finished, the user removes the form from the printer and notifies the system  
of this:  
xpmount -f- -d printer1  
Again the confirmation is displayed on the screen:  
Form unmounted for"printer1"  
–
To print the document file2on printer printer2using the form manual:  
xpadd -job -dr file2 -de printer2 -fm manual  
The user mounts the required form.  
Then he/she enters the command xpmount, this time avoiding the query by  
specifying the required values explicitly:  
xpmount -f manual -d printer2 -s  
Xprint V7.0 confirms with the following message:  
Form"manual" is now mounted on device"printer2".  
The printer starts printing the document file2.  
When printing is finished, the user unmounts the form on the printer and  
notifies the system of this:  
xpmount -f- -d printer2  
Again the confirmation is displayed on the screen:  
Form unmounted for"printer2"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
Job templates  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
3.6  
Job templates  
Just as different font settings can be combined in the font objects, print job  
settings can be combined in an Xprint V7.0 object. This is called a job template  
(-jtp). Job templates can either be predefined by the administrator for the entire  
system and made available to all users, or they can be defined by each  
individual user as private job templates.  
In Xprint V7.0, jobs are sent to a device, a device group, or to an unspecified  
target. This is different to a number of other print spoolers, where jobs are sent  
to a qualified print queue. Sending jobs to a qualified print queue allows admin-  
istrators to associate print characteristics with each queue (e.g. a form, a print  
density etc.). For the users, this means that selecting a queue automatically  
selects the characteristics associated with that queue. Using this approach,  
each physical printer can be associated with several logical queues, each  
logical queue having its own characteristics.  
The Xprint V7.0 job templates work in a similar way. Administrators can define  
job templates, to which they assign a job destination (device or device group),  
with print characteristics. If users submit their jobs by using templates instead  
of specifying a destination, this has the same effect as using the qualified  
queues of the other spoolers.  
3.6.1 Printing a document via a globally defined job  
template  
The Xprint V7.0 administrator might have configured job templates in the  
system. These contain all the options required for frequently submitted print  
jobs of a specific type. Users no longer have to enter the individual options but  
simply select the appropriate template.  
To print a document with a job template use the following option:  
-te job_template  
With this option you can use exactly one predefined job template or a job  
template you have defined yourself for your print job.  
44  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Job templates  
Examples  
–
To display the job templates available in the system:  
xpshow -jtp  
The system displays a list of all the job templates the Xprint V7.0 adminis-  
trator has defined. This list can look, for example, as follows:  
Name  
Destination  
Form  
Font  
fc pr  
rm  
----  
----------- ----  
printer1  
printer1  
----  
-- -- --  
letter1  
letter2  
template1  
001 020 RESET  
001 001 RESET  
001 001 RESET  
A5LAND TIMES  
You can use any of the listed templates for your print jobs.  
Please note that only those job templates are displayed which have  
been defined by the Xprint V7.0 administrator. Your own job templates  
in the $HOME/.Xprint V7.0file are not displayed but can also be used  
i
(see next page).  
–
To use the predefined job template template1and overwrite the template’s  
priority, making it 5:  
xpadd -dr file1 -te template1 -pr 5  
For the printout, the options defined for this template are used instead of the  
-teoption.  
Do not confuse option -tejob_template with -jtjob_title.  
i
You can modify the options defined in the selected job template by  
explicitly specifying the relevant options with the modified values in  
the command line:  
xpadd -jtp my_job -pr 10  
xpadd -dr file_1 -te my_job -pr 15  
The job is spooled in with the priority 15.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
 
Job templates  
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
3.6.2 Defining customized job templates  
Not only the system administrator but also the users themselves can define job  
templates. To do this, create a file named .Xprint V7.0in your home directory.  
You can insert as many comment lines as you like. Comment lines must start  
with the ’#’ character. The definition of the job template starts with the template  
name. This is followed by the options for this template. All xpaddoptions are  
allowed. Strings must be enclosed in inverted commas or quotes, e.g. -jc ’a  
comment’. If a definition is to be continued in the next line, the current line must  
end with a backslash.  
Job templates are a convenient way of combining recurring option  
sequences to form a template (e.g. if you want to assign a specific font to  
i
a specific paper format). In this way you do not have to specify all your  
selected settings for every print job. When defining a customized job  
template, you do not necessarily have to define all settings but you can  
also modify the settings of an existing template such that it meets your  
requirements.  
Examples  
–
The following example shows several simple job templates:  
# Private .Xprint file  
#
# JOB TEMPLATE  
# for letters:  
letter  
#
-de printer1 -fm form3 -la USA -jt letters -cp  
# for ASCII files on PostScript printer printer2:  
a2ps  
#
-de printer2 -ct SIMPLE -cp  
# with notification of success or failure:  
notification -ev COMPLETED ABORTED -nm WRITE\  
-nd ’Send message on termination’  
–
This example shows the templates letter and notification. The  
templates are then used as follows:  
xpadd -dr file1 -te letter  
xpadd -dr file1 -te notification -pr 5  
For the printout, the options defined for this template are used instead of the  
specified -teoption.  
46  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Producing Output with Xprint V7.0  
Job templates  
If a customized job template has the same name as a predefined job  
template, the customized one is given preference over the predefined  
template when this name is selected. This means that your .Xprint V7.0  
file is searched first for the customized job template. If it cannot be found,  
the .Xprint V7.0file does not exist or is not readable, the job template  
is assumed to be a globally defined template.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Managing print jobs  
This section shows the possible ways of displaying, modifying or deleting a  
submitted print job. The following table serves as a guide through this section:  
If you want to ...  
Read ...  
display a print job  
section “Displaying print jobs” on page 55  
modify a submitted print job  
section “Modifying a submitted print job” on  
page 61  
delete a print job  
section “Deleting print jobs” on page 65  
Table 3: Managing print jobs  
As you have to select submitted print jobs to be able to delete or modify them,  
the following section “Selecting a print job” first describes the possible ways of  
selecting print jobs.  
4.1  
Selecting a print job  
To manage a submitted print job, you must first select the job. You can only  
select print jobs which are still in a print queue.  
There are several different ways of doing this. This section describes how to  
select individual print jobs via the job’s default identifier or how to select one or  
more print jobs via a selection criteria list.  
The job identifier  
When you submit a print job, it is placed in a print queue. If your print job is  
accepted for printing, Xprint V7.0 automatically returns unique IDs by which you  
can identify your print job in the print queue. These IDs have the following  
formats:  
<local ID><global ID>  
or  
<global ID><permanent ID>  
The local ID is a number specifying the serial number of the job for your host. It  
can only be used on the host on which the print job was started.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
             
Selecting a print job  
Managing print jobs  
The global ID consists of the name of the server which processes the print job  
and a serial job number for this server. This ID can be used from any host on  
which you are registered as a user.  
The permanent ID is an extension of the local ID, intended to be unique in time,  
i.e. never reused for another job. The permanent job ID is made of the client host  
name, a counter that garantees the permanence of this identifier and the local  
ID.Please refer to page 51 for a complete description of the permanent ID.  
A job ID might, for example, read as follows:  
<18><se1:97>  
In this example, 18is the local job ID, se1is the server name and 97is the serial  
job ID on this server.  
You should note these IDs in case you need to access the print job before its  
execution is completed. If you do not know the ID of the print job you want to  
access, you can request a list of all your print jobs (see section “Displaying print  
jobs” on page 55).  
In addition, the print job is always assigned a job title, which is either the same  
as that of the print file (in the case of a job with several files it is the name of the  
first file), or which has been specified explicitly with the -jtjob_title option.  
If you select a print job via its identifier, you can use the number as well as the  
job title.  
This is illustrated by the following example:  
xpadd -dr file1  
XP000002: Job <18><se1:97> added  
You can select this print job using the following methods:  
xpstat 18  
xpstat file1  
xpstat se1:97  
xpstat se1:file1  
Note that, unlike the job ID, the job title is not always unique. If there are  
several jobs with the same title, specifying this title selects all of them.  
i
You can also use the wildcards *and ?when specifying the job title. These have  
the same meanings as with UNIX commands. *represents any number of  
characters, ?represents exactly one character. The following example selects  
all the print jobs at the server se1whose job title starts with da:  
xpstat -job se1:da*  
50  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Managing print jobs  
Selecting a print job  
The permanent job identifier  
The permanent job identifier is usable in the same way as the local job id in the  
PRISMAnet domain.  
A new key has been integrated in the job structure to garantee the permanence  
of the job identifier, which means it will never be assigned to another job.  
The permanent job identifier format is: H@C@L  
Where  
H:is the client host name to make the permanent id single in a domain.  
@:is the first separator character.  
C:is a counter of 10 digits (it will never be reset).  
@:is the second separator character.  
L:is the local job id.  
It will be possible to select a job with a permanent job id in the following  
commands:  
- xpchange  
- xpdel  
- xpmod  
- xpshow  
- xpstat  
When a job is submitted, Xprint V7.0 displays the permanent-id or the local job  
id if the value of the extended option of xpadd or whether the environment  
variable "XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID" is set to "1".  
Example:  
# xpadd -de device -dr filename -ex "XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID=1"  
XP000002: Job <d241s081@0000000245@1> (<d241s081:8>) added  
Or  
# XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID=1  
# export XP_SHOW_PERMANENT_ID  
# xpadd -de device -dr filename  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
 
Selecting a print job  
Managing print jobs  
XP000002: Job <d241s081@0000000245@1> (<d241s081:8>) added  
The permanent job id is only usable locally on the submission host as it is  
the case with the local job id.  
Example:  
A job with the permanent job id "host1@0000003049@5" has been added  
on host1 and the following command is submitted from host2:  
# xpshow host1@0000003049@5  
L. jid Global jid Originator Destination Form fc pr  
------ ---------- ---------- ----------- ---- -- --  
XP000093: <host1@0000003049@5> not accessible  
Selection criteria lists  
You can also access submitted print jobs via what are called selection criteria  
lists. In this case you can select print jobs via specific criteria, such as the  
printer to which the job was sent, its priority, the scheduled print time, etc.  
Selection criteria may be specified for all commands with which you can display,  
modify or delete print jobs. Use the following option:  
-scl “selection_criteria_list”  
This option allows you to select print jobs according to criteria which must  
be enclosed in double quotes. The selection criteria are all the options  
which were specified when the print job was defined, except for -jt  
job_title, -te job_template and -sx(silent execution).  
In the case of options without arguments (Boolean options) you can  
select the relevant option by means of a following +(set) or -(not set)  
sign.  
In the case of options which allow for the use of several combined values,  
normally those jobs are selected for which at least the specified values  
are set. For an exclusive search for print jobs with exactly the specified  
values, the option must be followed by the =sign.  
The wildcards *and ?are allowed for non-numerical arguments.  
Examples  
–
To delete all print jobs for printer printer1:  
xpdel [-job] -scl "-de printer1"  
52  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Managing print jobs  
Selecting a print job  
–
–
To display all print jobs with the priority 5 and the content type SIMPLE:  
xpshow [-job] -scl "-pr 5 -ct SIMPLE"  
To display all print jobs for which the option -cpwas specified:  
xpshow [-job] -scl "-cp+"  
or  
xpshow [-job] -scl "-cp"  
–
To display all the print jobs for which the option -cp was not specified:  
xpshow [-job] -scl "-cp-"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
Selecting a print job  
Managing print jobs  
Examples of the output formats SHORT and LONG  
–
To obtain a SHORTdisplay, enter the following command:  
xpshow [-job] -scl "-de printer1" [-di SHORT]  
You will obtain the following display:  
L.jid Global jid Originator Destination Form fc pr  
----- ---------- ---------- ----------- ---- -- --  
1
si511:7  
xprintadm  
printer1  
001 001  
–
To obtain a LONG display, enter the following command:  
xpshow [-job] -scl "-de printer1" -di LONG  
You will obtain the following display:  
LOCAL JOB ID: 2  
Global job id: si511:8 si511:/etc/passwd  
Permanent job id.: d241psap@0000000036@2  
Document references: etc/passwd  
Destination: printer1  
Candidate printers: printer1  
Form: Font: No validation: RESET  
pcl:  
Original job size:2788  
Job priority: 020 File copies: 001 Page copies: 001  
Page select:  
From string:  
To string:  
Originator: xprintadm Security level: UNCLASSIFIED  
Submission time: Wed Aug 30 16:44:04 MET 1995  
Submission host: nile  
Print after: Wed Aug 30 16:44:04 MET 1995 Retention time:  
Retention period: 0 Remove: RESET File(s) copied: RESET  
FF mode:  
Wait activation: RESET  
Wrap mode: NONE Tab space: 08 Raw printing: RESET  
Hopper number: 00 Output bin: 00 First page behaviour: RESET  
Loaded files:  
Map table: Content type: COMPATIBLE No filter: RESET  
Special print modes:  
Notification events: NONE  
Delivery method: MAIL  
Delivery address:  
Slow filters:  
Delivery descriptor:  
Submitted command: xpadd -de printer1 -dr/etc/passwd  
Extended options:  
Comment:  
54  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing print jobs  
Displaying print jobs  
4.2  
Displaying print jobs  
You can display individual or all print jobs in the print queue. Information on your  
print jobs can be obtained with the commands xpshowand xpstatwhich also  
allow you to view the status of your print jobs :  
The xpshowand xpstatcommands can be used to display the attributes  
of all objects in Xprint V7.0. Therefore the following applies not only to  
print jobs but to all Xprint V7.0 objects.  
i
xpshowprovides all the static attributes of objects (i.e. those which are not  
modified by the Xprint V7.0 system itself), while xpstatprovides information on  
the dynamic criteria. The two corresponding commands xpmodand xpchange  
can be used to modify or change the settings of Xprint V7.0 objects. xpmod  
modifies the static settings while xpchangechanges the dynamic state.  
List of print jobs  
You can display a list of print jobs to find out, for example, the names of the  
existing print jobs.  
●
To display a list of all the existing print jobs, use the following command:  
xpshow [-job]  
This command returns a table with all the print jobs you can access. This  
table contains only the most important information.  
Detailed information on print jobs  
You can output more detailed information on one or more print jobs to find out,  
for example, which options are set for the print jobs.  
●
To display detailed information on a print job, use the following command:  
xpshow [-job] [job] -di LONG  
For job you can specify either a job identifier or a selection criteria list. Infor-  
mation on the selected print jobs is then displayed job by job. If you omit job,  
you receive information on all the existing print jobs.  
The output of xpshow -jobis self-explanatory and therefore not described  
here.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
55  
     
Displaying print jobs  
Managing print jobs  
Selected information on print jobs  
You can also display only specific attributes of print jobs. This is again achieved  
by means of parameter lists or templates.  
Displaying attributes via parameter list  
●
If you only want to display specific attributes for print jobs, use the following  
command:  
xpshow -di "parameter_list"  
The selected attributes must be specified for parameter_list, listing the  
individual parameters in one string.  
In addition to the options of the xpadd -job command, the following options  
can be used:  
-lj  
to display the local job ID  
-id  
-gj  
-pj  
to display both the local and global job IDs  
to display the global job ID  
to display the permanent job ID  
By default, both the local and the global job identifier are output first in two  
separate columns. To override this, you can use the -id-option. If you want  
these identifiers to be output at a different position, insert -idat the position you  
want in the parameter list.  
Furthermore, specifying -ljor -gjalso overrides the default output of both  
identifiers.  
The options -teand -sxof the xpadd -jobcommand cannot be used as  
they do not correspond to an attribute of the job definition.  
i
Displaying attributes using display templates  
If you frequently use specific attributes for the display of print jobs, you can  
define a template containing all these attributes. Then, to obtain a display, you  
only call the name of this template; i.e. you do not have to specify a list of  
attributes each time. The template is stored in the special file .Xprint V7.0in  
your login directory.  
●
Use the following command to call a display template:  
xpshow -di display_template  
56  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Managing print jobs  
Displaying print jobs  
where display_template represents the name of the template you want to use.  
Defining a display template  
To define a display template, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Open the .Xprint V7.0file in your login directory.  
Enter the new display template as follows:  
display_template parameter_list  
display_template is the name of the template under which the display  
template will be called with the xpshow ... -didisplay_template command.  
parameter_list represents a list of options of the xpshow -jobcommand. Here  
you use exactly the same options as described under “Displaying attributes  
via parameter list” on the previous page.  
Your system administrator can also define display templates. These are  
saved in the .Xprint V7.0file in the /var/spool/Xprint/config  
directory. This file is searched if the template is not found in your private  
.Xprint V7.0file.  
i
Further display settings  
By means of environment variables which you set before calling the display  
template, you can define various characteristics of the display:  
XP_FS:  
With this variable you define the character which is to be used to  
separate the horizontal fields. If you do not specify a value, a tab space  
is set by default.  
XP_FW:  
This variable defines the field size in characters. If you explicitly specify  
a value, e.g. 10 characters, the entries exceeding this length will be  
truncated. If you specify 0, the values will not be truncated but displayed  
in full. The default is 7 (characters).  
XP_LS:  
With this variable you define the separator to be used to separate values  
within one field. If this variable is not set, the space character is used by  
default.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
57  
Displaying print jobs  
Managing print jobs  
Basically, there are two ways of setting these variables:  
You can define them globally, i.e. the selected settings are used for all invoca-  
tions of the xpshowcommand until the variables are modified again:  
Variable=value  
[Variable2=value]  
[Variable3=value]  
export Variable [Variable2 Variable3]  
If you only want to use the display settings once, enter the variables, separated  
by spaces, in one line together with the command:  
Variable=value [Variable2=value Variable3=value] xpshow -job ...  
Status of print jobs  
●
The xpstatcommand allows you to display the status of a submitted print  
job:  
xpstat [-job] [job] [-di LONG]  
For job you can specify either a job identifier or a selection list. Information  
on the selected print jobs is then displayed job by job. If you omit job, you  
receive information on all the existing print jobs.  
If you do not specify the option -diLONG, the SHORTformat will be displayed  
by default.  
The Statefield contains information, for example, on the status of the  
printout, on error messages, etc.; for a complete list of the messages see the  
“Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
The Rank field contains the print job’s position in the print queue: the lower  
the value, the sooner it will be printed.  
If a print job is waiting for execution on a printer in a printer group, the  
Rank field contains its position in the job queue of the printer with the  
lowest load in this printer group.  
i
58  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing print jobs  
Displaying print jobs  
Display examples  
–
–
Job status display (SHORT):  
L jid Global jid Destination Rank Percentage  
----- ---------- ----------- ---- ----------  
State  
-----  
WAIT  
1
se1:511  
P1  
0001 000  
Job status display (LONG):  
LOCAL JOB ID.: 3  
Global job id.: d241s052_006:14  
State: SUSPEND  
State information:  
Destination: hplj4m  
Rank: 1  
Requested copies: 1  
Copies printed: 0  
% already printed: 0  
Last printed page: 0  
Related document:  
–
–
To display print job information containing only the attributes Destination  
and Release time, use the following command:  
xpshow -di "-de -at"  
You will obtain a display similar to the following:  
1
2
se1:14 P1  
se1:16 P1  
Thu Aug  
Thu Aug  
To define and then apply the display template my_templatewhich is to  
include the job ID, local ID, files to be printed, destination printer, form used  
and the pages to be printed:  
Open the file .Xprint V7.0and enter the following line:  
my_template -id -lj -dr -de -fm -ps  
Display information on all print jobs using the display template my_template:  
xpshow -job -di my_template  
Display:  
9 se1:14 9  
10 se1:16 10  
/tmp/file1  
/tmp/file2  
P1  
P1  
–
To globally change the display of the xpshowcommand such that the  
individual fields are not truncated and are separated by “...”:  
XP_FW=0  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
Displaying print jobs  
Managing print jobs  
XP_FS=...  
export XP_FW XP_FS  
–
To use the display settings of the previous example only once for a display  
with my_template:  
XP_FW=0 XP_FS=... xpshow -job -di my_template  
60  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing print jobs  
Modifying a submitted print job  
4.3  
Modifying a submitted print job  
When a print job is submitted, you can still modify its attributes as long as the  
job has not yet been printed. You can, for example, redirect a print job to another  
printer or select a different form. You can also redirect a print job to a remote  
domain.  
●
To change the attributes of a submitted job, you can use the xpmod  
command:  
xpmod [-job] job [modifications]  
For job you can specify either a job identifier or a selection criteria list. If you  
omit job, all the existing print jobs are modified.  
For modifications you can use all the xpaddoptions except for -dr, -jt, -cp,  
-ct, -rm+, -te, -dp, -st, -nv, -sc, -sm and -nf.  
Options can be set or reset to the default by appending the suffixes + or - .  
There are two possible ways of redirecting print jobs to another printer. You can  
either use the xpmod -jobcommand and the -deprinter option or you can use  
the xprdircommand. Using this command you can specify the required values  
(old printer, new printer, jobs etc.) either explicitly or via an Xprint V7.0-driven  
menu query. For more information on the xprdircommand, refer to the Xprint  
V7.0 Reference Manual.  
When redirecting a print job to another printer, the new printer must  
support the data format of the original target printer as no filters can be  
specified.  
i
Examples  
–
A print job with the ID se2:4is to be redirected to printer1, given priority 15  
and printed from string fghthrough string str:  
xpmod -job se2:4 -de printer1 -pr 15 -fr fgh -to str  
All print jobs you have submitted for printer3are set to the default priority:  
xpmod -job -scl "-de printer3" -pr-  
–
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
61  
           
Modifying a submitted print job  
Managing print jobs  
–
To redirect a print job:  
Spoolin print job job1on printer printer1, which only supports the data  
format POSTSCRIPT; there is a filter available, however, for converting the  
format SIMPLEto POSTSCRIPT:  
xpadd -job -dr job1 -de printer1 -ct SIMPLE  
If the print job is then redirected to the printer printer2, this must be able to  
handle the data format POSTSCRIPT, as job1was automatically converted at  
spoolin:  
xpmod -job job1 -de printer2  
–
To redirect a print job to a remote domain, specify the remote printer by  
partner_gateway_name!destination name:  
xpmod -job job1 -de gtw1!printer31  
62  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing print jobs  
Redirecting print jobs  
4.4  
Redirecting print jobs  
The xprdircommand can be used to redirect print jobs assigned to a specific  
printer to another printer, but you can only redirect the entire print queue of a  
printer, not individual print jobs. This redirection is permanent, i.e. it also applies  
to all subsequent jobs for the original printer, and must be canceled explicitly.  
Please note that xprdiris provided for compatibility purpose only. You should  
use xpchange -dev -rdinstead.  
xprdirassigns to the original printer the status NOT_ACTIVEand activates the  
printer which is to be the new destination. The active job on the original printer  
is handled as specified with the -joption by the user. Then the entire print  
queue is redirected from the old printer to the new destination, all the print jobs  
keeping their original status.  
The xprdircommand can be used by every user, no specific privileges  
are required. If the Xprint V7.0 administrator wants to restrict its use,  
he/she can protect the command by means of access rights and user  
definitions.  
i
●
To redirect the print jobs of one printer to another, enter the following  
command:  
xprdir -d old_destination -r new_destination [options]  
-d old_destination  
specifies the printer whose job queue is to be redirected to another  
printer.  
-r new_destination  
specifies the printer to which the job queue of the original printer is to  
be redirected.  
The device names specified with -d and -r must not be identical.  
i
For options the following options are possible:  
-j job_handling  
requests Xprint V7.0 to perform an action on the active job on the  
original device. The following values can be specified for job_handling:  
DELETE  
The active job is to be deleted.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
 
Redirecting print jobs  
Managing print jobs  
RESTART-BEGINNING  
When the job has been redirected to the new destination it is  
put at the top of the job queue and printed from the beginning.  
RESTART-FROM  
When the job has been redirected to the new destination it is  
put at the top of the job queue and printed starting with the  
page specified with option -p.  
SUSPEND  
When the job has been redirected to the new destination it is  
assigned the status SUSPEND.  
TERMINATE  
The active print job is printed to the end and not redirected to  
the new destination.  
In this case, the original printer is set to the status SPOOLIN_OFF  
until the active job has finished printing. If there is a printer  
error, the user must correct it, for example by setting the printer  
to the correct physical status. When the job is finished, the  
printer is set to the status NOT_ACTIVE.  
i
-p page:  
If the value RESTART-FROMis used with the -joption, the number page  
specifies the page number from which the active job is to be reprinted.  
The -j RESTART-FROM-ppage option does not work with print  
jobs that are to be printed in PostScript format or raw mode.  
i
-?:  
The use of the command and its options is displayed.  
If xprdiris used without options and arguments, the command starts a dialog  
with the user in which it asks for all the required information using selection  
menus.  
The xprdircommand does not work if Xprint V7.0 is not active on the  
host on which the new printer is configured. It returns the same error  
messages as the commands xpchangeand xpmod.  
i
64  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Managing print jobs  
Deleting print jobs  
4.5  
Deleting print jobs  
You can delete a print job that is in the print queue or is being printed.  
●
To delete a print job, use the xpdelcommand:  
xpdel selection  
For selection you can either specify a list of job identifiers or, with the  
option -scl“selection_criteria_list”, define a list of criteria according  
to which the jobs to be deleted are to be selected. Every entry in this  
list consists of an option of the xpadd -jobcommand with a value  
assigned to it. For more information, see the section “Selection  
criteria list” on page 266 of the Appendix.  
Examples  
–
–
–
To delete the print jobs 1, 3, 7, and 9(local ID):  
xpdel [-job] 1 3 7 9  
To delete the print jobs si_mfs1:2and si_mfs1:4(global ID):  
xpdel [-job] si_mfs:2 si_mfs:4  
To delete all print jobs with the attributes destination printer3 and form  
A5LAND:  
xpdel [-job] -scl "-de printer3 -fm A5LAND"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
65  
     
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Introduction to administering  
Xprint V7.0  
This chapter describes the concepts of Xprint V7.0, which you must be familiar  
with in order to use this product. It describes the objects comprising Xprint V7.0  
and provides the basic knowledge you require for administering Xprint V7.0.  
5.1  
Responsibilities  
To allow the privileges and tasks within Xprint V7.0 to be clearly delimited,  
several types of Xprint V7.0 user are distinguished:  
●
users / Xprint V7.0 users  
Users, whether registered in the Xprint V7.0 database or not, cannot admin-  
ister any Xprint V7.0 objects besides their own print jobs.  
●
System administrator  
Every system administrator (root) of a system may also perform specific  
administrative tasks concerning Xprint V7.0 on his/her system. These  
tasks include:  
–
starting and terminating Xprint V7.0 on the local system (commands  
xpstartand xpstop). Only the system administrator can start Xprint  
V7.0.  
–
–
activating and deactivating local printers, supervisors and servers  
(xpchangecommand).  
setting up local Xprint V7.0 objects other than users and the Xprint V7.0  
system (xpaddcommand).  
–
–
administering all local Xprint V7.0 objects (commands xpmodand xpdel).  
defining local Xprint V7.0 administrators, who can perform some of the  
tasks of the system administrator for the local host (xpmod -hos  
command).  
●
Local Xprint V7.0 administrator (sub-root)  
Every system administrator can define one or more local Xprint V7.0 admin-  
istrators who are responsible for administering the Xprint V7.0 system  
locally.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
67  
         
Responsibilities  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
A local Xprint V7.0 administrator has the same privileges as the system  
administrator (see below), except for starting Xprint V7.0 and defining local  
Xprint V7.0 administrators.  
●
Xprint V7.0 administrator  
The Xprint V7.0 administrator has absolute control over the Xprint V7.0  
system throughout an entire Xprint V7.0 domain, i.e. over all the systems  
defined in the Xprint V7.0 database. He/she can administer Xprint V7.0 from  
any of these hosts, provided he/she is registered as a user of this host. The  
only exception is starting Xprint V7.0 on a remote system that is exclusively  
controlled by the local system administrator of that system.  
The following figure illustrates the privileges of the different types of user with  
respect to administering Xprint V7.0:  
Figure 9: User privileges  
This figure shows an example of a configuration of four hosts A to D and the two  
printers 1 and 2. The Xprint V7.0 administrator is registered as a user on all  
hosts and can therefore control the various objects of the Xprint V7.0 system  
from every host. In the figure, the Xprint V7.0 administrator can administer all  
the Xprint V7.0 objects in the Xprint V7.0 domain from host A, i.e. say the  
printers 1 and 2, the Xprint V7.0 users and also the four hosts themselves.  
68  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Responsibilities  
The system administrator of host B can administer all those Xprint V7.0 objects  
for which host B is defined as the administration host. Similarly, the local Xprint  
V7.0 administrator of host C can only administer those Xprint V7.0 objects for  
which host C is defined as the administration host.  
However, this also means that, for example on a host which is not intercon-  
nected with other hosts via a network, Xprint V7.0 can be administered entirely  
by the Xprint V7.0 administrator, the system administrator or a specially  
configured local Xprint V7.0 administrator (with the exception of starting Xprint  
V7.0 which is restricted to the system administrator).  
In this manual, the generic terms user and administrator are used as shown  
in the following table, unless a specific type of user is being referred to. In this  
case the type is expressly specified.  
Term  
Type of user  
user  
UNIX user  
Xprint V7.0 user  
administrator  
local Xprint V7.0 administrator  
system administrator  
Xprint V7.0 administrator  
Table 4: Types of users  
Please note that only the Xprint V7.0 administrator is allowed to admin-  
ister objects on remote hosts. If in the course of this manual an object is  
to be manipulated by an administrator, either this must be the Xprint  
V7.0 administrator or the object must be local.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
69  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
5.2  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
Xprint V7.0 is an object-oriented system consisting of various objects. As an  
administrator you can define, modify, delete and, if appropriate, activate and  
deactivate Xprint V7.0 objects.  
The following figure shows the most important Xprint V7.0 components and how  
these interact.  
Figure 10: Xprint V7.0 architecture  
The client (xpaddcommand or API function) requests the printing of a job. This  
job is directly processed by the server (except in the case of what is called  
direct printing). The server passes the printout on to a suitable supervisor  
which itself communicates with the printer via the backend assigned to the  
printer.  
The following section provides a more detailed description of the available  
objects. Almost all the Xprint V7.0 commands can be used with the different  
object types.  
70  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
5.2.1 The Xprint V7.0 objects  
The following objects are defined in Xprint V7.0 (the parentheses contain the  
short name of the Xprint V7.0 objects for use in Xprint V7.0 commands):  
●
Filters (-flt)  
Filters have the function of converting the data sent to the printer by the user  
into the format required by the printer. This makes it possible, for example,  
to print normal ASCII files on PostScript printers as Xprint V7.0 is supplied  
with the filter vppost.  
Figure 11: Filters  
Two types of filter are distinguished under Xprint V7.0:  
Slow filters are executed before the actual spool process, i.e. after the job  
is submitted but before it is printed. They convert data or allow special print  
modes such as printing in columns or landscape mode.  
Fast filters are used to enhance the print functionality provided by Xprint  
V7.0. If used, they are the last link in the chain of Xprint V7.0 objects; they  
edit the print job and are in direct contact with the printer. Their main function  
is to provide a connection with objects other than the standard components.  
They receive the feedback from the printer and forward it to the supervisor  
in a form it can understand.  
As an administrator you can define and compile, modify or delete your own  
filters (fast and slow). For a description of how to define new filters see the  
“Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
71  
 
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
●
Fonts (-fnt)  
Usually, various fonts are available for printing your documents under Xprint  
V7.0. These are composed of the following attributes:  
–
–
–
–
–
–
typeface (e.g. Courier, Helvetica, Times Roman etc.)  
style (straight or italic)  
horizontal character pitch (number of characters per inch/centimeter)  
line spacing (number of lines per inch/centimeter)  
print quality (draft or correspondence quality)  
character set (German, English, International, USAetc.)  
So that you do not have to specify the desired attributes for each individual  
print job, Xprint V7.0 allows you to predefine various fonts. You select the  
desired attributes and store them under a font name. If you want to print a  
document using these specific font attributes, you only need to request them  
via this font name and Xprint V7.0 will apply them automatically to the print  
job.  
Xprint V7.0 provides a default font (GENERIC) that has the following attributes:  
no specific character type, straight, a character pitch of 10 characters per  
inch, line spacing of 6 lines per inch and the character set INTERNATIONAL.  
This font must not be modified nor deleted, not even by the Xprint V7.0  
administrator.  
●
Forms (-frm)  
Forms are a convenient way of influencing the appearance of print jobs.  
Forms can be used to define paper and page formats, the layup (portrait or  
landscape), font, appearance of the information pages and user privileges.  
Xprint V7.0 differentiates between automatic and manual forms. Jobs using  
automatic forms can be printed at any time; these forms are mounted on  
the printer by default and usually only define the hopper, page format  
(margins) or the font. If a specific form requires that special paper be  
mounted in the printer manually or that a font cassette be changed, a  
manual form makes sure that the job is only printed when the printer has  
been prepared.  
You can define, modify or delete forms. Furthermore, you can use  
permission lists to restrict the use of a specific form to specific users.  
●
Gateways (-gtw)  
72  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
Gateways allow you to make a connection from one Xprint V7.0 domain to  
another Xprint V7.0 domain or to other spooler systems. Via these gateways  
you can use the printers and printer groups of the other system involved.  
Gateways to other Xprint V7.0 domains simplify the administration of Xprint  
V7.0 in very large networks. In this way, the hosts of the entire network can  
be distributed over different Xprint V7.0 domains (e.g. by department) so that  
there is one Xprint V7.0 administrator for each domain who only has to  
administer a reduced number of Xprint V7.0 objects.  
Gateways to DPRINT (spooler system for BS2000 systems) or BSD spooler  
systems (spooler system of Berkeley BSD UNIX systems) allow users of the  
local Xprint V7.0 domain to access the printers and printer groups in these  
spooler systems. Vice versa, it is also possible to access the printers and  
printer groups of the local Xprint V7.0 domain from DPRINT and BSD  
spooler systems. This allows a network spooler system to be configured in  
a heterogeneous network.  
You can also assign a permission list to a gateway. This makes it possible to  
restrict use of remote resources for local users.  
Connections to BS2000 systems via gateways require the local  
gateway to be defined on a UNIX platform on which openFT is  
installed.  
i
As an administrator, you can set up, delete, modify and enable or disable  
gateways in both directions.  
●
Hosts (-hos)  
Under Xprint V7.0 the term host refers to every computer defined in an  
Xprint V7.0 domain. Hosts are divided into different classes: master, slave  
and parasite hosts. The difference lies in the way they handle the Xprint V7.0  
database.  
The Xprint V7.0 database contains all the data Xprint V7.0 needs to access  
Xprint V7.0 resources. This includes information on the defined hosts, users,  
printers and printer groups as well on forms, and all other Xprint V7.0  
objects. Only the print jobs are stored on the server which is responsible for  
their execution.  
A master host holds a complete copy of this database. At any one time, one  
of the potential master hosts is the active master. When Xprint V7.0 is set  
up in a network, the first computer on which it has been installed and started  
assumes the function of the active master. If Xprint V7.0 is terminated on the  
active master, the next potential master in what is called the host hierarchy  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
73  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
assumes its function as the active master. The ranks of the potential masters  
can be defined by the order of their installation and can later be modified via  
specific commands.  
Slave hosts are hosts that hold a complete copy of the Xprint V7.0 database  
but cannot become the active master host. This is useful, for example, for  
computers which are shut down frequently, are not very reliable, or which are  
still using an old Xprint V7.0 version.  
A parasite host does not have a copy of the Xprint V7.0 database. It  
requires Xprint V7.0 to be running on a specific computer which is assigned  
to it as the database server, also referred to as the supporting host, if the  
parasite host is to access Xprint V7.0. This only makes sense if there is a  
permanently running database server available for such computers which  
exports its database via a network file system (NFS). The database must  
then be mounted into the local file system by the parasite host.  
●
Job templates (-jtp)  
Job templates simplify the use of frequent print commands by allowing the  
options of the xpadd -job command, which must normally be specified  
individually, to be combined in groups. These can then be specified via the  
job template.  
Job templates can be defined, modified or deleted for the whole system by  
the Xprint V7.0 administrator or user-specifically by each individual user.  
●
Loadable resources (-lrs)  
Loadable resources allow faster printing of jobs that use the same  
background, logo, soft font etc. They also improve job recovery. A Loadable  
resource must be downloaded to the printer before it can be called by a print  
job.  
Public loadable resources can be created, modified or deleted for the whole  
system by the Xprint V7.0 administrator. Individual users can create, modify  
or delete private loadable resources, that is loadable resources that are for  
their use only.  
●
PCLs (-pcl)  
PCLs (printer capability lists) are used to define what printing options a  
printer provides. Furthermore, the PCL contains information on how the  
options specified when the job is submitted can be converted to printer  
commands. Xprint V7.0 is supplied with a number of PCLs for the most  
74  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
common printers, and with one generic PCL which in most cases also allows  
printing on unknown printers. A list of the PCLs supported by Xprint V7.0 is  
provided in the Reference Manual.  
As an administrator you can define, modify and delete PCLs.  
●
Permission lists (-prm)  
With permission lists, you can define the following privileges under Xprint  
V7.0:  
–
–
–
–
Which users may/may not use a printer, a printer group or a gateway.  
Which administrators may assign a new supervisor to a specific server.  
Which users may/may not use a specific form.  
Which forms may/may not be used on a specific printer.  
There are two types of permission list: "allowed lists" and "denied lists".  
An allowed list is used to specify which users or forms are allowed to use the  
relevant object, while the denied list defines which users or forms are not  
allowed to use a specific object. The allowed list of a printer, for example,  
restricts use of the printer to the users contained in the list. The denied list  
of a printer defines that the printer can be accessed by all users except for  
those contained in the list.  
The administrator of a specific object (printer, server, form) can  
always access the object, irrespective of the contents of the  
associated permission list.  
i
Basically, permission lists for objects are handled as follows: if there is an  
entry in the allowed list, the denied list is ignored; if the allowed list is empty,  
the denied list applies. If both lists are empty, access to the object is  
unrestricted.  
●
Print jobs (-job)  
Print jobs are submitted by users and, as described in the previous section,  
can be modified. They are administered by the servers responsible for the  
respective print queues. Print jobs are not part of the Xprint V7.0 database  
like printers, servers etc., but they are stored in the server spoolin directory.  
In addition to the normal modification options, as an administrator you can  
redirect all print jobs for a printer to another printer.  
●
Printers (-dev)  
Xprint V7.0 can use printers of many different types.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
   
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
The printers are controlled by a supervisor and assigned tools, called  
backends. A PCL is assigned to the printer.  
The process of printing is controlled by a backend using the appropriate  
printer’s PCL to provide printer details. Xprint V7.0 provides a general-  
purpose backend but additional specific backends can be defined by the  
administrator and incorporated into the Xprint V7.0 system. For a description  
of how to define new backends refer to the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference  
Manual”.  
As the backend actually controls the printer, it must interface with both the  
supervisor and the printer. The backend initializes the printer port and the  
printer. It sets the printer with any specified job options, such as the typeface  
and style. Furthermore, it ensures that start, end, and separator sheets are  
printed if required. It also makes sure that the requested number of copies  
of the document are printed. For this printer-specific information the backend  
refers to the PCL assigned to the printer.  
Backend programs interpret status messages. Information is taken from the  
data passing through the backend. Some printers can respond to special  
information requests from backend programs. To enable the user to interact  
with the active print job (e.g. to delete or suspend the job) a special  
mechanism allows signals to be exchanged between the supervisor and the  
backend.  
Permission lists enable printer access to be restricted to explicitly defined  
users, and you can define which forms can be assigned to this printer. By  
means of a security level, printers can be restricted to users with an appro-  
priate security level for printing confidential data.  
●
●
Printer groups (-dgr)  
Printers can be combined to form what are called printer groups to achieve  
better loading of all the printers in the group. If a print job is sent to a printer  
group it is printed on the first printer to become available in the printer group.  
Recovery rules (-rec)  
Recovery rules are used to describe how specific printer conditions are  
handled. Recovery rules are defined in a source file and saved in the Xprint  
V7.0 database after compilation. Then they can be assigned to the printers.  
The default recovery procedure in the case of a printer error can be  
overridden by a recovery rule. In the case of the printer error “paper_end”,  
for example, the Xprint V7.0 system tries by default to print the job until the  
76  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
paper supply is refilled. By means of a recovery rule you could define a  
different procedure (to suspend the print job and set the printer to  
NOT_ACTIVEuntil the administrator intervenes, for example).  
You can define, modify and delete recovery rules.  
●
Servers (-srv)  
Servers are the Xprint V7.0 objects which administer incoming print jobs and  
are responsible for scheduling them. Each server administers its own print  
queue, which contains all the print jobs for the printers whose supervisors  
are controlled by the server.  
You can define and delete servers and change their status.  
●
Supervisors (-spv)  
A supervisor is directly responsible for controlling one or more printers. It  
obtains the job data from the responsible server and forwards it to the  
backend program (see entry “Backend” on page 273 in the glossary). One  
supervisor may control several local printers.  
As the system or Xprint V7.0 administrator, you can set up and delete super-  
visors, and change their status.  
●
Users (-usr)  
Xprint V7.0 differentiates between two types of user: UNIX users, who are  
not defined in the Xprint V7.0 system, and Xprint V7.0 users, who are  
defined in the Xprint V7.0 system. UNIX users are all users of the UNIX  
system on which Xprint V7.0 is running; the default settings for Xprint V7.0  
apply to them. If these settings are not sufficient, the UNIX users can be  
defined in the Xprint V7.0 system.  
More settings can be made for Xprint V7.0 users than for UNIX users:  
–
–
–
Xprint V7.0 users can access their print jobs from all the hosts for which  
they are registered.  
They can be assigned a security level and thus be granted access to  
printers with a corresponding security level.  
Print quotas can be defined for the number of jobs or print pages  
allowed, thus preventing users from making unlimited numbers of  
printouts.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
Xprint V7.0 architecture  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
●
The Xprint V7.0 system (-sys)  
The Xprint V7.0 system refers to all the Xprint V7.0 objects which are  
combined in a local administrative unit, what is called an Xprint V7.0  
domain. Within the Xprint V7.0 system the Xprint V7.0 administrator is  
allowed to perform all the administrative tasks.  
The only operations that can be executed for the Xprint V7.0 system are  
displaying or changing the Xprint V7.0 administrator as well as the Xprint  
V7.0 system comments.  
78  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Administrative tasks under Xprint  
5.3  
Administrative tasks under Xprint  
Administering Xprint V7.0 involves a number of tasks which must be performed  
by the administrator. This section gives a general description of the different  
tasks and describes the basic procedures. For detailed information on adminis-  
tering the individual objects, see the next chapter.  
5.3.1 Configuring Xprint V7.0 objects  
With the xpaddcommand you can add Xprint V7.0 objects to the database, thus  
making them known in the Xprint V7.0 system. Only print jobs (-job) are not  
entered in the database but are added to the print queue administered by the  
corresponding server. The xpaddcommand may be called for all Xprint V7.0  
objects with the exception of the Xprint V7.0 system itself (-sys). For a detailed  
description of using this command for each object type see the “Xprint V7.0  
Reference Manual”.  
-
When you add an object to the database with the xpaddcommand, the following  
rules apply:  
–
As an Xprint V7.0 administrator you can add any objects you choose and  
can define any administration hosts for them by specifying a host other than  
the local host with the -ah host option (or, for printers and gateways, with the  
-hohost option). The object you add can then be administered by yourself as  
well as by the system administrator and the local Xprint V7.0 administrators  
of this host. As a system or local Xprint V7.0 administrator you can define  
objects only for your local host.  
–
–
Every Xprint V7.0 object needs a unique name in the Xprint V7.0 system.  
This name should enable users of this object to identify it. For Xprint V7.0-  
internal objects like servers and supervisors it makes sense to use the name  
of the host on which these objects are defined. For printers a unique name  
indicating their location is a good choice, and for job templates, forms and  
fonts it is advisable to use names indicating their purpose.  
To become available to users and administrators, some objects need to be  
activated after being added. This applies to the following object types:  
printers (-dev), servers (-srv), supervisors (-spv) and gateways (-gtw). For  
printers and gateways you can include in their definition that they are  
automatically activated on the corresponding host whenever Xprint V7.0 is  
started on this host in future (option -aa). Servers are automatically activated  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
     
Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
whenever the host is started. Supervisors are activated automatically when  
Xprint V7.0 is started if a printer they administer was configured with the -aa  
option.  
Objects are always activated using the xpchangecommand (see section  
“Changing the status of Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 82).  
5.3.2 Deleting Xprint V7.0 objects  
With the xpdelcommand you can delete Xprint V7.0 objects from the Xprint  
V7.0 database. The Xprint V7.0 administrator can delete all objects from the  
system with the exception of the Xprint V7.0 system object (-sys), which cannot  
be deleted. System and local Xprint V7.0 administrators can only delete those  
objects which are administered on the local host. For a detailed description of  
using this command for each object type see the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference  
Manual”.  
The following rules apply for deleting Xprint V7.0 objects:  
–
–
–
Only Xprint V7.0 objects which are no longer used by any other Xprint V7.0  
object can be deleted. Before deleting an object you should therefore make  
sure that there are no references to the specified object. Any references can  
be displayed using the xpshowcommand with the option -di REFERENCED_BY  
(see section “Displaying the attributes of an Xprint V7.0 object” on page 83).  
Any objects with references to the object to be deleted must be modified  
such that theses references are canceled.  
Printers (-dev), gateways (-gtw), servers (-srv) and supervisors (-spv) must  
be deactivated before they can be deleted. If necessary, this can be checked  
with the xpstatcommand (see section “Displaying the status of an Xprint  
V7.0 object” on page 82).  
If an object to be deleted is still active, it must be deactivated with the  
xpchangecommand used with the option -st NOT_ACTIVE(see section  
“Changing the status of Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 82).  
When deleting an object of the type server, you must always make sure that  
the print queue assigned to the server does not contain any print jobs as  
these will be lost when the server is deleted. For servers you are therefore  
advised to deactivate spoolin some time before deleting the server. In this  
case, any print jobs in the print queue can still be printed without any more  
jobs being added. Another possibility is to redirect the print queues of a  
printer assigned to the server to another printer.  
80  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Administrative tasks under Xprint  
5.3.3 Modifying Xprint V7.0 objects  
With the xpmodcommand, you can modify the static attributes of all Xprint V7.0  
objects. Dynamic attributes such as the printer status or the status of the current  
print quotas of a user can be changed with the xpchangecommand (see the  
following section “Changing the status of Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 82). The  
Xprint V7.0 administrator can modify all objects in the system, while the system  
and local Xprint V7.0 administrators can only modify those objects which are  
administered on their local host. For a detailed description of using this  
command for each object type see the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
The following rules apply for modifying objects:  
–
Printers (-dev), gateways (-gtw), servers (-srv) and supervisors (-spv) must  
be deactivated before they can be modified. If necessary, this can be  
checked with the xpstatcommand (see section “Displaying the status of an  
Xprint V7.0 object” on page 82).  
If an object to be deleted is still active, it must be deactivated with the  
xpchangecommand used with the option -st NOT_ACTIVE(see section  
“Changing the status of Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 82).  
Remember to reactivate the object after modifying it!  
–
Basically you can use any option which can also be used when adding the  
object. However, there are a few special cases, which are described below:  
Options representing Boolean values (e.g. the option -aafor printers which  
switches on automatic activation) can be removed by specifying a minus  
sign -after the option (example: xpmod -dev printer1 -aa-).  
Options defining lists (e.g. the -dloption for printer groups which defines the  
printers belonging to this group) can be modified in three different ways:  
–
If a minus sign is specified after the option, the objects specified behind  
it are removed from the list (example: xpmod -dgr pgroup1 -dl- printer4  
printer5).  
–
–
If a plus sign +is specified after the option, the objects specified behind  
it are added to the list (example: xpmod -dgr pgroup1 -dl+ printer6).  
If the objects are specified directly after the option, the existing list is  
replaced by the specified objects (example: xpmod -dgr pgroup2  
-dl printer1 printer2 printer6).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
   
Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
5.3.4 Changing the status of Xprint V7.0 objects  
With the xpchangecommand, you can change the dynamic data of Xprint V7.0  
objects, such as printer states or the states of the current user print quotas. For  
a detailed description of using this command for each object type see the “Xprint  
V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
With some objects the status can assume several levels, i.e they have a global  
status and subordinate substates. A printer, for example, has a global status  
which is defined via the -stoption. In addition to this, spoolin and spoolout can  
be switched on and off individually with the options -siand -so.  
If the xpchangecommand is invoked for an object without options, it always  
switches on all states (ACTIVEor ON). Similarly all the states of the object are  
switched off when the object is deactivated with the -st NOT_ACTIVEoption.  
When a substate which has been switched off is switched back on, Xprint V7.0  
automatically makes sure that the main status is set to ACTIVE.  
5.3.5 Displaying information on Xprint V7.0 objects  
With the xpstatand xpshowcommands you can display information on each  
Xprint V7.0 object you are allowed to use or administer. For a detailed  
description of using these commands for each object type see the “Xprint V7.0  
- Reference Manual”.  
Displaying the status of an Xprint V7.0 object  
●
To display the status of an Xprint V7.0 object, use the following command:  
xpstat object_type [selection] [-di display]  
For object_type you specify the object whose status you want to display (e.g.  
-devfor printer). If the object type is not specified, the command refers by  
default to print jobs (-job).  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all objects of the specified  
type in the Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s)  
of the objects whose status you want to display, or you can use the  
-scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant objects are selected.  
82  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Administrative tasks under Xprint  
With the option -didisplay you can determine the scope of the display as  
described for print jobs in the section “Displaying print jobs” on page 55.  
Displaying the attributes of an Xprint V7.0 object  
●
To obtain more detailed information on the definition of an Xprint V7.0 object,  
use the following command:  
xpshow object_type [selection] [-di display]  
For object_type you specify the object whose attributes you want to display  
(e.g. -devfor printer). If the object type is not specified, the command refers  
by default to print jobs (-job).  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the objects of the  
specified type in the Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify  
the name(s) of the objects whose attributes you want to display, or you can  
use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria  
list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to  
which the relevant objects are selected.  
To display information on printers or printer groups which can only be  
reached via gateways, you must specify the name of the printer or printer  
group in the format gateway!printer_name. Which details of the printer or  
printer group are displayed in such a case depends on the gateway type.  
With the option -didisplay you can determine the scope of the display as  
described for print jobs in the section “Displaying print jobs” on page 55.  
Besides the standard values SHORT, LONGand specifying a list of output  
parameters as for print jobs, you can also use the keyword REFERENCED_BY  
here, which returns a list of the Xprint V7.0 objects referring to the specified  
object. If you specify the option -di REFERENCED_BY(short -diR), you must  
specify exactly one object of the desired type!  
This list is useful if you want to remove an Xprint V7.0 object from the Xprint  
V7.0 system as you can only remove an object if it is no longer referenced  
by any other object.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
     
Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Examples (in this case for printer groups)  
–
To display the status of the printer group group1:  
xpstat -dgr group1  
NAME  
----  
group1  
Spoolin  
-------  
ON  
Date of last modification: Tue Dec 20 11:37:17 1994  
Justification:  
–
To display the definition of the printer group group1 in a complete list:  
xpshow -dgr group1 -di LONG  
This returns, for example, the following output:  
NAME: group1  
Host: colorado  
Administrator: xprintadm  
Device list: printer1 printer2  
User permission:  
User comment: The printer group for all users  
Administrator comment:  
–
To display a short list of all the printer groups available:  
xpshow -dgr  
This could return the following output:  
Name  
----  
group1  
group2  
User perm.  
----------  
Host  
----  
missouri  
delaware  
Administrator  
-------------  
xprintadm  
xprintadm  
–
To display all the references to the printer group group1:  
xpshow -dgr group1 -di REFERENCED_BY  
The output might appear as follows:  
Level Name  
----- ----  
Type  
----  
hos  
1
host1  
This output shows that an object of type host, namely the host host1, still  
refers to the group group1. The printer group can only be removed when the  
object host1has been modified such that the reference to group1is  
canceled.  
84  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Administrative tasks under Xprint  
5.3.6 Administering Xprint V7.0  
This section describes a few basic administration tasks concerning Xprint V7.0.  
If you want to...  
Read...  
start Xprint V7.0  
section “Administering Xprint V7.0” on  
page 85  
terminate Xprint V7.0  
section “Administering Xprint V7.0” on  
page 86  
reinitialize the Xprint V7.0  
database  
section “Administering Xprint V7.0” on  
page 86  
select a language  
section “Administering Xprint V7.0” on  
page 87  
enable auditing ( users only)  
enable logging ( users only)  
Table 5: Basic administration tasks  
section “Auditing” in the appendix of the  
“Reference Manual”  
section “Logging” in the appendix of the  
“Reference Manual”  
Starting Xprint V7.0  
Only the system administrator (root) can start Xprint V7.0 with the xpstart  
command on his/her local host. Every host must be started individually with this  
command.  
When you start your local host, the following objects are activated automatically:  
–
–
all the local servers belonging to this host.  
all the local printers and the associated supervisors belonging to this host. It  
must be possible to activate the printers automatically (see the xpadd -dev  
-aacommand) and they must be controlled by active servers on the local  
host.  
–
all the remote printers and supervisors belonging to this host, provided the  
printers can be started automatically and are controlled by active servers on  
the local host.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
           
Administrative tasks under Xprint Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
When starting Xprint V7.0, you can also specify whether jobs which were not  
finished in a previous session are to be retained (setting WARM; default) or deleted  
(setting COLD). Such a setting is useful, for example, if you shut down your  
system while there were still print jobs on it with the status ACTIVEor jobs still in  
the print queue. After a WARMstart, these print jobs are processed again.  
●
Start Xprint V7.0 with the following command:  
xpstart [-sa system_activation]  
For system_activation specify either WARMor COLD.If you do not specify a  
value, WARMwill be used.  
Stopping Xprint V7.0  
With the xpstopcommand the system administrator (root) and the Xprint V7.0  
administrator can terminate Xprint V7.0 on his/her local host. Furthermore, the  
Xprint V7.0 administrator can shut down Xprint V7.0 on any host in the system.  
If Xprint V7.0 is terminated on a local host, the following objects are also deacti-  
vated:  
–
–
–
–
all its servers,  
all its local supervisors, even if controlled by the remote system,  
all its local printers,  
all remote printers and supervisors which are controlled by the local server.  
Active print jobs controlled by a server whose host is shut down are inter-  
rupted. (For more information see the command xpchange -dev -wn NOW.)  
i
●
Deactivate the system with the following command:  
xpstop [-ho host]  
The host option can only be used by the Xprint V7.0 administrator, as only  
he/she is allowed to terminate Xprint V7.0 on remote systems.  
Reinitializing the Xprint V7.0 database  
You might need to reinitialize the Xprint V7.0 database, for example if it could  
not be initialized when Xprint V7.0 was installed, or if the system breaks down.  
●
Call DBinstall:  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/bin/DBinstall  
Enter NOwhen asked if this is a new installation.  
●
86  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Administrative tasks under Xprint  
●
Now specify the name of a host on which Xprint V7.0 is running.  
Selecting the language  
For the language interface Xprint V7.0 uses the value of the NLS environment  
variable LANG. The following language environments are available:  
Environment definition  
Language  
English  
En  
De  
German  
Table 6: Language environment variables  
If the environment variable LANGis incorrectly or not at all defined, Xprint V7.0  
uses English as the default.  
●
Select the language on your local host as follows:  
LANG=language_ID; export LANG  
For language_ID you enter the abbreviation (see above) of the relevant  
language.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
     
Rules for configuring the system Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
5.4  
Rules for configuring the system  
This section describes the basic rules which must be observed when config-  
uring the Xprint V7.0 system; it does not cover the actual steps that are  
required. You should use these guidelines to check the configuration of your  
Xprint V7.0 system at regular intervals in order to maintain its performance.  
5.4.1 Defining an Xprint V7.0 domain  
The print manager must define the Xprint V7.0 domain with respect to  
–
–
–
the resources to be shared,  
the number of hosts,  
and some administration criteria.  
Creating an Xprint V7.0 domain is always a compromise between  
–
–
–
the maximum number of hosts administered to provide a maximum of  
print resources,  
the assignment of administrative tasks concerning print resources to a  
person or association (e.g. resource locations, company strategy)  
and a high number of hosts which might slow Xprint V7.0 down, so that  
there might be, say, a relatively long period of time between the  
submission and execution of a print job.  
88  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Rules for configuring the system  
5.4.2 Configuring hosts  
–
–
–
–
All UNIX hosts belonging to an Xprint V7.0 domain and on which Xprint V7.0  
has been installed must be defined in the Xprint V7.0 configuration.  
Every host which is to provide its print services must be defined as  
POT_MASTER, even if it is the only host in operation.  
The hierarchy of potential master hosts should be defined such that the host  
with the best equipment ranks first.  
A host without hard disk or with a limited or full hard disk should be defined  
as a PARASITE host. In this case, the Xprint V7.0 database must be imported  
from what is called a supporting host by means of an explicit command. The  
advantage of such hosts is the fact that less hard disk space is used, as the  
database is only stored on the supporting host and some processes do not  
have to be running (e.g. the services of the database manager).  
–
The other computers are defined as SLAVEhosts.  
5.4.3 Configuring printers  
To be able to add printers to the Xprint V7.0 system, you require at least one  
server (responsible for administering printers and their job queue) and a super-  
visor (responsible for the actual printing process). There are two different ways  
of defining servers or supervisors: you can either define the required settings  
yourself or you can add a first device to this host without any special specifica-  
tions. In this case, the Xprint V7.0 system automatically creates a default server  
and supervisor.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
   
Rules for configuring the system Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
Servers  
–
A server can control any number of supervisors. In practice, however, three  
supervisors is a good number.  
–
Where possible the server should be defined on the host of the supervisors.  
Note that in this case the availability of the printers depends exclu-  
!
sively on this particular host. If you distribute servers and supervisors  
over several hosts, you must remember that both hosts must be  
available in order to use the printers.  
Supervisors  
–
–
Each supervisor must be controlled by a server.  
A supervisor can control any number of printers; in practice, however, fifteen  
printers per supervisor are recommended.  
–
The supervisor must be defined on the same host on which the printers are  
defined.  
Automatic server and supervisor object creation  
If no specific setting is used when creating a new device, Xprint V7.0 automati-  
cally generates default supervisors and server objects, following the rules  
hereafter:  
–
–
A new supervisor is created for each 15 devices.  
A new server is created for each 3 supervisors.  
These defaults settings can be changed by means of 2 envivariables:  
XP_SPV_BY_DFTSRV  
Description: maximum number of supervisors by default server  
Initialisation time: before xpadd -dev  
Possible values: from 1 to 15  
Behaviour if unspecified: 3 is used  
Behaviour if a value larger than 15 is specified: 15 is used  
XP_DEV_BY_DFTSPV  
Description: maximum number of devices by default supervisor  
90  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Rules for configuring the system  
Initialisation time: before xpadd -dev  
Possible values: from 1 to 15  
Behaviour if unspecified: 15 is used  
Behaviour if a value larger than 15 is specified: 15 is used  
Printers  
–
Each printer connected to the Xprint V7.0 system must be defined in the  
database in order to be accessible. Furthermore the host to which the printer  
is attached must be defined in the Xprint V7.0 database.  
–
Access to systems via the BSD LPD protocol is effected from one or more  
pseudo-printers in Xprint V7.0 by means of the fast filter bsd. Another  
possible way of accessing the printers directly is via the BSD gateway. The  
main difference between these two methods is the fact that in the case of the  
fast filter bsdthe document is formatted (e.g. font, paper layup), while print  
jobs sent via the gateway are not converted.  
–
Access to printers via the network address is effected from one or more  
Xprint V7.0 devices which have LANdefined as the connection type in their  
device definition. As any host can be specified, you are advised to use the  
host with the best availability. If a network printer is of importance, you can  
define several logical printers on different hosts in the Xprint V7.0 system  
which all have the same address. The advantage of this is that the printer is  
already available when just one of the hosts is in operation.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
91  
Rules for configuring the system Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0  
5.4.4 Configuring gateways  
Gateways provide interoperability between different Xprint V7.0 domains and  
between Xprint V7.0 and other spooler systems. There are two types of  
gateway:  
The BSD gateways  
These allow Xprint V7.0 users to access BSD LPD printer servers (e.g. Novell  
Netware with the BSD LPD emulation Flex/IP) and to share Xprint V7.0  
resources with BSD LPD users (e.g. a WPRINT PC user). The functionality  
includes:  
–
the basic job administration functions: xpadd -job, xpdel -job, xpstat -job,  
xpshow -job  
–
restricted functions concerning the print resources: xpshow -dev,  
xpstat -dev  
As only the BSD LPD functions are accessible with this type of gateway, the  
additional Xprint V7.0 options are not available.  
The GIP2 gateway  
This offers two possibilities:  
1. Connecting two Xprint V7.0 domains. This provides the following function-  
ality:  
–
the complete functionality concerning job administration: xpadd -job,  
xpmod -job, xpchange -job, xpdel -job, xpshow -job, xpstat -job  
–
access to some options concerning Xprint V7.0 resources: xpshow  
-dev/-dgr/-flt/-fnt/-frm/-jtp/-lrs/-pcl, xpstat -dev/-dgr  
2. Connecting Xprint V7.0 and DPRINT. This provides the following function-  
ality:  
–
job administration functions: xpadd -job, xpdel -job, xpstat -job,  
xpshow -job  
–
several functions concerning the printer resources: xpshow -dev/-dgr,  
xpstat -dev  
In addition to the supported print protocols (e.g. BSD or GIP2) the gateways can  
be of the type LOCALor PARTNER. Gateways of the type LOCALrepresent active  
Xprint V7.0 objects which are responsible for exporting jobs to partner print  
92  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to administering Xprint V7.0 Rules for configuring the system  
servers and for receiving jobs sent from partner systems. Gateways of the type  
PARTNERrepresent remote spooler clients as possible job originators for Xprint  
V7.0 resources or print service providers.  
Notes on the configuration  
–
Every gateway of the type PARTNERwhich supports a print protocol must have  
at least a gateway of the type LOCALwith the same print protocol assigned in  
the backward-link list (-bloption). This list is required for finding a local  
gateway which is capable of sending jobs to this partner.  
–
Every BSD print server must be represented by a BSD gateway of the type  
PARTNER. The BSD server can also be accessed via the fast filter bsd. The  
advantage of the fast filter is that Xprint V7.0 converts the data. Gateways,  
on the other hand, provide additional functions:  
–
–
you can find out the status of jobs you have sent to a BSD server.  
you can remove jobs you have sent to the BSD spooler system from that  
system.  
–
you can display the status of the BSD print queue.  
It therefore makes sense to use fast filters for sending print jobs to a BSD  
system; however, if you want to have access to the full BSD functionality, you  
must use gateways. This only works if the local BSD gateway is defined on  
the host of the printer that uses the fast filter bsd.  
–
–
Every BSD user should be represented by a BSD gateway of the type  
PARTNER. Furthermore, the gateway of the type LOCALwhich receives the BSD  
jobs must allow the spoolin of jobs from this partner. This means the -ag  
option must be set to ALLfor the local gateway or the name of the gateway  
of the type PARTNERmust be specified directly.  
Every Xprint V7.0 or DPRINT domain from which jobs can be submitted for  
the local domain must be represented by a gateway of the type GIP2  
PARTNER. Furthermore, the local gateway which receives a GIP2job must  
allow the spoolin of jobs from this partner. This means the -agoption must  
be set to ALLfor the local gateway or the name of the gateway of the type  
GIP2 PARTNERmust be entered specifically.  
–
No two gateways of the type LOCALwith the same port number (-ga) can run  
on one host at any one time. This is prevented by the network.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
This chapter describes how to configure Xprint V7.0 on your system. It  
comprises various sections, each dealing with different activities. The following  
table will help you to quickly find the section you need:  
If you want to...  
Read...  
manage hosts  
section “Administering hosts” on page 96  
add a predefined printer to Xprint section “Configuring predefined printers”  
V7.0 on page 109  
manage any devices you choose section “Administering devices” on  
page 114  
manage device groups  
section “Administering printer groups” on  
page 126  
manage users  
section “Administering users” on page 133  
make use of Xprint V7.0’s security section “Administering permission lists” on  
facilities  
page 143  
manage fonts  
section “Administering fonts” on page 152  
section “Administering forms”  
section “Administering filters” on page 162  
manage forms  
manage filters  
manage loadable resources  
section “Administering public loadable  
resources” on page 171  
manage job templates  
section “Administering global job  
templates” on page 174  
manage PCLs  
section “Administering PCLs” on page 179  
manage recovery rules  
section “Administering recovery rules” on  
page 186  
manage servers  
section “Administering servers” on  
page 193  
manage supervisors  
Table 7: Configuring Xprint V7.0  
section “Administering supervisors” on  
page 200  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Administering hosts  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Not all the possible options for each command can be described in this  
chapter but only the most important ones. For more detailed information  
i
see the description of the relevant command in the “Xprint V7.0  
Reference Manual”.  
-
For every command, you can call online help with the -?option. This  
online help works on two levels: command and option level.  
If you call help on command level, the general form of this command will  
be displayed. This type of help displays the objects supported by the  
command. It also shows the options which are independent of the object  
type. Not all the options are displayed, however, as these depend on the  
use of a command and object together. To call online help on command  
level, enter xpadd -?, for example.  
Option level help displays all the possible options of a specific object  
type. To call the online help on option level, you must specify the  
xpadd -dgr -?command, for example.  
6.1  
Administering hosts  
This section deals with the Xprint V7.0 objects of type host which must first be  
edited for new computers in an Xprint V7.0 configuration. The following table  
serves as a guide through this section:  
If you want to...  
Read...  
configure Xprint V7.0 on the first host section “Configuring the first host” on  
in a network or on a stand-alone  
system  
page 96  
configure Xprint V7.0 on a new host section “Configuring a new host” on  
page 98  
Table 8: Administering hosts  
6.1.1 Configuring the first host  
Configuring Xprint V7.0 on a stand-alone system and configuring the first host  
in a network only requires a few steps. This is in most cases done by one  
person, who is referred to below as the Xprint V7.0 administrator. This section  
is only intended for the Xprint V7.0 administrator. The Xprint V7.0 administrator  
may be someone who is only responsible for managing Xprint V7.0 or he/she  
96  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering hosts  
may be one of the system administrators of the computers involved. If you, as  
the Xprint V7.0 administrator, want to introduce Xprint V7.0 into an existing  
network, you must perform the following tasks in the order given below:  
–
–
first study the network structure  
define a (primary) master host which first manages the Xprint V7.0 database  
(later you can specify additional computers which are to serve as reserve  
masters in case the defined master fails). For more information on the host  
hierarchy see the section “Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 9.  
–
–
configure Xprint V7.0 on the (primary) master host and define a user ID for  
the Xprint V7.0 administrator  
configure the other systems in the network  
Then you or the respective system administrators must configure the individual  
printers by adding them to the Xprint V7.0 configuration.  
The first two and the last step are not of interest if you configure Xprint V7.0 on  
a stand-alone host. The fourth step is discussed in the section “Configuring a  
new host” on page 98.  
Determining the network structure  
So that Xprint V7.0 can be introduced into an existing network without problems,  
you must study the network structure before configuring Xprint V7.0. For this  
purpose you must gain an overview of all the computers and printers in this  
network. You should gather data on every computer and printer. This data will  
be required for configuring Xprint V7.0. The Appendix contains a worksheet in  
which you can enter the relevant data. It is recommended that you make a copy  
of this worksheet for every computer in your network and fill it out carefully. If  
there is not enough space for the relevant printers and/or supervisors, use the  
back of the copy or an additional sheet which you should clip to the worksheet.  
Configuring the primary master host  
When you have installed Xprint V7.0 on the host which is to be the primary  
master host, you can start configuring Xprint V7.0 by preparing the selected  
system as follows:  
●
●
Log in to the selected system as root.  
Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7.0  
(/etc/servicesfile, see section “Configuring the local area network  
(LAN)” on page 235).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
97  
     
Administering hosts  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
●
If the database was not installed in the course of product installation or has  
failed for any reason, you must initialize it now as follows:  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/bin/DBinstall -f  
Start the Xprint V7.0 system:  
●
xpstart  
Now define the new Xprint V7.0 administrator if you do not want to perform this  
task any longer as rooton the host now defined as the primary master. In this  
manual the user ID xprintadm is used as an example ID for the Xprint V7.0  
administrator. To configure the Xprint V7.0 administrator proceed as follows:  
●
Define the Xprint V7.0 administrator xprintadm as a user of this host (e.g.  
using the administrator interface sysadm).  
●
Add the user xprintadm to the Xprint V7.0 configuration:  
xpadd -usr xprintadm  
●
Modify the Xprint V7.0 configuration such that xprintadm becomes the new  
Xprint V7.0 administrator:  
xpmod -sys -ad xprintadm  
Once you have performed these steps, you, as the Xprint V7.0 administrator,  
can configure printers and other Xprint V7.0 objects on the host.  
6.1.2 Configuring a new host  
Configuration hints  
Xprint V7.0 allows interoperability between different administrative domains,  
which need to be connected by gateways. All the hosts in an administrative  
domain share the same database contents. Each definition of an Xprint V7.0  
object or change of state involves a database update, which must be reflected  
on each host in the domain. This database propagation mechanism requires a  
reasonably fast network, which will allow connections to be opened quickly and  
rapid data transfer.  
The required data transfer rate between hosts is in the order of megabits per  
second. A typical example of such a network is Ethernet. Different domains can  
be connected by slower networks (possibly wide area networks) as there is  
generally less traffic between domains than within a domain.  
98  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering hosts  
As a guideline, experience has shown that there is a practical limit of 50  
potential masters/slave hosts in a single domain. If there are too many potential  
master/slave hosts, it is difficult to keep all the databases updated. If more than  
50 hosts are needed then parasite hosts can be defined, or the domain can be  
divided into a number of smaller domains.  
Parasite hosts import the database from their supporting host (potential master  
or slave) by means of a file sharing utility (e.g. NFS) which needs to be set up  
by the administrator. Parasite hosts depend on the supporting hosts, as Xprint  
V7.0 cannot run on the parasite if it hasn’t been started on the supporting host.  
If you divide the original domain into several smaller domains, printers that are  
now in a different domain can be accessed by prefixing their names with a  
gateway name. If the devices must be accessed with the same name from every  
host, independently of which host they belong to, then this can be achieved by  
replicating the definition of the network devices in each domain. A physical  
printer can then be defined with the same logical name in each network. A user  
can then access the printer by using this name from any host in the system  
Procedure  
Once at least the primary master host is defined, you can add all the other  
systems to Xprint V7.0. The order in which you configure them also determines  
the order of the host hierarchy. If one computer is entered after another  
computer it also ranks below this one in the hierarchy (see section “Xprint V7.0  
objects” on page 9).  
To add a new host to the Xprint V7.0 configuration, you must perform steps on  
both the active host and the host to be added. First the new host must be regis-  
tered in the existing Xprint V7.0 configuration, then it can import the Xprint V7.0  
database and become part of the Xprint V7.0 network.  
To configure a new host, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in to an active host. If the Xprint V7.0 administrator is defined as a user  
there, log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator, otherwise as root.  
Enter the following command to add the new host to the database:  
xpadd -hos host_name -re host_type [-sh supporting_host]  
where host_name is the name of the relevant host and host_type the value you  
have entered in the worksheet. The option -re host_type (re stands for  
responsibility) may be omitted for potential masters. If the value PARASITEis  
specified for host_type, the value supporting_host for -shspecifies on which  
system the database for this parasite host can be found.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
99  
           
Administering hosts  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
If a computer has been set up as a PARASITEhost, its supporting host  
must be running and Xprint V7.0 must be active on it for the PARASITE  
host to be able to access Xprint V7.0. Both systems must have the  
same hardware. The administrator must make sure that the  
supporting host exports the /var/spool/Xprint/config/DBdirectory  
to the PARASITEhost and enters it in the parasite host’s directory  
under the same name. The export and entry in the directory must be  
done manually by the administrator.  
i
You can also specify additional options which above all affect the host  
hierarchy and which might depend on the network structure (see the  
description of the command xpadd -hosin the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference  
Manual”).  
●
If the Xprint V7.0 administrator is also to manage Xprint V7.0 from other  
hosts, use the following command:  
xpmod -usr xprintadm -ho+ host_names  
For host_names you specify all hosts on which the administrator is to be  
known.  
●
●
Log in to the new system as root.  
Define the Xprint V7.0 administrator as a system user there, if required (e.g.  
via the administrator interface sysadm).  
●
●
Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7.0  
(/etc/servicesfile, see section “Configuring the local area network  
(LAN)” on page 235).  
Initialize the database on the new host with the following command:  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/bin/DBinstall -h host_name  
where host_name represents the name of an already active host.  
Start the Xprint V7.0 system:  
●
xpstart  
Once all these operations have been carried out successfully, you can configure  
printers and other Xprint V7.0 objects on this host. The new host is now part of  
the Xprint V7.0 configuration.  
100  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering hosts (users only)  
6.2  
Administering hosts (users only)  
This section deals with the Xprint V7.0 objects of type host which must first be  
edited for new computers in an Xprint V7.0 configuration. The following table  
serves as a guide through this section:  
If you want to...  
Read....  
configure a local host which is not  
connected to other systems in a  
network  
section “Configuring Xprint V7.0 on a  
stand-alone system” on page 101  
introduce Xprint V7.0 to an existing  
network or configure a new network  
for Xprint V7.0  
section “Introducing Xprint V7.0 into a  
network” on page 103  
configure Xprint V7.0 on a new  
system in the network  
section “Configuring a new host” on  
page 98  
Table 9: Administering hosts (Reliant UNIX users)  
6.2.1 Configuring Xprint V7.0 on a stand-alone system  
Configuring an individual stand-alone system in Xprint V7.0 requires only a few  
steps. The only measures concerning the host are the configuration of an Xprint  
V7.0 administrator, and (in high-availability configurations) possibly changing  
the host name in the Xprint V7.0 configuration in the event that a reserve host  
is to assume the functions of the (failed) main host.  
Configuring an Xprint V7.0 administrator  
You should define an Xprint V7.0 administrator for managing Xprint V7.0 on your  
system. Except for starting the spooler system with the xpstartcommand,  
which requires root privileges, the Xprint V7.0 administrator can perform all the  
administrative tasks concerning Xprint V7.0 on your system.  
The rest of this chapter assumes the existence of an Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
If you have not defined an Xprint V7.0 administrator, the specified actions must  
be performed by rootinstead.  
You can assign this task to any existing user on your system or you can first set  
up a separate user ID.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
101  
       
Administering hosts (users only)  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
●
●
●
Log in to your system as root.  
If required, set up a separate user ID for the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Define the Xprint V7.0 administrator him-/herself with the following  
commands:  
xpadd -usr xprintadm  
xpmod -sys -ad xprintadm  
where xprintadm (-adstands for administrator) represents the user ID of the  
user who is to be the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Renaming the host computer  
In high-availability configurations several hosts usually work with shared disk  
resources so that, should one of the two hosts fail, the other host can continue  
doing the work of the failed one. If the Xprint V7.0 database is stored on the  
shared disks of such a system, the second host becomes active in the event of  
the normal host failing. If this host has a different name, the Xprint V7.0  
database does not correspond to the real configuration.  
In such a case the configuration can be adjusted quickly. To do this, you can  
rename the local host for the Xprint V7.0 system with the xppatchcommand.  
Observe the following to execute the xppatchcommand successfully:  
1. xppatchonly uses an Xprint V7.0 system which is defined locally. Before  
the command executes, it finds out whether Xprint V7.0 is installed locally or  
in the network.  
2. The xppatchcommand can only be used by the system administrator  
(root).  
3. The Xprint V7.0 system must be stopped for xppatchto be executed.  
xppatchchecks if Xprint V7.0 is stopped.  
4. Before xppatchmodifies a configuration or file, it backs up all data that may  
be modified. This backup requires approximately as much space on the hard  
disk in the file system in which Xprint V7.0 is installed as the sum of the DB  
and SV directories (without log and debugging files). If there is not enough  
space available on the hard disk, the xppatchcommand aborts without  
modifying the original files.  
102  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering hosts (users only)  
To rename a host computer, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in to the system as the system administrator (root).  
Stop the Xprint V7.0 system:  
xpstop  
●
Rename the host:  
xppatch -hostname oldname newname [-dg n]  
oldname is the host name to be changed, newname is the name that is to  
replace oldname.  
The -dg n option allows you to control the error message output of the  
xppatchcommand. For n use the values 0, 1 or 2, where 0 causes only error  
messages to be written to stderr, while 1 and 2 cause any additional  
messages to be output during command execution to log the process.  
6.2.2 Introducing Xprint V7.0 into a network  
Introducing Xprint V7.0 into an existing network or configuring a new network  
for Xprint V7.0 is in most cases done by one person, who is referred to below  
as the Xprint V7.0 administrator. This section is only intended for the Xprint V7.0  
administrator. The Xprint V7.0 administrator may be someone who is only  
responsible for managing Xprint V7.0 or he/she may be one of the system  
administrators of the computers involved. If you, as the Xprint V7.0 adminis-  
trator, want to introduce Xprint V7.0 into an existing network, you must perform  
the following tasks in the order given below:  
–
–
first study the network structure  
define a (primary) master host which first manages the Xprint V7.0 database  
(later you can specify additional computers which are to serve as reserve  
masters in case the defined master fails). For more information on the host  
hierarchy see the section “Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 9.  
–
–
configure Xprint V7.0 on the (primary) master host and define a user ID for  
the Xprint V7.0 administrator  
configure the other systems in the network by adding them to the existing  
network  
Then you or the respective system administrators must configure the individual  
printers by adding them to the Xprint V7.0 configuration.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
103  
         
Administering hosts (users only)  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
This section of the chapter deals with the first three items in this list. How to  
configure the other computers and printers in the network is described in  
separate sections later in this chapter.  
Determining the network structure  
So that Xprint V7.0 can be introduced into an existing network without problems,  
you must study the network structure before configuring Xprint V7.0. For this  
purpose you must gain an overview of all the computers and printers in this  
network. You should gather data on every computer and printer. This data will  
be required for configuring Xprint V7.0. The Appendix contains a worksheet in  
which you can enter the relevant data. It is recommended that you make a copy  
of this worksheet for every computer in your network and fill it out carefully. If  
there is not enough space for the relevant printers and/or supervisors, use the  
back of the copy or an additional sheet which you should clip to the worksheet.  
Configuring the primary master host  
When you have installed Xprint V7.0 on the host which is to be the primary  
master host, you can start configuring Xprint V7.0 by preparing the selected  
system as follows:  
●
●
Log in to the selected system as root.  
Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7.0  
(/etc/servicesfile, see section “Configuring the local area network  
(LAN)” on page 235).  
●
●
If the database was not installed in the course of product installation or has  
failed for any reason, you must initialize it now as follows:  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/bin/DBinstall -f  
Start the Xprint V7.0 system:  
xpstart  
Now define the new Xprint V7.0 administrator if you do not want to perform this  
task any longer as rooton the host now defined as the primary master. In this  
manual the user ID xprintadm is used as an example ID for the Xprint V7.0  
administrator. To configure the Xprint V7.0 administrator proceed as follows:  
●
Define the Xprint V7.0 administrator xprintadm as a user of this host (e.g.  
using the administrator interface sysadm).  
104  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering hosts (users only)  
●
●
Add the user xprintadm to the Xprint V7.0 configuration:  
xpadd -usr xprintadm  
Modify the Xprint V7.0 configuration such that xprintadm becomes the new  
Xprint V7.0 administrator:  
xpmod -sys -ad xprintadm  
Once you have performed these steps, you, as the Xprint V7.0 administrator,  
can configure printers and other Xprint V7.0 objects on the host.  
Configuring the other hosts  
Configure all the other hosts as described in the following section.  
6.2.3 Configuring a new host in an existing Xprint V7.0  
network  
Configuration hints  
Xprint V7.0 allows interoperability between different administrative domains,  
which need to be connected by gateways. All the hosts in an administrative  
domain share the same database contents. Each definition of an Xprint V7.0  
object or change of state involves a database update, which must be reflected  
on each host in the domain. This database propagation mechanism requires a  
reasonably fast network, which will allow connections to be opened quickly and  
rapid data transfer.  
The required data transfer rate between hosts is in the order of megabits per  
second. A typical example of such a network is Ethernet. Different domains can  
be connected by slower networks (possibly wide area networks) as there is  
generally less traffic between domains than within a domain.  
As a guideline, experience has shown that there is a practical limit of 50  
potential masters/slave hosts in a single domain. If there are too many potential  
master/slave hosts, it is difficult to keep all the databases updated. If more than  
50 hosts are needed then parasite hosts can be defined, or the domain can be  
divided into a number of smaller domains.  
Parasite hosts import the database from their supporting host (potential master  
or slave) by means of a file sharing utility (e.g. NFS) which needs to be set up  
by the administrator. Parasite hosts depend on the supporting hosts, as Xprint  
V7.0 cannot run on the parasite if it hasn’t been started on the supporting host.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
           
Administering hosts (users only)  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
If you divide the original domain into several smaller domains, printers that are  
now in a different domain can be accessed by prefixing their names with a  
gateway name. If the devices must be accessed with the same name from every  
host, independently of which host they belong to, then this can be achieved by  
replicating the definition of the network devices in each domain. A physical  
printer can then be defined with the same logical name in each network. A user  
can then access the printer by using this name from any host in the system  
Procedure  
Once at least the primary master host is defined, you can add all the other  
systems to Xprint V7.0. The order in which you configure them also determines  
the order of the host hierarchy. If one computer is entered after another  
computer it also ranks below this one in the hierarchy (see section “Xprint V7.0  
objects” on page 9).  
To add a new host to the Xprint V7.0 configuration, you must perform steps on  
both the active host and the host to be added. First the new host must be regis-  
tered in the existing Xprint V7.0 configuration, then it can import the Xprint V7.0  
database and become part of the Xprint V7.0 network.  
To configure a new host, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in to an active host. If the Xprint V7.0 administrator is defined as a user  
there, log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator, otherwise as root.  
Enter the following command to add the new host to the database:  
xpadd -hos host_name -re host_type [-sh supporting_host]  
where host_name is the name of the relevant host and host_type the value you  
have entered in the worksheet. The option -re host_type (re stands for  
responsibility) may be omitted for potential masters. If the value PARASITEis  
specified for host_type, the value supporting_host for -shspecifies on which  
system the database for this parasite host can be found.  
If a computer has been set up as a PARASITEhost, its supporting host  
must be running and Xprint V7.0 must be active on it for the PARASITE  
i
host to be able to access Xprint V7.0. Both systems must have the  
same hardware. The administrator must make sure that the  
supporting host exports the /var/spool/Xprint/config/DBdirectory  
to the PARASITEhost and enters it in the parasite host’s directory  
under the same name. The export and entry in the directory must be  
done manually by the administrator.  
106  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering hosts (users only)  
You can also specify additional options which above all affect the host  
hierarchy and which might depend on the network structure (see the  
description of the command xpadd -hosin the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference  
Manual”).  
●
If the Xprint V7.0 administrator is also to manage Xprint V7.0 from other  
hosts, use the following command:  
xpmod -usr xprintadm -ho+ host_names  
For host_names you specify all hosts on which the administrator is to be  
known.  
●
●
Log in to the new system as root.  
Define the Xprint V7.0 administrator as a system user there, if required (e.g.  
via the administrator interface sysadm).  
●
●
Configure the network services for the communication with Xprint V7.0  
(/etc/servicesfile, see section “Configuring the local area network  
(LAN)” on page 235).  
Initialize the database on the new host with the following command:  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/bin/DBinstall -h host_name  
where host_name represents the name of an already active host.  
Start the Xprint V7.0 system:  
●
xpstart  
Once all these operations have been carried out successfully, you can configure  
printers and other Xprint V7.0 objects on this host. The new host is now part of  
the Xprint V7.0 configuration.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
107  
 
Predefined printers  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.3  
Predefined printers  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to configure a set of predefined printers quickly and  
easily. This section describes how to add such printers to the system.  
Xprint V7.0 provides a special command for this purpose: xpconf_dev.With  
this command you can configure a printer defined in the  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/data/conf_devfile with the default param-  
eters. This file contains a list of printers which can also be extended individually.  
By default, this list comprises all the printers of Siemens AG.  
The xpconf_devcommand is the quickest method of configuring an Siemens  
printer. Also, if you want to configure several similar printers not contained in the  
list, it is often better to first extend the list and then call the xpconf_dev  
command instead of configuring these printers individually with the xpadd -dev  
command.  
The following table serves as a guide to the subsections dealing with configuring  
predefined printers:  
If you want to ...  
Read ...  
configure an Siemens printer  
section “Configuring predefined  
printers” on page 109  
extend the list of predefined printers section “Extending the list of  
predefined printers” on page 112  
Table 10: Configuring predefined printers  
108  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Predefined printers  
6.3.1 Configuring predefined printers  
The xpconf_devcommand provides a quick and easy method of adding a  
predefined printer: Xprint V7.0 automatically selects the suitable emulation for  
the specified printer model and it suggests a default configuration which you  
only need to adjust, if necessary. Proceed as follows to add a new printer with  
xpconf_dev:  
●
Call xpconf_dev:  
xpconf_dev  
The displayed screen should read similar to the following:  
List of device models and emulations supported by Xprint V7.0 :  
-- 1  
-- 2  
SNI-2050 HP-LASERJET  
SNI-4007 EPSON-LQ  
-- 3  
SNI-4009 EPSON-FX  
-- 4  
-- 5  
SNI-4009 PROPRINTER  
SNI-4010 EPSON-LQ  
-- 6  
-- 7  
SNI-4011 ECMA-9097 ( users only)  
SNI-4011 EPSON-LQ  
-- 8  
SNI-4011 EPSON-FX  
-- 9  
SNI-4014 EPSON-LQ  
-- 10  
-- 11  
-- 12  
-- 13  
-- 14  
-- 15  
SNI-4014 PROPRINTER  
SNI-4806 HP-LASERJET  
SNI-4806 PROPRINTER  
SNI-4806 HP-GL  
SNI-4810 HP-LASERJET  
SNI-4810 POSTSCRIPT  
( users only)  
Please type a number to select a device model, press return  
to start customized processing, ’q’ to quit or ’?’ for help.  
You can drive inside devices list using +/- (next/previous  
screen):  
All the printers contained in the  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/data/conf_devfile can be selected in this  
way.  
●
From this list, select your printer model or a similar model with a suitable  
emulation by entering the corresponding number and pressing "Enter".  
The selected entry is then marked, e.g.  
>> 1  
SNI-2050 HP-LASERJET  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
 
Predefined printers  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
●
●
Confirm again with "Enter".  
Next you must specify a printer address:  
Please give a device address.  
Type device address, ’q’ to quit or ’?’ for help :  
Here you must specify to which port the printer is attached. If the printer is  
connected to a serial, parallel or SCSI port of one of the hosts, you must  
specify the device file belonging to this port (the format is, for example,  
/dev/term/tty001or /dev/term/tty002for serial,/dev/lp0or /dev/lp1for  
parallel, and /dev/io0/sprin022for SCSI ports).  
If the printer to be configured is a LAN printer with its own network adapter  
card which is connected via a terminal server or via a PC to the software  
Wprint(or SPPCS), the address consists of an Internet address (or the  
corresponding host name from the file /etc/hosts) and a port number. In  
this case, the format of the printer address is, for example, 139.23.124.37  
7001.  
For details on the Internet address and the port number refer to the  
documentation and current configuration data of the LAN printer, the  
terminal server or the software Wprint(SPPCS), depending on how the LAN  
printer is connected to the network.  
Enter the address and confirm with "Enter".  
●
Now you are asked to assign a name to the new printer:  
Please give a device name.  
Type device name, ’q’ to quit or ’?’ for help :  
Enter a name which is not yet used in the system and press "Enter".  
110  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Predefined printers  
When you have performed these steps, Xprint V7.0 suggests a default configu-  
ration and at the same time offers you the option of modifying this configuration:  
●
A display similar to the following appears on the screen:  
Proposal of device definition (type "HP Laserjet 4P", emulation  
"HP-LASERJET"):  
-- 1  
-- 2  
-- 3  
-- 4  
-- 5  
-- 6  
-- 7  
-- 8  
-- 9  
NAME: HPLJ-4P  
Host: colorado  
pcl: HP-LASERJET  
Address: /dev/lp0  
Connection type: SERIAL  
Protocol: XON  
Speed: 9600  
Parity: NONE  
Significant bits: 8  
-- 10 Enable polling: RESET  
Please type a number to update an attribute, press return to start  
modification processing, ’q’ to quit or ’?’ for help : 5  
To modify the displayed configuration, you must select the corresponding  
number and confirm with "Enter". Then the corresponding entry is marked,  
e.g.  
>> 5  
Connection type: SERIAL  
●
Confirm again with "Enter".  
Then the possible parameters for the relevant option are displayed, from  
which you can select one by marking the number and confirming with  
"Enter" , e.g.:  
Updating attribute: "Connection type" .  
Current value: "SERIAL"  
Possible values are:  
1. SERIAL  
4. SCSI  
2. PARALLEL  
3. LAN  
Type entry number (any other entry means no change) : 2  
●
Once you have made all the settings according to your requirements,  
confirm with "Enter". Xprint V7.0 then confirms the entry of the new printer  
with the following message:  
Updating device model : "HPLJ-4P" .  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
Predefined printers  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.3.2 Extending the list of predefined printers  
If you need to configure a non-predefined printer type frequently in Xprint V7.0,  
you can enter this printer type in the  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/data/conf_devfile with the corresponding  
default values. This allows you to configure printers of this type with the  
xpconf_devcommand.  
By default you require system administrator privileges to be able to edit this file.  
The file consists of a number of lines, each of which corresponds to one entry.  
The entries could read as follows:  
SNI-4007 ! EPSON-LQ ! EPSON-LQ ! NONE ! 9600 ! 8 ! XON ! N !  
SERIAL !  
SNI-4009 ! EPSON-FX ! EPSON-FX ! NONE ! 9600 ! 8 ! ETX ! N !  
SERIAL !  
SNI-4009 ! PROPRINTER ! PROPRINTER ! NONE ! 9600 ! 8 ! XON ! N !  
SERIAL !  
SNI-4010 ! EPSON-LQ ! EPSON-LQ ! NONE ! 9600 ! 8 ! XON ! N !  
SERIAL !  
SNI-4011 ! ECMA-9097 ! E-9097  
SERIAL ! ( users only).  
! NONE ! 9600 ! 8 ! XON ! Y !  
Each entry consists of nine fields which are separated by the exclamation  
mark !. The individual fields have the following meanings:  
Field  
Meaning  
1
Printer type - the name under which the printer can be selected. For  
new entries any name can be used.  
2
3
Emulation - if a printer supports more than one emulation, a separate  
entry with the same printer type and a different emulation should be  
specified for each different emulation.  
PCL - here, the name of the PCL suitable for the printer type and  
emulation is specified. If this PCL is not yet defined in the Xprint V7.0  
configuration, xpconf_devwill add it.  
4
5
Parity - for a connection via a serial interface, the type of parity bit  
must be specified here. Possible values are ODD, EVENand NONE.  
Baud rate - for a connection via a serial interface, the baud rate of the  
connection is specified here.  
Table 11: conf_dev file  
112  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Predefined printers  
Field  
Meaning  
6
Significant bits - for a connection via a serial interface, the number of  
bits for transferring a character is specified here. Possible values are  
7and 8.  
7
Protocol - for a connection via a serial interface, the handshake  
protocol for the connection is specified here. Possible values are XON,  
ETXand RXON  
8
9
Polling - this field specifies whether polling is enabled or not.  
Possible values are Y(yes) and N(no).  
Connection type - this field specifies how the printer is usually  
connected. Possible values are SERIAL, PARALLEL, SCSIand LAN.  
Table 11: conf_dev file  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
Administering devices  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.4  
Administering devices  
This section describes all the steps required for configuring and modifying  
printers. It presents simple procedures which allow you to quickly configure  
standard situations without referring to the Reference Manual. This section  
does not explain how to configure faxes and e-mail outputs. Please consult the  
Reference Manual for the particular features of such output devices.  
Bear in mind that a number of predefined printers can also be configured with  
the xpconf_devcommand which is described in the previous section. The  
following table serves as a guide through this section and refers you to other  
sections containing additional information on printers.  
If you want to...  
Read...  
configure a new printer  
deactivate a printer  
section “Adding a printer” on page 116  
section “Deactivating a printer” on  
page 118  
activate a printer  
section “Reactivating a printer” on  
page 120  
remove a printer  
section “Removing a printer” on  
page 121  
connect a printer to another system  
section “Reconnecting a printer to  
another system” on page 122  
reconnect a printer to a different port section “Reconnecting a printer to a  
on the same system different port” on page 122  
replace an existing printer with a new section “Replacing an existing printer  
printer  
with a new one” on page 123  
grant or deny a printer access to a  
form  
section “Granting or denying specific  
printers access to a form” on  
page 150  
grant or deny specific users access to section “Granting or denying specific  
a printer users access to a form” on page 149  
change the security level of a printer section “Assigning a security level to a  
printer” on page 124  
assign a filter to a printer  
section “Assigning a filter to a printer”  
on page 169  
Table 12: Administering printers  
114  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering devices  
If you want to...  
Read...  
cancel the assignment of a filter to a section “Removing a filter from a  
printer  
printer” on page 170  
assign a form to a printer  
section “Default forms for printers” on  
page 160  
assign a PCL to a printer  
section “Assigning a PCL to a printer”  
on page 183  
define a new recovery rule  
assign a recovery rule to a printer  
Table 12: Administering printers  
section “Defining a recovery rule” on  
page 186  
section “Assigning a recovery rule to a  
printer” on page 190  
The following sections assume that Xprint V7.0 is installed correctly on all the  
relevant systems (see chapter “Installing Xprint V7.0”).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
Administering devices  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.4.1 Adding a printer  
If your system has a printer attached, this printer must be managed by a local  
supervisor, which itself must be controlled by a server in the network. You can  
use a default supervisor, an existing defined supervisor or you can define a new  
one. If you define a new supervisor, you can assign it to any existing server in  
the network or define a separate new server for it or use a predefined default  
server.  
You can also add a printer without first having defined a server and  
supervisor. In this case, the following applies: if you add a printer with the  
i
xpadd -devcommand and no server or supervisor are defined on the  
local host, Xprint V7.0 automatically configures a server and supervisor  
with the name of the host on which they are defined. The new printer is  
automatically assigned to these objects.  
Selecting a server  
●
To display a list of all the available servers in order to select one for your  
supervisor or to define a unique name, use the following command:  
xpshow -srv  
A list of all the defined servers is displayed, which has the following structure:  
Name  
----  
srv_colorado  
missouri_server  
delaware_srv  
User perm.  
----------  
Host  
----  
colorado  
missouri  
delaware  
Administrator  
-------------  
root  
xprintadm  
root  
●
If you want to define a new server on your system, enter the following  
command:  
xpadd -srv server_name  
Defining a supervisor  
●
If the new printer on your system requires its own supervisor, you can now  
define this supervisor with the following command:  
xpadd -spv supervisor_name [-se server_name]  
Assign a unique name to the supervisor and specify with server_name which  
server is to manage your supervisor.  
116  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering devices  
Configuring printers  
●
First use the checklist in the Appendix on page 263 to check if all the  
required preparatory steps for adding printers have been taken or if you want  
to use any of the further configuration options mentioned there (forms, filters,  
permission lists, etc.).  
●
If you want to display a list of all the printers available in order to define a  
unique device name for your printer, use the following command:  
xpshow -dev  
A list of all the defined printers is displayed, which has the following  
structure:  
Name  
----  
PCL  
---  
Default form Host  
------------ ----  
Administrator  
-------------  
root  
printer1 POSTSCRIPT GENERIC  
printer2 HP-LASERJET GENERIC  
hudson  
colorado root  
●
Now choose a printer name which does not yet exist in the list and configure  
your printer at the selected or specially defined supervisor:  
xpadd -dev device_name -da device_file -co type /  
[-su supervisor_name] -pc pcl_name [-aa]  
device_file specifies to which port the printer is attached (e.g.  
/dev/term/tty001or /dev/term/tty002for serial, or /dev/lp0or  
/dev/lp1for parallel ports, or 192.210.192.127 9100for a LAN  
connection.).  
With type you specify which type of port is used for your printer. Possible  
values for type are SERIALfor a serial port, PARALLELfor a parallel port, SCSI  
for a SCSI high-performance printer, and LANfor a LAN printer. The default  
is SERIAL.  
If required, you can specify the responsible supervisor with supervisor_name.  
If you omit this specification, Xprint V7.0 uses the supervisor with the name  
of the host to which the printer is attached. If you do not specify a supervisor,  
Xprint V7.0 will automatically define a default supervisor.  
With pcl_name you define which printer capability list is to be used for  
addressing your printer. Possible values include HP-LASERJET, POSTSCRIPT,  
PROPRINTERand HP-DESKJET. The default is GENERIC. See the Reference  
Manual to find out which PCL to specify for the printer you use.  
The -aaoption can be used to have the printer activated automatically  
whenever Xprint V7.0 is started.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
               
Administering devices  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Once you have connected and configured a new printer, you must activate it.  
●
Activate the printer by entering the following command:  
xpchange -dev printer_name  
You can also use the -aaoption (for automatic activation) of the xpadd -dev  
command, in which case the printer is available immediately after xpstartis  
executed.  
6.4.2 Deactivating a printer  
To deactivate a printer, use the xpchange -devcommand. There are three  
options available for deactivation (you can only deactivate the printers you  
administer):  
●
●
●
You can deactivate a printer completely.  
You can deactivate spoolin.  
You can deactivate the printing itself (spoolout).  
Deactivating a printer completely  
Deactivating a printer completely means that it is not available for any actions in  
the system. A complete deactivation makes sense, for example, if the printer is  
not available for a long period of time due to repairs.  
●
Use the following command to deactivate a printer:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE [-jujustification]  
If you do not specify a selection, all printers you manage in the Xprint V7.0  
system are deactivated; otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers  
to be deactivated, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option  
(see section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a  
list of criteria according to which the printers to be deactivated are selected.  
If you de-/activate a printer with the -stoption, spoolin and spoolout  
(printing) are also de-/activated.  
With the option -jujustification you specify a comment justifying the new  
spoolin status. You can display this comment with the xpstat -dev  
command. The comment is deleted automatically when the -stoption is  
changed again with the xpchange -devcommand.  
118  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering devices  
Deactivating spoolin  
You can deactivate a printer, but still have it print the print jobs waiting in the print  
queue. To do this set its spoolin status to OFF. In this case all print jobs which  
have the status ACTIVEor WAITare still printed; however, at the same time you  
lock the spoolin of new print jobs with this command.  
●
Use the following command:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -si OFF [-jujustification]  
The -sioption stands for spoolin.  
Deactivating printing  
If a printer is not available for a short period of time only (e.g. because the toner  
needs to be refilled), you can still submit print jobs which will be printed when  
the printer becomes available again.  
●
Use the following command:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -so OFF [-jujustification]  
The -sooption stands for spoolout.  
Examples  
–
To deactivate the printer printer1with the justification that the printer is  
being repaired:  
xpchange -dev printer1 -st NOT_ACTIVE -ju "printer is being  
repaired"  
–
–
–
To deactivate all printers controlled by the host colorado:  
xpchange -dev -scl "-ho colorado" -st NOT_ACTIVE  
To deactivate all printers you manage:  
xpchange -dev -st NOT_ACTIVE  
To deactivate printer printer1, but have all waiting jobs printed before the  
printer is removed from the network:  
xpchange -dev printer1 -si OFF  
–
To deactivate printer printer1because the paper is being refilled:  
xpchange -dev -so OFF -ju "refilling paper"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
 
Administering devices  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.4.3 Reactivating a printer  
To be able to submit print jobs for a printer or start printing, you must first  
activate the printer.  
●
Activate the printer with the following command:  
xpchange -dev [selection] [-si ON | -so ON] [-ju justification]  
If you do not specify a selection, the command refers to all printers in the  
system; otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers to be activated,  
or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section  
“Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria  
according to which the printers to be activated are selected.  
With the -siON option, you can reactivate spoolin only, with -soONspoolout  
only. If neither of these options is specified, the printer is reactivated  
completely.  
With the option -jujustification you specify a comment justifying the new  
spoolin status. You can display this comment with the xpstat -dev  
command.  
Examples  
–
–
–
To activate printer printer1with the justification that it is now ready again:  
xpchange -dev printer1 -ju "ready again"  
To activate spoolin for all printers connected to host colorado:  
xpchange -dev -scl "-ho colorado" -si ON  
To activate all printers:  
xpchange -dev  
120  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering devices  
6.4.4 Removing a printer  
To remove a defined printer because it is no longer available on your system,  
use the following procedure:  
●
●
Log in as rootor, if defined, as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Check first whether the printer you wish to delete is referenced by other  
Xprint V7.0 objects. If so, these references must be removed. Use the  
following command to check for references:  
xpshow -dev [selection]printer_name -diR  
With printer_name, you specify exactly one printer to be deleted. If you want  
to delete several printers, you must repeat this command for each of these  
printers.  
If you do not specify a selection, the command refers to all printers in the  
system; otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers to be removed,  
or you can define a list of selection criteria with the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) according to which the printers to be removed are  
selected.  
●
If references to the printer are displayed, you must remove these before you  
can delete the printer, by modifying the relevant objects such that the refer-  
ences are canceled.  
●
●
Check if the printer to be deleted is still active with the following command:  
xpstat -dev [selection]  
If the printer is still active (output: State: ACTIVE), you must deactivate it  
before deleting it:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
Delete the printer definition with the following command:  
xpdel -dev [selection]  
●
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
         
Administering devices  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.4.5 Reconnecting a printer to another system  
To move a printer from one system to another, use the following procedure:  
●
Deactivate the relevant printer:  
xpchange -dev printer_name -st NOT_ACTIVE  
where printer_name represents the name of the printer to be reconnected.  
Specify the host to which the printer is to be connected:  
xpmod -dev printer_name -ho new_host [-da device_file]  
●
For new_host specify the name of the host at which the printer is to be  
available from now on.  
If the printer is no longer connected to the same port (e.g. /dev/lp0instead  
of /dev/lp), specify a new file for device_file.  
●
Reactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev device_name  
6.4.6 Reconnecting a printer to a different port  
If you want to connect a defined printer to a different port on the same system,  
you only need to modify the device definition - you do not have to delete and  
redefine the printer.  
●
Check whether the relevant printer is still active. Use the following command:  
xpstat -dev [selection]  
●
If the printer is still active (output: State: ACTIVE), you must deactivate it  
before modifying it:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
●
Then modify the printer definition using the following command:  
xpmod -dev device_name -da device_file [-co type]  
where device_name is the name of the printer whose definition is to be  
modified.  
Depending on the type, device_file specifies to which port the printer is  
attached (e.g. /dev/term/tty001or /dev/term/tty002for serial, or  
/dev/lp0or /dev/lp1for parallel ports), or which LAN address and port  
122  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering devices  
number apply for a LAN printer (e.g.: "132.82.127.34 9100", as the Internet  
address for your LAN printer). Instead of the Internet address and port  
number you can also specify the host name provided it is defined in the  
/etc/hostsfile.  
If the connection type changes (e.g. up to now the first serial port; now the  
second parallel port), you must also specify with type the new connection  
type your printer will use. Possible values for type are SERIALfor a serial port,  
PARALLELfor a parallel port, SCSI for a SCSI high-performance printer, and  
LANfor a LAN printer.  
6.4.7 Replacing an existing printer with a new one  
If you want to replace an existing printer with a new one, you only have to  
change the relevant information in the definition of the old printer. What infor-  
mation this is depends on the printer involved.  
●
First check the settings of the existing printer:  
xpshow -dev printer -di LONG  
This displays a list of all the settings for the specified printer printer.  
●
Use the checklist on page 263 in the Appendix to check if all the required  
preparatory steps for modifying the printer have been taken or if you want to  
use any of the further configuration options mentioned there (forms, filters,  
permission lists, etc.).  
●
●
●
Check whether the relevant printer is still active with the following command:  
xpstat -dev [selection]  
If the printer is still active (output: Status: ACTIVE), you must deactivate it:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
Then modify all the settings which have changed for the new printer with the  
following command:  
xpmod -dev printer [options_to_be_modified]  
For options_to_be_modified you can specify any of the options which can also  
be specified when defining a new printer (see also section “Adding a printer”  
on page 116 and the description of the xpmod -devcommand in the “Xprint  
V7.0 - Reference Manual”).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
       
Administering devices  
Example  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
–
The old printer printer1used the PCL HP_LASERJETbut the new printer is  
a PostScript printer:  
xpmod -dev printer1 -pc POSTSCRIPT -ct-  
The -ct-option makes sure that the data format of the printer is adjusted  
to the default, which depends on the PCL.  
You can only modify a PCL assigned to a printer if all the other printer  
options are compatible.  
i
Example: A printer is defined via -pcHP_LASERJETand the default  
form LANDSCAPE(-lsLANDSCAPE). In this case, you can only modify the  
printer to EPSON-FXwith the -pcoption if you first modify the default  
form to PORTRAIT.  
6.4.8 Assigning a security level to a printer  
Under Xprint V7.0 one of five security levels can be assigned to printers as well  
as to print jobs and users.  
Xprint V7.0 assigns print jobs to a printer according to the security level of the  
job and the printer. This means that a print job can only be printed on a printer  
with at least the same security level. A print job with the security level  
CONFIDENTIAL, for example, can only be printed on printers with the security level  
CONFIDENTIALor higher (SECRET, TOP_SECRET).  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
If required, deactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev printer_name -st NOT_ACTIVE [-ju justification]  
For printer_name specify the name of the printer whose security level you  
want to modify.  
With the -jujustification option, you can define a comment justifying the new  
security level. This comment can be displayed with the xpstat -dev  
command. The comment is automatically deleted when the -stoption is  
changed again with the xpchange -devcommand.  
●
To assign a specific security level to a printer, use the following command:  
xpmod -dev [selection] -sl security_level  
124  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering devices  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printers in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the printers to  
which you want to assign a security level, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant printers are selected.  
For -slsecurity_level specify the desired security level. Xprint V7.0 allows  
you to choose from UNCLASSIFIED (= default), SENSITIVE, CONFIDENTIAL,  
SECRET, TOP_SECRET.  
●
Reactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev printer_name  
For printer_name specify the name of the printer whose security level has  
been modified.  
Examples  
–
To assign the security level CONFIDENTIALto printer printer5:  
xpchange -dev printer5 -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -dev printer5 -sl CONFIDENTIAL  
xpchange -dev printer5  
–
–
To display the security level of the printer printer4:  
xpshow -dev printer4 -di LONG  
To modify the security level of the printer printer5 to SECRETlater:  
xpchange -dev printer5 -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -dev printer5 -sl SECRET  
xpchange -dev printer5  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
Administering printer groups  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.5  
Administering printer groups  
Under Xprint V7.0 you can set up printer groups to speed up the output of print  
jobs. If a print job is submitted for a printer group, the job is printed on the first  
printer to become available in the printer group.  
This section describes the possible steps required for configuring printer  
groups. The following table serves as a guide through this section:  
If you want to...  
Read...  
set up a new printer group or create it section “Setting up a new printer  
from an existing one  
group” on page 127  
add a printer to an existing printer  
group  
section “Adding a printer to a printer  
group” on page 129  
remove a printer from a printer group section “Removing a printer from a  
printer group” on page 129  
deactivate a printer group  
reactivate a printer group  
delete a printer group  
section “Deactivating a printer group”  
on page 130  
section “Reactivating a printer group”  
on page 131  
section “Deleting a printer group” on  
page 132  
grant or deny specific users access to section “Granting or denying specific  
a printer group  
users access to a printer group” on  
page 149  
Table 13: Administering printer groups  
126  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering printer groups  
6.5.1 Setting up a new printer group  
There are two possible ways of setting up new printer groups: you can either  
define a completely new printer group or you can copy an existing one and  
modify it.  
Setting up a completely new printer group  
●
Set up a new printer group with the following command:  
xpadd -dgr group_name -dl device_list  
With group_name you assign the new group a name. This name must be  
unique among all printer groups and printers already defined in the system.  
With device_list you specify the names of the printers which are to belong to  
the new group. The printer names must be separated by blanks. Printer  
groups must not be specified in the list. The following requirements must be  
met for the specified printers:  
–
–
All printers must already be configured.  
You must have the permission required to address the printers in the  
printer group.  
–
All printers must be controlled by the same server. A print job in the print  
queue is always handled by a single server. If any printer in a printer  
group were not controlled by the same server as the others in the group,  
this printer would never be used for printing jobs (even if it were the first  
printer available). If this is the case, use the xpmod -dev command to  
assign the printer to the correct server.  
–
The spoolin status of the added printer group is automatically set to "ON".  
Also, the date of the last modification is updated.  
In addition, the following options are available for defining the attributes of  
the printer group: -upuser_permission, -ahadministration_host,  
-cucomment_for_user, -cacomment_for_administrator.  
For more detailed information refer to the description of the xpadd -dgr  
command in the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
127  
         
Administering printer groups  
Copying a printer group  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
If you want to set up a printer group which is very similar to an existing one, you  
can also copy the existing printer group and modify the copied group according  
to your requirements.  
The new printer group is set up on the host on which the xpcopy -dgr  
command is executed; this is not true if you have specified a different host with  
the -ah(administration host) option.  
●
Copy a printer group with the following command:  
xpcopy -dgr source_group target_group [modifications]  
With source_group you specify the name of the printer group you want to  
copy. With target_group you must specify the name of the new printer group.  
If this name already exists (for a printer or a printer group), the xpcopy -dgr  
command is rejected.  
For modifications you specify a list containing the new or changed values for  
the new printer group. The options in this list correspond to the options with  
which the printer group was added to the Xprint V7.0 system (see the  
previous section).  
Examples  
–
To set up the printer group group1,which contains the printers printer1,  
printer2 and printer3and is only to be used by the users in the permission  
list permission1:  
xpadd -dgr group1 -dl printer1 printer2 printer3 \  
-up permission1  
–
–
To set up a new group group2based on the existing group group1without  
making any changes:  
xpcopy -dgr group1 group2  
To set up a new group group2based on the existing group group1keeping  
all printers except for printer3:  
xpcopy -dgr group1 group2 -dl- printer3  
128  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering printer groups  
6.5.2 Adding a printer to a printer group  
If you want to add a printer to a printer group, this printer must already be  
configured in the spooler system. If this is not the case, you must add the printer  
with the xpadd -devcommand; for more detailed information on this, see the  
section “Adding a printer” on page 116. Proceed as follows:  
●
Add additional printers to the printer group:  
xpmod -dgr [selection]-dl+ new_printer  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printer groups in the  
Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer  
groups to be added, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option  
(see section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a  
list of criteria according to which the relevant printer groups are selected.  
Example  
To add the printers printer4 and printer5 to the printer group group1.  
xpadd -dgr group1 -dl+ printer4 printer5  
6.5.3 Removing a printer from a printer group  
The xpmod -dgrcommand allows you to delete any printer you manage from  
a printer group that you have access to.  
Proceed as follows:  
●
Remove the printer:  
xpmod -dgr [selection] -dl- printer_name  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printer groups in the  
Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer  
groups to be removed, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list”  
option (see section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to  
define a list of criteria according to which the relevant printer groups are  
selected.  
Example  
To delete the printer printer3 from the printer group group1,retaining all the  
other printers:  
xpmod -dgr group1 -dl- printer3  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
             
Administering printer groups  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.5.4 Deactivating a printer group  
To deactivate a printer group, use the xpchange -dgrcommand. You can only  
change the current spoolin status of the printer groups you manage.  
●
Use the following command to deactivate a printer group:  
xpchange -dgr [selection] -si OFF [-ju justification]  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printer groups in the  
Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer  
groups to be deactivated, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list”  
option (see section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to  
define a list of criteria according to which the printer groups to be deactivated  
are selected.  
The option -si OFF specifies the new spoolin status (in this case OFF) for the  
selected printer group. When -si OFFis set, the print requests for the  
selected printer groups are rejected.  
With the option -jujustification you specify a comment justifying the new  
spoolin status. You can display this comment with the xpstat -dgr  
command. This comment is deleted automatically when the -sioption is  
changed again with the xpchange -dgrcommand.  
Examples  
–
To change the spoolin status of printer group group1to OFFwith the justifi-  
cation that the group is being modified:  
xpchange -dgr group1 -si OFF -ju "group is being modified"  
–
To deactivate all printer groups which contain printer printer8 (remember  
that all criteria used for selecting the printer groups must be enclosed in  
quotes):  
xpchange -dgr -scl "-dl printer8” -si OFF  
To deactivate all printer groups:  
–
xpchange -dgr -si OFF -ju "complete reorganization"  
130  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering printer groups  
6.5.5 Reactivating a printer group  
To be able to assign print jobs to a printer group, the spoolin status of this printer  
group must be set to ON.  
●
To activate a printer group, use the following command:  
xpchange -dgr [selection] [-si ON] [-ju justification]  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printer groups in the  
Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the names of the  
printer groups you want to activate, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
printer groups to be activated are selected.  
The option -si ON specifies the new spoolin status (in this case ON) for the  
selected printer group. When -si ON is set, all the print requests for the  
selected printer groups are accepted.  
With the option -jujustification you specify a comment justifying the new  
spoolin status. You can display this comment with the xpstat -dgr  
command. This comment is deleted automatically when the -sioption is  
changed again with the xpchange -dgrcommand.  
Examples  
–
To set the spoolin status of the printer group group1to ONwith the justification  
that the group is now ready again:  
xpchange -dgr group1 -si ON -ju "ready again"  
–
To set the spoolin status to ONfor all printer groups which contain printer  
printer8 (remember that all criteria used for selecting the printer groups  
must be enclosed in quotes):  
xpchange -dgr -scl "-dl printer8” -si ON  
To activate all printer groups:  
–
xpchange -dgr -si ON  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
131  
     
Administering printer groups  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.5.6 Deleting a printer group  
The xpdel -dgrcommand allows you to delete any printer group you can  
access. In this case, the individual printers of the printer group are not deleted.  
●
Check first whether the printer group you wish to delete is referenced by  
other Xprint V7.0 objects:  
xpshow -dgr [selection]printer_group -diR  
With printer_group, you specify exactly one printer group to be deleted. If you  
want to delete several groups, you must repeat this command for each of  
these printer groups.  
If you do not specify a selection, the command refers to all printer groups in  
the system; otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer groups to be  
removed, or you can define a list of selection criteria with the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) according to which the printer groups to be  
removed are selected.  
●
●
If references to the printer group are displayed, you must remove these by  
modifying the displayed objects such that they no longer refer to this group.  
Delete the printer group with the following command:  
xpdel -dgr [selection]  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printer groups in the  
Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer  
groups you want to delete, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list”  
option (see section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to  
define a list of criteria according to which the printer groups to be deleted are  
selected.  
Examples  
–
To delete the printer group named group1:  
xpdel -dgr group1  
–
To delete all printer groups containing printer printer8:  
xpdel -dgr -scl "-dl printer8"  
132  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering users  
6.6  
Administering users  
This section describes the possible ways of administering various users in the  
Xprint V7.0 system. The following table serves as a guide to this section:  
If you want to...  
Read...  
define a user locally or globally for the section “Defining a user” on page 133  
entire Xprint V7.0 system, or grant  
him/her further or new privileges  
delete a user  
section “Deleting a user” on page 137  
modify the privileges of a user  
section “Modifying user privileges” on  
page 135  
modify a user’s print quotas  
display information on users  
modify a user’s security level  
Table 14: Administering users  
section “Resetting user print quotas”  
on page 138  
section “Displaying information on  
users” on page 140  
section “Assigning a security level to a  
user” on page 141  
6.6.1 Defining a user  
Xprint V7.0 allows the Xprint V7.0 administrator to grant privileges to users. For  
privileges to be granted, the users must be defined under Xprint V7.0. There are  
several different ways of doing this.  
The user privileges can be defined while the user is being added. For a detailed  
description of the possible privileges, see the description of the xpadd -usr  
command in the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual” as well as in the section  
“Modifying user privileges” on page 135.  
●
To add a new user to the Xprint V7.0 system, use the following command:  
xpadd -usr user_IDs [-ho hosts]  
For user_IDs you can specify either a single user or a list of users. Now Xprint  
V7.0 knows the specified users and you can grant them specific privileges.  
By additionally specifying a list of hosts with the -hohosts option you can  
allow users to access jobs they have submitted on one of these hosts from  
any other of the specified hosts.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
             
Administering users  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
These users do not have to be registered as SINIX users on the specified  
hosts. If the -hooption is not specified, only the local host is added to the list.  
Examples  
–
To add user smithlocally to the Xprint V7.0 system:  
xpadd -usr smith  
–
The Xprint V7.0 administrator enters the following command on a spooler  
system with the hosts colorado, nashuaand hudson:  
xpadd -usr smith -ho colorado nashua  
smithis now an Xprint V7.0 user of host coloradoand host nashua. If he  
sends a job from host coloradoto the system, he can log in to host nashua  
and access this job, for example to modify the job priority. He cannot do this  
from host hudsonas there the Xprint V7.0 system considers him to be a  
different user with the ID smith.  
6.6.2 Entering a defined user for other hosts  
If an already defined user is to be able to access his/her jobs from other hosts  
as well, for example because he/she has a user ID on a newly added host, the  
host list can be extended.  
●
Enter the new host in the user’s host list with the following command:  
xpmod -usr [selection] -ho+ host  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise can either you can specify the name(s) of the users  
whose host list you want to modify, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
users are selected. For host specify the name of the host from which the user  
is to have common access to his/her print jobs.  
Example  
–
To add the new host delaware to the host list of user smith:  
xpmod -usr smith -ho+ delaware  
To add the new host missouriadditionally for all users:  
xpmod -usr -ho+ missouri  
–
134  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering users  
6.6.3 Deleting a host from a user’s host list  
If a defined user is no longer to be able to access his/her print jobs from a  
specific host, e.g. because there is now another user with the same user ID on  
this host, you can delete this host from the list.  
●
Delete the host from the user’s host list with the following command:  
xpmod -usr [selection] -ho- host  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the users  
whose host list you want to modify, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
users are selected.  
For host specify the name of the hosts from which the user is no longer to  
have access to the print jobs of the other hosts.  
Examples  
–
To delete host delaware from the host list of user smith:  
xpmod -usr smith -ho- delaware  
To delete host missourifrom the host list of all users:  
xpmod -usr -ho- missouri  
–
6.6.4 Modifying user privileges  
The Xprint V7.0 administrator can also define the privileges of users when or  
after defining them. There are a number of options available which can be used  
with the xpmod -usrcommand described below or when defining the user with  
xpadd -usr.  
●
Use the following command to modify the privileges of one or more users:  
xpmod -usr [selection] modifications  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all users in the Xprint V7.0  
system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the user(s) whose  
privileges you want to modify, or you can use the -scl  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
             
Administering users  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant users are selected.  
For modifications you can specify any combination of the following options:  
–
With the option -pvprivileges you assign specific privileges to a user.  
Possible categories are:  
ALL  
the user is given all privileges.  
NONE (default)  
the user is granted no privileges.  
ANY_DEVICE  
the user can access any printer even if defined otherwise in the  
permission list.  
TOP  
the user is allowed to place his/her print job at the top of the print  
queue.  
–
–
With the option -prpriority you can assign the maximum priority with  
which the user may spool in his/her print jobs. Xprint V7.0 then places  
the user’s jobs in the print queue according to the priority assigned. The  
priority range is 1-100, and the default value is UNDEFINED.  
With the option -ajallowed_jobs the Xprint V7.0 administrator can define  
how many jobs each individual user is allowed to print. The default is  
NO_LIMIT.  
–
–
With the option -ncnumber_of_copies you define the maximum number of  
copies per user job. The default is NO_LIMIT.  
With the option -apallowed_pages you can define the maximum number  
of pages a user is allowed to print. Once a user has reached this number  
of pages, he/she is no longer allowed to submit further print jobs. The  
default is NO_LIMIT.  
–
When the -ua(user accounting) option is specified, Xprint V7.0 will  
update and save the counter of the number of pages and jobs printed per  
user after the job is finished. When a user has reached the limit of one of  
his/her print quotas, he/she cannot print any more print jobs until his/her  
counter is reset.  
136  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering users  
–
With the option -slsecurity_level you can define the maximum security  
level with which a user can submit print jobs. The following values are  
allowed: UNCLASSIFIED (default), SENSITIVE, CONFIDENTIAL, SECRET,  
TOP_SECRET.  
Examples  
–
To modify the current privileges of smithsuch that he is now allowed to place  
his jobs at the top of the print queue (TOP):  
xpmod -usr smith -pv TOP  
–
–
To assign user smithall the possible privileges:  
xpmod -usr smith -pv ALL  
To modify the privileges of all users with the current rights ANY_DEVICE, such  
that these are now given all possible privileges:  
xpmod -usr -scl "-pv ANY_DEVICE” -pv ALL  
–
To define a maximum priority of 80 for user smith(now this user can spool  
in his/her print jobs with any priority between 1 and 80):  
xpmod -usr smith -pr 80  
–
–
–
–
To define a maximum number of 10 jobs for user smith:  
xpmod -usr smith -aj 10  
To restrict the maximum number of copies per print job to 15 for user smith:  
xpmod -usr smith -nc 15  
To restrict the maximum number of pages user smithmay print to 500:  
xpmod -usr smith -ap 500  
To update and save the counter for the number of pages and jobs printed by  
smithafter the job is finished, use the following command:  
xpmod -usr smith -ua  
6.6.5 Deleting a user  
Before trying to delete a user, make sure that this user is not contained in any  
permission list. A user that is still listed in an allowed list cannot be deleted.  
●
Check first whether the user you wish to delete is referenced by other Xprint  
V7.0 objects. Enter  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
       
Administering users  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
xpshow -usr [selection]user -diR  
With user, you specify exactly one user to be deleted. If you want to delete  
several users, you must repeat this command for each of these users.  
If you do not specify a selection, the command refers to all users in the  
system; otherwise you can either specify a list of the users to be removed,  
or you can define a list of selection criteria with the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) according to which the users to be removed are  
selected.  
●
●
If references to the user are displayed, you must remove these by modifying  
the displayed objects accordingly.  
To delete user entries in the Xprint V7.0 system, you as the Xprint V7.0  
administrator must enter the following command:  
xpdel -usr [selection]  
If you do not specify a selection, the command refers to all users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the users to be  
deleted, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section  
“Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria  
according to which the relevant users are selected.  
Examples  
–
To delete a user named smith:  
xpdel -usr smith  
–
To delete all users who are not assigned any privileges (xpadd -usr  
user_name -pvNONE):  
xpdel -usr -scl "-pv NONE”  
6.6.6 Resetting user print quotas  
When defining a user, you can determine specific quotas to restrict the number  
of pages or print jobs a user can print. When the number of allowed pages or  
jobs is reached, the user can only print again when you reset the print quotas.  
There are two possible ways of resetting a user’s print quotas:  
138  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering users  
Changing the number of consumed pages  
●
You can change the number of pages a user has consumed (i.e. printed) with  
the -cpoption:  
xpchange -usr [selection]-cp new_consumed_pages  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the user(s) for  
whom the changed print quotas are to apply, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant users are selected.  
The variable new_consumed_pages represents the new counter value for the  
consumed pages of the user. Now the user can print again until the  
maximum number of allowed pages is reached. Once the user has  
consumed this number of pages, any further jobs will be rejected.  
Changing the number of consumed print jobs  
●
You can change the number of print jobs a user has consumed (i.e. printed)  
with the -cjoption:  
xpchange -usr [selection] -cj new_consumed_jobs  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the user(s) for  
whom the changed print quotas are to apply, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant users are selected.  
The variable new_consumed_jobs represents the new counter value for the  
consumed jobs of the relevant user. Now the user can print again until the  
maximum number of allowed print jobs is reached. Once the user has  
consumed this number of print jobs, any further jobs will be rejected.  
Examples  
To reset the number of consumed pages for users jonesand brownto 0:  
xpchange -usr jones brown -cp 0  
–
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
         
Administering users  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.6.7 Displaying information on users  
Xprint V7.0 offers the option of displaying information on the defined users. You  
can display the user privileges as well as the current state of the assigned print  
quotas.  
Displaying privileges and print quotas  
●
To display privileges and print quotas of users in the spooler system, enter:  
xpshow -usr [selection][-di display]  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the users  
whose privileges or print quota you want to view, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant users are selected.  
The type of information displayed can be selected with the -didisplay  
option. Possible values for display include LONGand SHORT(default):  
SHORT display  
Name  
----  
Jobs Pages  
---- -----  
Copies Prio. Accounting  
------ ----- ----------  
smith  
jones  
brown 100  
75  
75  
500  
500  
2000  
25  
25  
50  
80  
90  
100  
SET  
SET  
SET  
LONG display:  
NAME: jones  
Hosts: sni11.24  
Allowed jobs: 100  
Allowed pages: 2000  
Maximum priority: 100  
Allowed copies: 50  
Security level: CONFIDENTIAL  
Privileges: NONE  
Comment:  
Update accounting: yes  
Status display of the current print quotas  
●
You can display the current state of the print quota for each user in the  
system. To do this use the following command:  
xpstat -usr [selection] [-di display]  
140  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering users  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the users  
whose print quota state you want to view, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant users are selected.  
The type of information displayed can be selected with the -didisplay  
option. Possible values for display include LONGand SHORT(default).  
Example  
To display the current print quotas for smith:  
xpstat -usr smith -di LONG  
NAME: smith  
Allowed pages: 1500  
Allowed jobs: 70  
Consumed pages: 112  
Consumed jobs:  
8
6.6.8 Assigning a security level to a user  
By assigning a specific security level to a user (can only be done by the Xprint  
V7.0 administrator), you allow the user to use all the printers with this security  
level or lower.  
To change a user’s security level, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Modify the security level:  
xpmod -usr [selection] -sl security_level  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the users in the Xprint  
V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify the name(s) of the user(s)  
whose security level you want to modify or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant users are selected.  
For security_level specify one of the following (in ascending order):  
UNCLASSIFIED (= default), SENSITIVE, CONFIDENTIAL, SECRET, TOP_SECRET  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
   
Administering users  
Examples  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
–
To add a new user called brown and assign him the security level TOP_SECRET  
at the same time:  
xpadd -usr brown -sl TOP_SECRET  
To check the security level of smith:  
xpshow -usr smith -di LONG  
A message similar to the following is displayed:  
–
NAME: smith  
Host:  
Allowed jobs: NO_LIMIT  
Allowed pages: NO_LIMIT  
Maximum priority: UNDEFINED  
Allowed copies: NO_LIMIT  
Security level: TOP_SECRET Update accounting: RESET  
Privileges: NONE  
Comment:  
142  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering permission lists  
6.7  
Administering permission lists  
Xprint V7.0 offers various means of ensuring the security of the data to be  
printed. These include creating permission lists for printers, printer groups and  
forms, which restrict or deny use of the relevant object to the specified names.  
Permission lists also allow other users restricted administration of supervisors  
for a specific server.  
This section describes the possible measures involved in configuring  
permission lists. The following table serves as a guide to this section:  
If you want to...  
Read...  
create a permission list  
section “Creating a permission list” on  
page 144  
modify a permission list  
delete a permission list  
section “Modifying a permission list”  
on page 146  
section “Deleting a permission list” on  
page 147  
grant or deny specific users access to section “Granting or denying specific  
a printer users access to a printer” on page 148  
grant or deny specific users access to section “Granting or denying specific  
a printer group  
users access to a printer group” on  
page 149  
grant or deny specific users access to section “Granting or denying specific  
a form users access to a form” on page 149  
grant or deny specific printers access section “Granting or denying specific  
to a form  
printers access to a form” on  
page 150  
allow or reject specific administrators section “Allowing or prohibiting admin-  
as supervisor administrators  
istration of supervisors” on page 151  
Table 15: Administering permission lists  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Administering permission lists  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.7.1 Creating a permission list  
If you want to create a new permission list you have two options: you can either  
create a new permission list from scratch or you can copy an existing one and  
modify it.  
Creating a new permission list  
To create a new permission list, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Create a new permission list with the following command:  
xpadd -prm list_name list [-pt FORM][-ca "comment"]  
where list_name is the unique name of the permission list and list is the list  
of users or forms to be included in the permission list.  
list can have the following format:  
-al user_list if it is to be an allowed list,  
-dn user_list if it is to be a denied list.  
user_list is a list of Xprint V7.0 users or forms which are to be included in the  
permission list. For forms, this list need only contain the names of the forms,  
while for Xprint V7.0 users it may contain the following elements:  
user The user user on the host containing the object to which this  
permission list is to be assigned.  
*
All users on the host containing the object to which the permission list  
is to be assigned.  
user@host_name  
The user user on host host_name.  
user@*  
The user user on each host.  
*@host_name  
All users on host host_name.  
*@*  
All users on all hosts.  
You can also specify several elements. These must then be separated by a  
blank or tab.  
144  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering permission lists  
If you want to create a list of forms, you must additionally specify the option  
-pt FORM(pt = permission type).  
comment is an optional comment describing the permission list. Comments  
can make using these permission lists later much easier. If a comment  
contains blanks it must be enclosed in double quotes.  
Copying a permission list  
To use an existing permission list as the basis for a similar new list, copy the  
existing list and modify the entries at the same time or immediately afterwards.  
Use the following procedure:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
If necessary, check the existing permission lists:  
xpshow -prm [-di LONG]  
A list of all the available permission lists is displayed, and, if the -di LONG  
option is used, also a list of the users contained in the list and whether it is  
an allowed or a denied list.  
●
Copy your chosen permission list with a new name:  
xpcopy -prm old_list new_list [modifications]  
With this command you copy an existing list old_list to a new list new_list. If  
you wish, you can also modify the copy at the same time by specifying  
modifications. Which modifications are possible is described in the following  
section.  
Examples  
–
To set up an allowed list right1with the names of all users on host  
delaware,enter the following command:  
xpadd -prm right1 -al *@delaware -ca “+: all users on delaware“  
–
To set up a denied list right3with the names of the users smith, jones and  
brown on the host of the relevant object and the user grant on host nashua,  
enter the following command:  
xpadd -prm right3 -dn smith jones brown grant@nashua  
–
To set up an allowed list right2with all users on host delaware and the user  
joneson host colorado, copy the list right1and add jones:  
xpcopy -prm right1 right2 -al+ jones@colorado  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
Administering permission lists  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.7.2 Modifying a permission list  
You can modify a permission list by adding new entries to it or removing entries  
from it.  
Adding entries to the list  
To add new entries to a permission list, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Add an entry to the list with the following command:  
xpmod -prm list_name additions  
where list_name is the name of the permission list to be modified. For  
additions specify:  
-al+ user_list if it is an allowed list,  
-dn+ user_list if it is a denied list  
where user_list represents the list of the Xprint V7.0 users or forms to be  
added to the permission list. This list can be structured as described in the  
previous section.  
Removing entries from the list  
To remove entries from a permission list, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Modify the desired list with the following command:  
xpmod -prm list_name deletions  
where list_name is the name of the permission list to be modified. For  
deletions specify:  
-al- user_list if it is an allowed list,  
-dn- user_list if it is a denied list  
where user_list represents the list of the Xprint V7.0 users or forms to be  
removed from the permission list. This list can be structured as described in  
the previous section. The elements in this list must be contained in the  
selected permission list.  
146  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering permission lists  
Example  
–
To add the user grant on host nashua to the list right1:  
xpmod -prm right1 -al+ grant@nashua  
To add the form A5LANDto the permission list list1:  
xpmod -rm list1 -al+ A5LAND  
–
6.7.3 Deleting a permission list  
If a permission list is no longer required, you can delete it from the Xprint V7.0  
system.  
To do this, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Check first whether the permission list you wish to delete is referenced by  
other Xprint V7.0 objects.  
xpshow -usr [selection]permission_list -diR  
With permission_list, you specify exactly one permission list to be deleted. If  
you want to delete several permission lists, you must repeat this command  
for each of these lists.  
If you do not specify a selection, the command refers to all permission lists in  
the system; otherwise you can either specify a list of the permission lists to  
be removed, or you can define a list of selection criteria with the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) according to which the permission lists to be  
removed are selected.  
●
●
If references to the permission list are displayed, you must remove these by  
modifying the displayed objects accordingly.  
Remove the list from the Xprint V7.0 system with the following command:  
xpdel -prm [selection]  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the permission lists in  
the local Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the  
permission lists you want to delete, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant permission lists are selected.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
 
Administering permission lists  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.7.4 Granting or denying specific users access to a  
printer  
If you want to grant only specific users access to a printer, you can assign a  
permission list to the printer. To do this, proceed as follows:  
●
Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those users who are to be  
granted access to the printer, or select a denied list containing all those  
users who are to be denied access to the printer, respectively. A list of all  
permission lists can be displayed with the following command:  
xpshow -prm  
If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7.0 system, you can create  
one yourself (see section “Creating a permission list” on page 144).  
●
Deactivate the desired printer(s):  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printers in the local  
Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printers you  
want to assign a permission list to, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant printers are selected.  
●
●
Assign the selected permission list to the desired printer(s):  
xpmod -dev [selection] -up list_name  
list_name is the name of the selected permission list.  
Reactivate the printer(s):  
xpchange -dev [selection]  
148  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering permission lists  
6.7.5 Granting or denying specific users access to a  
printer group  
If you want to grant only specific users access to a printer group, you can assign  
a permission list to the printer group. To do this, proceed as follows:  
●
Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those users who are to be  
granted access to the printer group, or select a denied list containing all  
those users who are to be denied access to the printer group. A list of all  
permission lists can be displayed with the following command:  
xpshow -prm  
If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7.0 system, you can create  
one yourself (see section “Creating a permission list” on page 144).  
●
Assign the selected permission list to the desired printer group:  
xpmod -dgr [selection] -up list_name  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the printer groups in the  
local Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the printer  
groups to which you want to assign a permission list, or you can use the  
-scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant printer groups are selected.  
list_name is the name of the selected permission list.  
6.7.6 Granting or denying specific users access to a  
form  
If you want to grant only specific users access to a form, you can assign a  
permission list to the form. To do this, proceed as follows:  
●
Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those users who are to be  
granted access to the form, or select a denied list containing all those users  
who are to be denied access to the form. A list of all permission lists can be  
displayed with the following command:  
xpshow -prm  
If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7.0 system, you can create  
one yourself (see section “Creating a permission list” on page 144).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
       
Administering permission lists  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
●
Assign the selected permission list to the desired form:  
xpmod -frm [selection] -up list_name  
where selection is the name of one or more forms. If it is not specified, all  
forms are modified. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the forms to  
which you want to assign a permission list, or you can define a selection  
criteria list according to which the relevant forms are selected.  
list_name is the name of the selected permission list.  
6.7.7 Granting or denying specific printers access to a  
form  
If you want to grant only specific printers access to a form, you can assign a  
permission list to the form. To do this, proceed as follows:  
●
Select a suitable allowed list containing exactly those printers which are to  
be granted access to the form, or select a denied list containing all those  
printers which are to be denied access to the form. A list of all permission  
lists can be displayed with the following command:  
xpshow -prm  
If there is no suitable list defined in the Xprint V7.0 system, you can create  
one yourself (see section “Creating a permission list” on page 144).  
●
Assign the selected permission list to the desired form:  
xpmod -frm [selection] -up list_name  
where selection is the name of one or more forms. If it is not specified, all  
forms are modified. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the forms to  
which you want to assign a permission list, or you can define a selection  
criteria list according to which the relevant forms are selected.  
list_name is the name of the selected permission list.  
150  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering permission lists  
6.7.8 Allowing or prohibiting administration of  
supervisors  
In your capacity as the Xprint V7.0 administrator, Xprint V7.0 permits you to  
specify which local administrators (root or subroot) are allowed to attach super-  
visors to a server that is running on a different host. For example, you can allow  
root of host B to attach a supervisor of B to a server running on host A. This can  
be achieved by assigning a permission list to the relevant server. Here is how to  
do this:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Deactivate the server for which you want to change the associated super-  
visors:  
xpchange -srv [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
where selection is the name of the server for which you want to grant or deny  
permissions. This can be omitted if you want to deactivate all defined  
servers, or you can define a selection criteria list according to which the  
relevant servers are selected.  
●
Assign to the server a permission list defining which other administrators are  
to be allowed to add, modify or delete supervisors for this server:  
xpmod -srv [selection] -up permission_list  
permission_list is the allowed or denied list to be assigned. This permission  
list must already exist when you issue this command; if necessary create a  
new one first (see section “Creating a permission list” on page 144).  
●
Reactivate the modified server:  
xpchange -srv [selection]  
The local privileges of root and subroot always take precedence over the  
permission list attached to the server. This means that you can only  
protect a server from administrators from other hosts, not from the  
administrators on the same host.  
i
Example  
To allow jim, subroot of host B, to define supervisors and attach them to any  
server in the domain:  
xpadd -prm supervisor_administrator -al jim  
xpchange -srv -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -srv -up supervisor_administrator  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
 
Administering fonts  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
xpchange -srv  
6.8  
Administering fonts  
This section describes how to administer fonts in the Xprint V7.0 system. The  
following table serves as a guide to this section:  
If you want to...  
add a font  
Read...  
section “Adding a font” on page 152  
section “Deleting a font” on page 154  
delete a font  
modify the attributes of a font  
section “Modifying the attributes of a  
font” on page 155  
Table 16: Administering fonts  
6.8.1 Adding a font  
The possible attributes of a new font depend on the PCL of the target  
printer. The supported attributes can be displayed with the command  
xpshow -pclpcl_name -diLONG(see section “Displaying information on  
Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 82).  
i
There are two possible ways of defining a new font and adding it to the system:  
you can either define a new font from scratch or you can copy an existing font  
and modify the relevant attributes in this copy.  
Defining a completely new font  
●
Check whether the PCL of the printer on which the jobs are to be printed with  
the new font supports the desired attributes:  
xpshow -pcl pcl_name -di LONG  
●
Add a new font to the system with the following command:  
xpadd -fnt font_name attributes  
where font_name is the name of the object in which you save the desired font  
attributes.  
152  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering fonts  
The variable attributes represents a list of various options via which you can  
define the attributes of the new font:  
-tptypeface, -csstyle, -hmhorizontal_motion, -vmvertical_motion,  
-pqprint_quality, -lalanguage, -cacomment_for_administrator,  
-ahadministration_host, -tmtypeface_mandatory, -cucomment_for_user.  
The possible values for options -tp, -cs, -hm, -vm, -pq, -ladepend on the  
PCL of the target printer. The supported values can be displayed with the  
xpshow -pclpcl_name -di LONGcommand (see section “Displaying infor-  
mation on Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 82).  
For more detailed information, refer to the description of the xpadd -  
fntcommand in the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
i
Defining a font by copying an existing font  
An easy way of defining a new font is to copy an existing font with the same or  
similar attributes. If you wish, you can modify the font attributes at the same  
time.  
To create a new font from an existing font by modifying the attributes, proceed  
as follows:  
●
First check whether the PCL of the target printer supports the desired  
attributes:  
xpshow -pcl pcl_name -di LONG  
●
Then copy the existing font to the new font and make the desired modifica-  
tions:  
xpcopy -fnt old_font_name new_font_name modifications  
For modifications specify what modifications you wish to make to the font.  
Each entry in this attribute list consists of an option of the xpadd -fnt  
command and a corresponding value.  
Examples  
–
To define the font generic2which is to have the typeface SansSerif, the  
character pitch 12 cpi and the character set INTERNATIONAL:  
xpadd -fnt generic2 -tp SansSerif -hm 12 -la INTERNATIONAL  
–
To define the typeface my_font on the basis of the GENERICfont, setting the  
character pitch to 10 cpi and the print quality to HIGH:  
xpcopy -fnt GENERIC my_font -hm 10 -pq HIGH  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
   
Administering fonts  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.8.2 Deleting a font  
To delete a font from the system, proceed as follows:  
●
You can only delete a font if it is not connected to other objects, e.g. assigned  
to a form as the default font. To display any references, use the following  
command:  
xpshow -fnt font -diR  
For font you specify exactly one font name you want to delete. If you want to  
delete several fonts, you must repeat this command for each of these fonts.  
●
●
If references to the font are displayed, you must remove these by modifying  
the displayed objects accordingly.  
Delete the font(s) with the following command:  
xpdel -fnt [selection]  
For selection you can either specify a list of font names, or you can use the -  
scl“selection_criteria_list“ option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
fonts to be deleted are selected. If selection is not specified, all fonts (except  
GENERIC) are deleted.  
Note: The default font GENERICsupplied with the Xprint V7.0 package cannot be  
deleted, even by the Xprint V7.0 administrator. Neither can those fonts  
be deleted that are still referenced by other objects, e.g. if the font  
my_fontis used in the form my_form.  
Examples  
–
To delete the fonts font1, font2and font3from the system:  
xpdel -fnt font1 font2 font3  
–
To delete all fonts with the attributes character style ITALICSand print quality  
DRAFT:  
xpdel -fnt -scl "-cs ITALICS -pq DRAFT"  
154  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering fonts  
6.8.3 Modifying the attributes of a font  
You can modify the attributes of any defined font you administer.  
The default font GENERICsupplied with Xprint V7.0 cannot be modified,  
even by the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
i
●
●
To be on the safe side, first display the attributes of the font you want to  
modify. To do this, use the xpshow -fntcommand (see section “Displaying  
information on Xprint V7.0 objects” on page 82).  
To modify the attributes of specific fonts, enter the following command:  
xpmod -fnt [selection]modifications  
For selection you can either specify a list of fonts whose attributes you want  
to modify, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list  
of criteria according to which the relevant fonts are selected. If you do not  
specify selection, all fonts are modified.  
modifications represents a list of modifications to be made to the font(s). Each  
entry in this list consists of one of the options of the xpadd -fntcommand  
listed in the section “Adding a font” on page 152, plus a corresponding value.  
Examples  
–
To modify the attributes of the font invoicefrom SansSerifto Courierand  
the line spacing from 4to 5:  
xpmod -fnt invoice -tp Courier -vm 5  
To modify the character pitch of all fonts with the setting “10 cpi” to 12 cpi:  
xpmod -fnt -scl "-hm 10" -hm 12  
–
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
       
Administering forms  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.9  
Administering forms  
To make it easier for users to work with forms or constantly recurring document  
formats, forms can be defined under Xprint V7.0. Such a form is an object with  
a name which is stored in the Xprint V7.0 database. In this object, different  
parameters (paper size, margins, default font, etc.) are stored and these can  
then be assigned to a print job via the object name whenever required. Xprint  
V7.0 then applies the formatting parameters automatically to the print job.  
Furthermore, it is possible to define a default form for every printer which is  
automatically used for all the print jobs sent to this printer.  
Xprint V7.0 is supplied with a default form called GENERIC. This is assigned the  
default font GENERICthat is also supplied with Xprint V7.0 (see section “Admin-  
istering fonts” on page 152) as well as the default settings for all the options of  
the  
xpadd -frmcommand.  
If you want to...  
Read...  
define a new form  
delete a form  
section “Adding a form” on page 157  
section “Deleting a form” on page 158  
modify the attributes of a form  
section “Modifying the attributes of a  
form” on page 160  
assign a form to a printer  
section “Default forms for printers” on  
page 160  
grant or deny specific users access to section “Granting or denying specific  
a form users access to a form” on page 149  
grant or deny specific printers access section “Granting or denying specific  
to a form  
printers access to a form” on  
page 150  
Table 17: Administering forms  
156  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering forms  
6.9.1 Adding a form  
Under Xprint V7.0 you can define any number of forms. There are two possible  
ways of defining forms: you can either define a new form from scratch or you  
can copy an existing form and modify it.  
Defining a new form from scratch  
●
If you want to define a default font for the form, check first whether this font  
is available in the system. To do this, display all the defined fonts using the  
following command:  
xpshow -fnt  
Or search for the desired font font_name with the command  
xpshow -fnt font_name  
●
●
Check whether the PCL of your target printer supports the desired attributes  
of the new form:  
xpshow -pcl pcl_name -di LONG  
Now define the new form using the following command:  
xpadd -frm form_name attributes  
For form_name specify the name of the form.  
attributes represents a list of attributes the form is to have. Every entry in this  
list consists of an option as well as a corresponding value. The following  
options are available:  
-ahadministration_host, -cacomment_for_administrator,  
-cucomment_for_user, -ftdefault_font, -jejob_end_sheet,  
-jsjob_start_sheet, -ll line_length, -lmleft_margin, -lslayup,  
-mf(mounted font), -mmmount_method, -ntnotification_delivery_threshold,  
-phpage_height, -plpage_length, -pwpage_width, -sdside_specification,  
-spjob_separator_sheet, -tmtop_margin, -upuser_permission,  
For more information on these options, refer to the description of the  
xpadd -frmcommand in the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
Defining a form on the basis of an existing form  
A simple way of defining a new form is to copy an existing one to a form name.  
If necessary, you can also modify the new form at the same time.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
157  
             
Administering forms  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
●
To copy a form, use the following command:  
xpcopy -frm old_form_name new_form_name [modifications]  
old_form_name is the name of the existing form that is to be copied,  
new_form_name is the name of the new form file.  
modifications represents a list of modified attributes which are to be different  
for the new form. Each entry in this list consists of an option of the xpadd  
-frmcommand plus a corresponding value.  
Examples  
–
To define a formletter1with the values: form layup portrait, page height 297  
mm, page width 210 mm, top margin 2 cm, page length 24 cm, left margin  
2.5 cm, and default font font4:  
xpadd -frm letter1 -ls PORTRAIT -ph 297m -pw 210m -tm 2c \  
-pl 24c -lm 2.5c -ft font4  
–
–
To copy the form invoice3to the new form form1without modifications:  
xpcopy -frm invoice3 form1  
To copy the form invoice3to the form form1,changing the default font to  
Times, the left margin to 20 mm and the line length to 17 cm.  
xpcopy -frm invoice3 form1 -ft Times -lm 20m -ll 17c  
6.9.2 Deleting a form  
You can delete from the Xprint V7.0 system any form you administer.  
A form which is referenced by another object (e.g. the default form of an  
existing printer) cannot be deleted. Neither is it possible to delete the  
default form GENERICsupplied with Xprint V7.0.  
i
To delete a form, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
You can only delete a form if there are no references to other objects (e.g.  
default form of a printer). Check this with the xpshowcommand:  
xpshow -frm [selection]form -diR  
For form you specify the name of exactly one form you want to delete. If you  
want to delete several forms, you must repeat this command for each one.  
158  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering forms  
For selection you can either specify a list of form names, or you can define a  
list of selection criteria with the -scl “selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) according to  
which the forms to be deleted are selected.  
●
●
If references to the form are displayed, you must remove these by modifying  
the displayed objects accordingly.  
Delete the form with the following command:  
xpdel -frm selection  
For selection you can either specify a list of form names, or you can use the  
-scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
forms to be deleted are selected.  
Examples  
–
To delete the forms invoice1and manual:  
xpdel -frm invoice1 manual  
–
To delete all forms with the font font1and the paper format A4 (page width  
210 mm, page height 297 mm):  
xpdel -frm -scl "-ft font1 -pw 210m -ph 297m"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
159  
 
Administering forms  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.9.3 Modifying the attributes of a form  
You can modify the attributes of any form which you administer or which you are  
allowed to use:  
The attributes of the default form GENERICof Xprint V7.0 cannot be  
modified, even by the system administrator.  
i
●
To modify the attributes of a form, use the following command:  
xpmod -frm [selection] modifications  
For selection you can either specify a list of forms whose attributes you want  
to modify, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list  
of criteria according to which the relevant forms are selected. If selection is  
not specified, all forms are modified accordingly.  
modifications represents a list of changes to be made to the selected form(s).  
Each entry in this modifications list consists of one of the options of the  
xpadd -frmcommand listed in section “Adding a form” on page 157 and a  
corresponding value.  
Examples  
–
To modify the attributes of the form form1 such that the form layup is set to  
landscape format and the default font to font1.  
xpmod -frm form1 -ls LANDSCAPE -ft font1  
–
To modify the paper format of all forms with the setting A4  
(297 mm x 210 mm) to Legal (14 inch x 8.5 inch):  
xpmod -frm -scl "-ph 297m -pw 210" -ph 14i -pw 8.5i  
6.9.4 Default forms for printers  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to assign a default form to every printer. This default form  
is then used automatically unless a different form is specified at spoolin. If you  
do not specify a default form when setting up a printer, Xprint V7.0 automatically  
uses the default form GENERICon this device.  
To assign a default form to a printer or to change a default form that has already  
been assigned, proceed as follows:  
160  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering forms  
●
●
If you do not know the printer identifier of the relevant printer, display a list of  
all the printers with the xpshow -devcommand.  
First check the settings of the relevant printer:  
xpshow -dev printer -di LONG  
A list of all the settings for the specified printer printer is displayed.  
Before you can make the changes, the printer must be deactivated:  
xpchange -dev printer -st NOT_ACTIVE  
●
●
Now assign a form to the printer:  
xpmod -dev printer -fm form_name  
printer represents the ID of the printer to which the default form is to be  
assigned. form_name is the name of the assigned form.  
Note: Xprint V7.0 automatically checks whether the printer’s PCL supports the  
attributes of the assigned form and the assigned font. If this is not the  
case, the xpmod command is not executed.  
A MANUALform cannot be defined as the default form for a printer.  
●
Reactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev printer  
Examples  
–
To add printer printer2 (address /dev/lp1) and at the same time assign to  
it the default form invoice1:  
xpadd -dev printer2 -da dev/lp1 -fm invoice1  
To assign to the printer printer1 the form form1 as its default form:  
–
xpchange -dev printer1 -st NOT-ACTIVE  
xpmod -dev printer1 -fm form1  
xpchange -dev printer1  
–
To cancel the assignment of the form sni_invoice1to the printer printer2  
and assign to it the Xprint V7.0 default form GENERIC:  
xpchange -dev printer2 -st NOT-ACTIVE  
xpmod -dev printer2 -fm GENERIC or xpmod -dev printer2 -fm-  
xpchange -dev printer2  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
161  
     
Administering filters  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.10 Administering filters  
This section describes how to add filters to the Xprint V7.0 system, or how to  
modify or delete exiting filters. The following table serves as a guide to this  
section:  
If you want to...  
add a new filter  
delete a filter  
Read...  
section “Adding filters” on page 162  
section “Deleting filters” on page 167  
modify filter attributes  
section “Modifying the attributes of a  
filter” on page 168  
assign a filter to a printer  
remove a filter from a printer  
Table 18: Administering filters  
section “Assigning a filter to a printer”  
on page 169  
section “Removing a filter from a  
printer” on page 170  
6.10.1 Adding filters  
With the xpadd -fltcommand you can add a new filter to your system. A filter  
can be added with specific attributes, e.g. input and output data formats and  
special modes. The filters suitable for a job are selected according to these  
attributes.  
There are two possible ways of adding a new slow or fast filter: you can either  
create a filter from scratch by setting all the required options yourself or you can  
copy a similar filter and modify the relevant options.  
As already mentioned, you can choose between slow and fast filters. By  
default the system uses slow filters (-tpSLOW). To use fast filters, you  
must always specify the -tp FAST option.  
i
Creating a new slow filter  
●
To add a new slow filter for use in the Xprint V7.0 system, enter the following  
command:  
xpadd -flt filter_name -cm command -it input_content_type \  
-ot output_content_type -op [options]  
162  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering filters  
For filter_name specify the name of the new filter. You must use a name  
which does not yet exist in the system, otherwise the command will be  
rejected.  
For command you must specify the path name of the executable file of the  
filter program. The path name must be the same on all host computers on  
which the filter is stored. If the absolute path name is not specified, the  
executable filter file is searched for in the  
directory/var/spool/Xprint/config/filters). If -cm (for command) is not  
specified, the filter program name must be identical to the filter name.  
For input_content_type specify the formats the slow filter accepts as input.  
The names must not exceed 63 characters in length. This might be, for  
example, an existing PCL, or a completely new input data format. If this  
option is not specified, the system assumes that the filter accepts any input  
data format.  
With the option output_content_type you define the output data format  
generated by the slow filter. Here too the name must not exceed 63  
characters in length. If you do not specify this option, the system assumes  
that the output type is the same as the input type, i.e. the filter does not  
convert data but only implements special modes.  
With options you can specify that defined names, attributes or variables are  
passed on to the filter program for processing. The Xprint V7.0 options are  
mapped by strings in the following format:  
keyword pattern =replacement  
There is only one blank between the context-sensitive keyword and the  
pattern. The equals sign (=) is not enclosed in blanks. An equals sign within  
the pattern must be escaped (by a preceding backslash \).  
keyword  
specifies what must be considered when the option is generated.  
The permitted keywords are listed in the table in the “Xprint V7.0  
- Reference Manual”. Each keyword represents context-sensitive  
attributes which must match the pattern when the option is  
generated.  
pattern  
defines when the option is to be generated. It may be a value, an  
asterisk (*) or a regular expression. If pattern matches the actual  
values extracted with the keyword, the option is generated.  
Otherwise no option is passed on to the filter.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
163  
     
Administering filters  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
replacement  
describes how the option is to be passed on to the filter. It can be  
extracted from the actual values which may be hidden behind  
keyword with the help of regular expressions (&and the combina-  
tions \(, \)and \n). replacement may also contain an asterisk (*)  
which is replaced by the entire pattern (i.e. it is the same as &).  
Examples  
–
A user submits a job with the special mode -sm express. The slow filter  
supporting this mode is activated with the -xoption. The description for this  
option reads as follows:  
MODES express=-x  
–
–
A filter is activated by the option -fform_name. This option is described as  
follows:  
FORM *=-f *  
A filter is activated, the line spacing (vertical motion) being specified in  
inches as with the -lpiioption:  
V_MOTION \(.*\)i=-lpii \1  
–
–
–
or in centimeters as with the -lpicoption:  
V_MOTION \(.*\)c=-lpic \1  
Another possibility is as follows:  
V_MOTION \(.*\)\([ci]\)=-lpi\2 \1  
A filter is required which supports the enlargement of the printed text by a  
variable factor. In this case, the filter should be called with the option -mX  
where X specifies an enlargement factor between 1 and 9. The filter can be  
defined with the following option:  
MODES bigger\=\([1-9]\)=-m\l  
The same can be achieved by using the corresponding option of the xpadd  
-job command; you can set the enlargement factor 3, for example, with  
-sm"bigger=3" .  
164  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering filters  
Creating a new fast filter  
●
Enter the following command to add a new fast filter for use in Xprint V7.0:  
xpadd -flt filter_name -tp FAST-cm command [options]  
For filter_name specify the name of the new filter. You must use a name  
which does not yet exist in the system, otherwise the command will be  
rejected.  
With -tpspecify FAST.  
For command you must specify the path name of the executable file of the  
filter program. The path name must be the same on all host computers on  
which the filter is stored. If the absolute path name is not specified, the  
executable filter file is searched for in the  
directory/var/spool/Xprint/config/filters). If -cm (for command) is not  
specified, the filter program name must be identical to the filter name.  
With options you can specify that defined names, attributes or variables are  
passed on to the filter program for processing. The Xprint V7.0 options are  
mapped by strings in the following format:  
keyword pattern =replacement  
There is only one blank between the context-sensitive keyword and the  
pattern. The equals sign (=) is not enclosed in blanks. An equals sign within  
the pattern must be escaped (by a preceding backslash \).  
keyword  
specifies what must be considered when the option is generated.  
The permitted keywords are listed in the corresponding table in  
the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”. Each keyword represents  
context-sensitive attributes which must match the pattern when the  
option is generated.  
pattern  
defines when the option is to be generated. It may be a value, an  
asterisk (*) or a regular expression. If pattern matches the actual  
values extracted with the keyword, the option is generated.  
Otherwise no option is passed on to the filter.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
165  
 
Administering filters  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
replacement  
describes how the option is to be passed on to the filter. It can be  
extracted from the actual values which may be hidden behind  
keyword with the help of regular expressions (&and the combina-  
tions \(, \)and \n). replacement may also contain an asterisk (*)  
which is replaced by the entire pattern (i.e. it is the same as &).  
Copying and modifying an existing filter  
With the xpcopy -fltcommand you can add a filter which has similar  
attributes to those of a filter already defined in the Xprint V7.0 system. For this  
purpose simply copy the attributes of an existing filter to a new filter and modify  
the attributes you want to change.  
The new filter is set up on the computer on which the xpcopy -fltcommand  
is used. This can be avoided by specifying a different host with the -ahoption.  
●
Display the defined filters to check whether the filter to be copied actually  
exists in the system:  
xpshow -flt filter_name  
For filter_name specify the name of the filter to be copied.  
Copy the filter:  
●
xpcopy -flt name_old_filter name_new_filter [modifications]  
For name_old_filter specify the name of the filter you want to copy.  
For name_new_filter specify the name of the new filter. Here you must use a  
name that does not yet exist in the system; otherwise the command is  
rejected.  
For modifications specify the values you want to modify or add. The options  
correspond to the options that can be used when adding a filter to the Xprint  
V7.0 system. There is, however, the following restriction: The option  
-tpfilter_type cannot be modified with the xpcopy -fltcommand.  
Example  
To create a new filter called fastmail by copying the filter slowmail. You also  
want the new filter fastmail not to be available on your local host coloradobut  
on the remote host nile:  
xpcopy -flt slowmail fastmail -ho nile  
166  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering filters  
6.10.2 Deleting filters  
With the xpdel -fltcommand you can delete from the Xprint V7.0 system any  
filter that you administer.  
A filter referenced by another object (e.g. a fast filter assigned to an  
existing printer) cannot be deleted.  
i
●
Check whether the filter to be deleted is still referenced by other objects:  
xpshow -flt [selection]filter_name -diR  
For filter_name you specify the name of exactly one filter you want to delete.  
If you want to want to delete several filters, you must repeat this command  
for each one.  
For selection you can either specify a list of form names, or you can define a  
list of selection criteria with the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) according to  
which the forms to be deleted are selected.  
●
●
If references to the filter are displayed, you must remove these by modifying  
the displayed objects accordingly.  
Enter the following command:  
xpdel -flt selection  
For selection you can either specify a list of the filters to be deleted, or you  
can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection  
criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according  
to which the filters to be deleted are selected.  
Examples  
–
To delete the filter LandA2from the system:  
xpdel -flt LandA2  
–
To delete all filters with the input data format POSTSCRIPT.  
xpdel -flt -scl "-it POSTSCRIPT"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
167  
     
Administering filters  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.10.3 Modifying the attributes of a filter  
With the xpmod -fltcommand you can modify the attributes of any filter you  
administer. This may be useful if the filter is to be administered from another  
host or if you want the filter to be accessible on more hosts than were defined  
before.  
●
Enter the following command:  
xpmod -flt [selection]modifications  
For selection you can either specify a list of filters you want to modify, or you  
can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection  
criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according  
to which the relevant filters are selected. If you do not specify selection, all  
filters are modified.  
For modifications specify the values you want to modify or add. The options  
correspond to the options that can be used when adding a filter to the Xprint  
V7.0 system. There is, however, the following restriction: The option -tp  
filter_type cannot be modified with the xpmod -fltcommand.  
Examples  
–
To make the filter LandA2available also on the hosts colorado and nile:  
xpmod -flt LandA2 -ho+ colorado nile  
–
You want to modify all filters supporting POSTSCRIPTso that they are admin-  
istered by the new host colorado:  
xpmod -flt -scl "-pc POSTSCRIPT" -ah nile  
168  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering filters  
6.10.4 Assigning a filter to a printer  
If you frequently use with a printer a specific form which uses a particular format,  
it might be useful to assign the printer a special filter for this.  
Only fast filters can be assigned to printers.  
i
Proceed as follows:  
●
Check the printer status:  
xpstat -dev [selection]  
For selection either specify a list of the printers whose status you want to  
display, or use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section  
“Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria  
according to which the relevant printers are selected. If you do not specify  
selection, information on all printers will be displayed.  
●
●
If necessary, deactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
Assign the relevant filter to the printer:  
xpmod -dev [selection] -fl filter_name  
For filter_name specify the name of the relevant filter.  
Reactivate the printer:  
●
xpchange -dev [selection]  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
           
Administering filters  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.10.5 Removing a filter from a printer  
To remove a filter from a printer, proceed as follows:  
●
Check whether the relevant printer is activated:  
xpstat -dev [selection]  
For selection you can either specify a list of the printers you want to display,  
or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see the section  
“Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria  
according to which the relevant printers are selected. If you do not specify  
selection, information on all printers will be displayed.  
●
●
●
Deactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
Cancel the assignment of the filter to the printer:  
xpmod -dev [selection] -fl-  
Reactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev [selection]  
170  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering public loadable resources  
6.11 Administering public loadable resources  
Loadable resources are objects containing information about fonts,  
backgrounds, overlays etc. They can be downloaded to a printer separately  
from the document(s) that use them. This can speed up the printing process and  
improve job recovery. For full details, see Chapter 4 in the "Reference Manual".  
Public loadable resources, which are available throughout the entire system,  
can only be defined by the Xprint V7.0 administrator or a local Xprint V7.0  
administrator. It is possible, however, for all users to define private loadable  
resources on their local hosts.  
If you want to...  
Read...  
create resources  
the section "Creating a Loadable  
Resource" in Chapter 4 of the  
"Reference Manual".  
define a loadable resource  
the section “Defining a loadable  
resource” on page 171  
delete a loadable resource  
the section “Deleting a loadable  
resource” on page 173  
Table 19: Administering loadable resources  
6.11.1 Defining a loadable resource  
There are two possible ways of defining a loadable resource: you can define a  
new one ’from scratch’ or copy an existing loadable resource and modify it.  
Defining a loadable resource ’from scratch’  
●
To define a new loadable resource, use the following command:  
xpadd -lrs resource_name options  
where the variable resource_name represents the name of the loadable  
resource and options stands for a list of options that can be used with the  
xpadd -lrscommand.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
171  
         
Administering public loadable resources  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Extending the definition of a loadable resource  
A quick method of defining a loadable resource is to copy an existing resource  
and modify it as required. Proceed as follows:  
●
To find out which loadable resources are already defined in the system and  
the attributes they have, enter the following command:  
xpshow -lrs  
A list of existing loadable resources is displayed, together with their  
attributes.  
●
Now copy a suitable loadable resource and make the required modifications:  
xpcopy -lrs old_lrs new_lrs modifications  
old_lrs represents the name of the existing loadable resource and new_lrs  
stands for the new, possibly modified loadable resource. The variable modifi-  
cations represents a list of modification which distinguish the new loadable  
resource from the old one. Each entry in this list consists of an option of the  
xpadd -lrscommand and a corresponding value.  
●
It is possible to refer to a class name, rather than referring to the actual name  
of a resource. Let’s consider a logo defined for HP Laserjet but also for Reno  
emulation. The file logo.hpcontains the data to be downloaded to an HP  
Laserjet printer before the logo can be called. In a similar way, the file  
logo.renohas to be downloaded to a Reno printer.  
Two resources can be defined for this purpose:  
xpadd -lrs logohp -fi logo.hp -pc HP-LASERJET -tp Overlay  
-cn mylogo  
xpadd -lrs logoreno -fi logo.reno -pc RENO -tp Overlay  
-cn mylogo  
Both resources will belong to the same class as mylogo. Jobs can after-  
wards be submitted as:  
xpadd -dr mydocument -lr mylogo  
Once a printer (either HP Laserjet or Reno) is free for handling the job, the  
printing system will select the appropriate resource. If the job comes out on  
a Reno printer, then the logo-renoresource will be used.  
172  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering public loadable resources  
6.11.2 Deleting a loadable resource  
With the xpdel -lrscommand you can delete any loadable resource that you  
administer.  
To delete a loadable resource, proceed as follow:  
●
Delete the loadable resource with the following command:  
xpdel -lrs [identifier_list] [-scl selection_criteria_list]  
The identifier_list is a list of the loadable resources to be deleted. You can  
also use the option -scland then give a selection_criteria_list that specifies  
certain loadable resources. If you do not specify an identifier_list or a  
selection _criteria _list, then all loadable resources will be deleted.  
Example  
To delete the loadable resources mylogo1, mylogo2and mylogo3:  
xpdel -lrs mylogo1 mylogo2 mylogo3  
6.11.3 Displaying the definition of a loadable resource  
To display the definition of an existing loadable resource, proceed as follows:  
●
Display the definition using the following command:  
xpshow -lrs [identifier_list] [-scl "selection_criteria_list"] -di LONG  
For identifier_list you can give a list of the loadable resource to be displayed,  
or you can use the -scloption to define a list of criteria according to which  
the relevant loadable resources are displayed. If you do not specify which  
resources you want to see, then they will all be displayed.  
Example  
The following command will show you which printers mylogocan be used on:  
xpshow -lrs -scl "-cn mylogo"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
173  
           
Administering global job templates  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.12 Administering global job templates  
A global job template is an object in which frequently used options of the  
xpadd -jobcommand are stored. This saves the user the effort of constantly  
specifying the same options explicitly for frequently recurring print jobs. Instead,  
the user simply assigns the print job a job template featuring the relevant  
options. Xprint V7.0 reads these from the database and executes them.  
Global job templates, which are available throughout the entire system, can only  
be defined by the Xprint V7.0 administrator or a local Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
It is possible, however, for all users to define their own job templates on his local  
hosts.  
Every user can define customized job templates and also replace global job  
templates by private ones.  
If you want to...  
Read...  
define a job template  
section “Defining a job template” on  
page 174  
delete a job template  
section “Deleting a job template” on  
page 177  
customize a job template  
section “Customizing job templates”  
on page 177  
define and use private templates  
section “Job templates” on page 44  
Table 20: Administering global job templates  
6.12.1 Defining a job template  
There are two possible ways of defining a job template: you can either define a  
new one from scratch or you can copy an existing template and modify the  
relevant options.  
Defining a completely new job template  
●
To define a new job template use the following command:  
xpadd -jtp template_name options  
where the variable template_name represents the name of the job template.  
options stands for a list of options that may be used with the xpadd-jtp  
command. These are all the options available with the xpadd-job  
174  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering global job templates  
command with the exception of -tejob_template and -sx(silent execution)  
(see also the description of xpadd -jobin the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference  
Manual” and the section “Printing files” on page 17).  
Defining a job template on the basis of an existing template  
A quick method of defining a job template is to copy an existing template and  
modify it as required. Proceed as follows:  
●
To find out which job templates are already defined in the system and which  
attributes these have, enter the following command:  
xpshow -jtp  
A list of all the existing job templates is displayed with their attributes.  
Now copy a suitable job template and make the required modifications:  
xpcopy -jtp old_template new_template modifications  
●
old_template represents the name of the existing template, while  
new_template stands for the new, possibly modified template. The variable  
modifications represents a list of modifications which distinguish the new  
template from the old one. Each entry in this list consists of an option of the  
xpadd -jtp command and a corresponding value (see also chapter  
“Producing Output with Xprint V7.0”).  
Adding a job template on a remote host  
The Xprint V7.0 administrator (only) can also add a job template on a host other  
than the local host with the -ahhost_name option. To do this, proceed as follows:  
●
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Add a job template on the remote host:  
xpadd -jtp template_name options -ah host_name  
template_name  
represents the name of the job template.  
options  
stands for a list of options that may be used with the xpadd -jtp  
command and which are applied whenever the template is used.  
These are all the options available with the xpadd-jobcommand  
with the exception of -tejob_template (see also chapter “Producing  
Output with Xprint V7.0”).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
175  
         
Administering global job templates  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
host_name  
is the name of the remote host on which the template is added.  
or:  
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
●
Add a job template on the remote host by copying an existing template to this  
host (with or without modifications):  
xpcopy -jtp old_template new_template modifications -ah host_name  
old_template  
represents the name of the existing template  
new_template  
stands for the new, maybe modified template.  
modifications  
represents a list of modifications which distinguish the new template  
from the old one. Each entry in this list consists of an option of the  
xpadd -jtp command and a corresponding value (see also section  
“Printing files” on page 17).  
Examples  
–
–
–
To define the new job template invoice4with the values: destination  
printer3, form invoice1, priority 75:  
xpadd -jtp invoice4 -de printer3 -fm invoice1 -pr 75  
To define a job template letter1based on the template template1, setting  
the destination to printer1and the form to letter2:  
xpcopy -jtp template1 letter1 -de printer1 -fm letter2  
To add the job template genericwith the settings destination printer1and  
data content type SIMPLEon the remote host nile:  
xpadd -jtp generic -de printer1 -ct SIMPLE -ah nile  
176  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering global job templates  
6.12.2 Deleting a job template  
With the xpdel -jtpcommand you can delete any job template you admin-  
ister.  
To delete a template, proceed as follows:  
●
Delete the job template with the following command:  
xpdel -jtp [selection]  
For selection you can either specify a list of the job templates you want to  
delete, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section  
“Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria  
according to which the relevant job templates are selected. If you do not  
specify selection, all templates are deleted.  
Example  
–
To delete the job templates letter1, letter2, and invoice:  
xpdel -jtp letter1 letter2 invoice  
–
To delete all job templates assigned to printer printer4 and having the  
priority 50:  
xpdel -jtp -scl "-de printer4 -pr 50"  
6.12.3 Customizing job templates  
With the xpmod -jtpcommand you can modify the attributes of any job  
template you administer.  
To modify a job template, proceed as follows:  
●
Display the existing job templates to select one which best meets your  
requirements.  
xpshow -jtp [selection] -di LONG  
For selection you can either specify a list of the job templates whose  
attributes you want to display, or you can use the -scl  
“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
relevant job templates are selected. If you do not specify selection, a list of all  
job templates is displayed.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
177  
         
Administering global job templates  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
You must use the -diLONGoption to display all the attributes of a job  
template.  
●
Select a suitable job template:  
xpmod -jtp [selection] modifications  
For modifications you can use all the options that may be used when defining  
a new job template with the xpadd -jtpcommand. For more detailed infor-  
mation refer to the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
Examples:  
To modify the job template letter1 such that in future the printout will be in  
–
Helveticainstead of in Times:  
xpmod -jtp letter1 -tp Helvetica  
178  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering PCLs  
6.13 Administering PCLs  
A printer capability list (PCL) contains all the information Xprint V7.0 requires to  
print a document on a printer. By means of the PCL, Xprint V7.0 converts the  
options of the xpadd -jobcommand into control characters that the printer can  
handle. Furthermore, a PCL also contains technical characteristics of the  
printer, such as its connection protocol.  
Xprint V7.0 is supplied with a substantial number of PCLs, such as those for  
different types of HP LaserJet printer, for PostScript printers, IBM ProPrinters,  
and all Siemens Nixdorf printers. The Appendix of this manual contains a list of  
all the available PCLs and the printers they support. These PCLs are located in  
the file /var/spool/Xprint/config/pcl/xpterm. It is possible that only some of  
them are installed as Xprint V7.0 objects in your system.  
You can display a list of the available PCLs with the xpshow -pclcommand.  
To define further PCLs, use the xpadd -pclcommand. There is also a  
standard printer capability list, the PCL GENERIC. This enables you to a certain  
extent to also use printers for which there is no special PCL available. The PCL  
GENERICcan be neither deleted nor modified.  
If you want to...  
add a PCL  
Read...  
section “Adding a PCL” on page 180  
section “Deleting a PCL” on page 181  
delete a PCL  
add comments to PCLs to provide a section “Assigning a comment to a  
better overview  
PCL” on page 182  
assign a PCL to a printer  
section “Assigning a PCL to a printer”  
on page 183  
define a PCL yourself  
section “Defining a PCL yourself” on  
page 185  
Table 21: Administering PCLs  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Administering PCLs  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.13.1 Adding a PCL  
Adding a PCL via its unique name  
●
To add a PCL to the Xprint V7.0 system via its unique name, use the  
following command:  
xpadd -pcl pcl_name -fi file_name  
pcl_name represents the unique name in the entry of file_name and repre-  
sents a list of attributes which must be processed in order to control the  
attached printers, e.g. PROPRINTERor EPSON-FX.  
file_name represents the absolute path name of the PCL file. If you do not  
specify the absolute path name, Xprint V7.0 searches the Xprint V7.0  
directory /var/spool/Xprint/config/PCL) of the specified host (see  
option -ho). All the PCLs supplied with Xprint V7.0 by default are located  
there in the xptermfile. If no file name is specified, Xprint V7.0 reads the  
PCL definition from standard input stdin.  
Adding a PCL from another host  
If a PCL source file that you want to add to the Xprint V7.0 system is located on  
a computer other than the local host, proceed as follows:  
●
Log in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator. Only he/she has the right to add a  
PCL from another host.  
●
Now add the PCL using the following command:  
xpadd -pcl pcl_name [-fi file_name] -ho host_name  
where host_name represents the name of the host on which the PCL is  
administered, and pcl_name is the unique name of the PCL. With -fi  
file_name you can specify the file which contains the PCL definition.  
Examples  
–
To add the standard PCL POSTSCRIPT to your system:  
xpadd -pcl POSTSCRIPT -fi /var/spool/Xprint/config/pcl/xpterm  
–
To add your own PCL SELFDEFINED(which is located in the file  
/xprint50/pcl_alternative/selfdef_hplj) to the system:  
xpadd -pcl SELFDEFINED \  
-fi /xprint50/pcl_alternative/selfdef_hplj  
180  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering PCLs  
–
To add the PCL HP-LASERJETfrom the file hplj(in the directory  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/PCL) to the remote host nashua:  
xpadd -pcl HP-LASERJET -ho nashua -fi hplj  
6.13.2 Deleting a PCL  
Under Xprint V7.0 you can delete from the Xprint V7.0 system any PCL you  
administer.  
Note: A PCL referenced by another object cannot be deleted from the system.  
This applies, for example, to a PCL which is assigned to a printer in the  
system.  
●
Check if the PCL to be deleted has any references to other objects:  
xpshow -pcl [selection]pcl_name -diR  
For pcl_name you specify the name of exactly one PCL you want to delete. If  
you want to want to delete several PCLs, you must repeat this command for  
each one.  
For selection you can either specify a list of PCL names, or you can define a  
list of selection criteria with the -scl “selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) according to  
which the PCLs to be deleted are selected.  
●
●
If references to the PCL are displayed, you must remove these by modifying  
the displayed objects accordingly.  
To delete a PCL from the system, use the following command:  
xpdel -pcl selection  
For selection you can either specify a list of unique PCL names, or you can  
use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria  
list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to  
which the relevant PCLs are selected and deleted.  
Examples  
–
To delete the PCL HP-DESKJETfrom the system:  
xpdel -pcl HP-DESKJET  
–
To delete all the PCLs which start with the identifier EPSON:  
xpdel -pcl EPSON\*  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
181  
     
Administering PCLs  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.13.3 Assigning a comment to a PCL  
For better orientation within the system, it may be useful to provide PCLs with  
comments, which may be addressed either to users or to the Xprint V7.0 admin-  
istrator.  
Providing a PCL with a comment for users  
You can provide a PCL with a comment that every user can display. You can do  
this either when adding the PCL to the system, or later when the PCL is already  
defined.  
●
If you want to assign a comment to an existing PCL, use the following  
command:  
xpmod -pcl pcl_name -cu for_users  
where pcl_name represents the unique name of a PCL, and for_users (cu stands  
for comment for user) represents a comment which every user is to be able to  
display (using xpshow -pclpcl_name -di LONG).  
Examples  
–
To display all the PCLs available in the system:  
xpshow -pcl  
SHORT display  
Name  
----  
File  
----  
HC HS Host  
-- -- ----  
Administrator  
-------------  
E-9001-31 /var/spool/Spo NO NO d241s045 root  
EPSON-SQ  
GENERIC  
/var/spool/Spo NO YES d241s045 root  
/var/spool/Spo NO NO  
Providing a PCL with a comment for the administrator  
●
If you want to assign to an existing PCL a comment for the Xprint V7.0  
administrator, use the following command:  
xpmod -pcl pcl_name -ca for_ administrator  
where pcl_name represents the unique name of a PCL, and for_administrator  
stands for a comment which only the Xprint V7.0 administrator is to be able  
to display (xpshow -pclpcl_name -di LONG).  
182  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering PCLs  
Examples  
–
To assign the user comment suitable_for_all_printers_XYZto the PCL  
SELFDEFINEDwhen adding the PCL to the system:  
xpadd -pcl SELFDEFINED -cu "suitable_for_all_printers_XYZ"  
–
To assign the user comment  
suitable_for_all_printers_XYZ_except_for_model_Tto the PCL  
SELFDEFINED,which already exists in the system:  
xpmod -pcl SELFDEFINED -cu \  
"suitable_for_all_printers_XYZ_except_for_model_T"  
6.13.4 Assigning a PCL to a printer  
Every printer must be assigned a PCL so that it can process incoming jobs. The  
following section describes how PCLs are assigned to printers and how this  
assignment can be changed or canceled. If you do not specify a PCL when you  
set up a printer, Xprint V7.0 automatically assigns to it the standard PCL  
GENERIC.  
To assign a different PCL to an existing printer, proceed as follows:  
●
●
If you do not know the ID of the printer concerned, you can display a list of  
all the printers defined in the system with the xpshow -devcommand.  
First check the current settings of the relevant printer(s):  
xpshow -dev [selection]-di LONG  
The variable selection represents either a list of the printers or the option  
-scl“selection_criteria_list” used to define a list of selection criteria  
according to which Xprint V7.0 selects the printers. For more information on  
selection criteria lists refer to the section “Selection criteria list” on page 266  
in the Appendix. If selection is not specified, a list of all printers is displayed.  
●
If you are not sure whether the PCL you want matches the attributes of the  
printer or its default form or assigned font, you should display the attributes  
of the PCL (and the assigned form) to compare them:  
xpshow -pcl pcl_name -di LONG  
xpshow -frm form_name -di LONG  
where pcl_name is the name of the assigned PCL, and form_name is the  
name of the default form assigned to the printer.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
183  
   
Administering PCLs  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
●
●
To be able to make changes you must first deactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev [selection]-st NOT_ACTIVE  
Now assign the new PCL to the printer:  
xpmod -dev printer -pc pcl_name  
where printer is the ID of the printer to which the PCL is to be assigned, and  
pcl_name is the name of the assigned PCL.  
Note: If the default PCL is replaced by another one, you must make sure  
that the new PCL supports the attributes of the default form and the  
assigned default font used on the printer. If this is not the case, the  
xpmodcommand is rejected.  
●
Now reactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev [selection]  
Examples  
–
To add the printer group4 (address /dev/lp3, supervisor marcus), assigning  
to it the PCL HP-LASERJET:  
xpadd -dev group4 -da dev/lp3 -su marcus -pc HP-LASERJET  
To assign to the printer printer4 a different PCL, e.g. POSTSCRIPT:  
–
xpchange -dev printer4 -st NOT-ACTIVE  
xpmod -dev printer4 -pc POSTSCRIPT -ct-  
xpchange -dev printer4  
–
To cancel the assignment of the PCL POSTSCRIPT to the printer printer1and  
assign to it the PCL GENERICinstead:  
xpchange -dev printer1 -st NOT-ACTIVE  
xpmod -dev printer1 -pc GENERIC -ct SIMPLE  
xpchange -dev printer1  
184  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering PCLs  
6.13.5 Defining a PCL yourself  
Except for the default PCL GENERIC, the PCLs supplied with Xprint V7.0 can be  
modified. Furthermore, you can also define your own PCLs in order to provide  
optimum communication between the Xprint V7.0 system and the printer.  
To do this, you must simply give Xprint V7.0 information on the attributes of the  
printer and how these are selected. The attributes are defined and saved in a  
PCL file so that the Xprint V7.0 system can access the information at any time.  
To define a PCL yourself, you must create a file with the PCL definition. This file  
must have a special structure. The section “Format of a PCL definition” in the  
“Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual” contains a description of the required format.  
!
Only users with a sound knowledge of printers should define PCLs  
themselves. It is seriously recommended that you copy an existing PCL  
entry in the file xptermand then adjust it to the functions and require-  
ments of the new printer.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
185  
   
Administering recovery rules  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.14 Administering recovery rules  
This section describes how to define and administer recovery rules. The  
following table serves as a guide to this section:  
If you want to...  
Read...  
define a new recovery rule  
section “Defining a recovery rule” on  
page 186  
assign a recovery rule to a printer  
section “Assigning a recovery rule to a  
printer” on page 190  
cancel the assignment of a recovery section “Canceling the assignment of  
rule to a printer  
a recovery rule to a printer” on  
page 190  
modify a recovery rule  
delete a recovery rule  
Table 22: Administering recovery rules  
section “Modifying recovery rules” on  
page 191  
section “Deleting a recovery rule” on  
page 192  
6.14.1 Defining a recovery rule  
Recovery rules are defined in a file using a text editor. This file is compiled when  
it is added to the Xprint V7.0 system. This section describes how to add  
recovery rules to the Xprint V7.0 system.  
To define a new recovery rule, proceed as follows:  
●
Change to the recovery rule directory RRin the Xprint V7.0 directory on your  
computer (by default you require system administrator privileges to be able  
to edit files in this directory):  
cd /var/spool/Xprint/config/RR  
Create a new file for the new recovery rule with a text editor:  
vi my_RR.rec  
●
To do this, use any editor that can edit pure ASCII files (e.g. vi(1)). You can  
choose any name for this file.  
186  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering recovery rules  
●
Enter your recovery rules in the file using the following format:  
Every line of the source file defines one recovery rule. Comment lines must  
start with the hash character (#) in the first column. Use the following format  
to define recovery rules:  
error_code:[maximum_time]:[exception_rule_ID]:list_of_actions:  
The specifications for the fields in square brackets may be omitted, but the  
colons for separating the fields are mandatory.  
error_code is the key under which the recovery rule files are to be accessed.  
It can contain either an Xprint V7.0 printer error code or an action for  
handling a recurring error. This field is mandatory. The following printer error  
codes are supported:  
Error code  
Description  
Default  
action  
TonerEmpty Toner empty  
Retry  
Ignore  
Retry  
Retry  
Restart  
Retry  
Retry  
Parity  
Parity error during transfer  
PaperEnd  
Stop  
Paper empty  
Printer stopped  
Printer switched off  
Printer cover open  
Paper jam  
PowerOff  
CoverOpen  
PaperJam  
Hangup  
I/O system call interrupted due to hardware Retry  
failure  
NoAck  
Time-out during ETX/ACK protocol  
Retry  
Table 23: Supported printer error codes  
maximum_time is an option which must be specified together with the  
exception_rule_ID field. It activates the selection of a specific action if an error  
keeps recurring. By default, the value INFINITEis used. The value must lie  
between 0and 65535seconds. If the error persists after this time, Xprint V7.0  
selects the action specified in the field exception_rule_ID.  
You can set a printer automatically to the status NOT_ACTIVE, for example, if  
the paper supply is not refilled within the specified time.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
Administering recovery rules  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
exception_rule_ID is also optional and, if used, must be specified with the field  
maximum_time. It may consist of any combination of letters and digits; blanks  
are not allowed. The field must contain a reference to a suitable entry in the  
error_code field, which itself specifies an action.  
list_of_actions specifies the actions to be taken if a specific error occurs. If  
two or more actions are specified, the individual actions must be separated  
by blanks. The following actions can be specified:  
Action  
Ignore  
Retry  
Description  
Ignore error  
Repeat polling of printer status until READYis returned  
Restart with last printed page  
Set device to NOT_ACTIVEand the job to INTERRUPTED  
Stop active job  
Restart  
Stop  
Suspend  
Respool  
Print last document again  
Table 24: Actions for specific errors  
The following examples illustrate the structure of a typical recovery rule:  
#Key  
Stop  
:
:
Time  
600  
:
:
:
Code  
:
Action :  
Retry :  
stopped :  
:
stopped :  
Stop  
:
In the above example, the rule for stoppedis applied if the printer is stopped  
(by pressing the STOP/PAUSE key) for longer than 600 seconds. Otherwise  
availability of the printer is checked again or the default action for the current  
error is used (Retry).  
#Key  
Stop  
:
:
Time  
600  
:
:
:
:
Exception :  
Action  
Retry  
Stop  
:
:
:
:
stopped  
:
:
:
stopped :  
*
:
Stop  
Stop  
In this example, the rule for stoppedis applied if the printer is stopped (by  
pressing the STOP/PAUSE key) for longer than 600 seconds. Then availability  
of the printer is checked again (Retry) or (due to the * character) the status  
of the printer is set to NOT_ACTIVE(Stop) irrespective of the error code.  
188  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering recovery rules  
The asterisk (*) stands for any error other than those specified earlier in the  
recovery rules file. The asterisk must be specified as the last rule.  
#Key  
:
Time  
900  
:
:
:
Exception :  
Action  
Respool :  
Stop  
:
PowerOFF :  
stopped :  
stopped  
:
:
:
A printer which does not allow polling or handshaking is connected directly  
to a LAN. In the event of a PowerOFFerror message on the printer, Xprint V7.0  
by default restarts the job with the last sent page.  
However, as the last page sent is not necessarily the last printed page, the  
rule above is more useful: In the case of a PowerOFFerror message, the  
document is spooled in again; if the connection cannot be re-established  
within 15 minutes, the printer is set to the status NOT_ACTIVEso that no more  
print jobs can be sent to it. Now the printer can be switched back on and/or  
the problem can be eliminated.  
●
●
When you have fully defined your recovery rules, save your file.  
Add the new recovery rule to the Xprint V7.0 system:  
xpadd -rec rule_name -fi rule_file [-ca comment]  
where rule_name is a name you want to assign to a set of new recovery rules  
in the Xprint V7.0 system and rule_file specifies the file name of the source  
file you have created. If this file is not located in the Xprint V7.0 directory  
opt/Xprint/RR, you must specify the absolute path name. With comment  
you can specify a comment, for example on the purpose of this rule, which  
can be useful for later administration of recovery rules.  
Example  
To add the recovery rule RR1from the recovery rules file  
–
opt/Xprint/RR/my_RR_1:  
xpadd -rec RR1 -fi my_RR_1  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
189  
Administering recovery rules  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.14.2 Assigning a recovery rule to a printer  
To make a newly defined recovery rule effective for a printer, you must assign it  
to the printer. Proceed as follows:  
●
If the printer is still active, deactivate it:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
where selection is either the name of one or more printers or a selection  
criteria list according to which the printers are selected.  
●
Now you can assign the new recovery rules to an existing printer with the  
following command:  
xpmod -dev [selection] -rr rule_name  
This command assigns the recovery rules rule_name to the selected  
printer(s). The option -rrrule_name can also be specified immediately when  
a new printer is defined.  
●
Now you can reactivate the printers:  
xpchange -dev [selection]  
Example  
Assigning a recovery rule Standardto all printers in the system:  
xpchange -dev -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -dev -rr Standard  
xpchange -dev  
6.14.3 Canceling the assignment of a recovery rule to a  
printer  
To cancel the assignment of a recovery rule set to a printer because you want  
to reactivate the system’s default error recovery, proceed as follows:  
●
If the printer is still active, deactivate it:  
xpchange -dev [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
where selection is either a list of printers to be deactivated or a selection  
criteria list via which the printers are selected. If selection is not specified, all  
printers are deactivated.  
190  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering recovery rules  
●
You can cancel the assignment of the recovery rule with the following  
command:  
xpmod -dev [selection] -rr-  
This command revokes the current assignment of a recovery rule to the  
specified printer(s).  
●
Now you can reactivate the printer:  
xpchange -dev [selection]  
6.14.4 Modifying recovery rules  
If you want to modify recovery rules, you must modify their source file (usually  
located in the Xprint V7.0 directory .../RR) and then recompile it. Proceed as  
follows:  
●
Modify the source file of the relevant recovery rule using an ASCII editor. To  
do this, use the procedure described in the section “Defining a recovery rule”  
on page 186.  
●
Recompile the recovery rules using the following command:  
xpmod -rec rule_name -fi rule_file [-ca comment]  
where rule_name is the name of the modified recovery rules in the Xprint  
V7.0 system and rule_file specifies the file name of the modified source file.  
If this file is not located in the Xprint V7.0 directory .../RR, you must specify  
the absolute path name. With comment you can specify or modify a comment.  
If the xpmodcommand is called on a host other than the one on which  
the rule file was added with xpadd, Xprint V7.0 uses the original host and  
path to access the file. You can make Xprint V7.0 modify the local copy  
of the selected file by using the -ho-option.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
191  
 
Administering recovery rules  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.14.5 Deleting a recovery rule  
To delete a recovery rule, proceed as follows:  
●
Make sure that the recovery rule is no longer used by any printers in the  
system:  
xpshow -rec rule_name -diR  
where rule_name is the name of exactly one recovery rule. A list is displayed  
containing all the objects which have direct or indirect references to the  
specified recovery rule.  
●
●
If there are any, delete all the references of level 1 to the recovery rule in the  
system, for example by canceling the assignment of the rule to the specified  
printer.  
Delete the recovery rule with the following command:  
xpdel -rec selection  
where selection is a list of recovery rules or a selection criteria list according  
to which the rules are selected.  
192  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering servers  
6.15 Administering servers  
A server is responsible for scheduling print jobs and administering the job  
database. Furthermore, it controls the supervisors and printers which are  
assigned to it. A server can have several supervisors assigned.  
If you want to...  
add a server  
Read...  
section “Adding a server” on page 193  
delete a server  
section “Deleting a server” on  
page 196  
change the status of a server, activate section “Changing the status of a  
or deactivate a server  
server” on page 197  
modify the attributes of a server  
section “Modifying the attributes of a  
server” on page 198  
Table 25: Administering servers  
6.15.1 Adding a server  
Configuration hints  
When defining servers, supervisors and devices in a domain, a good practice is  
to attach the device and supervisor to a server that is local to the host controlling  
the device. This guarantees that jobs can be submitted to the printer as soon as  
the host controlling the printer is up and running. Unless specified otherwise,  
this is the default situation that Xprint V7.0 will create for new devices that are  
added to the system.  
A good ’rule of thumb’ is that a server should not control more than three super-  
visors and a supervisor should not control more than fifteen devices. It is  
important to remember this if you are using the Xprint V7.0 default, as you may  
need to manually adjust the balance of supervisors and devices.  
If a supervisor is moved from one server to another, remember that jobs  
submitted to the supervisor’s device(s) will not be automatically redirected to the  
new server. So you should only move a supervisor when all the jobs submitted  
to its printers have finished printing.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
193  
       
Administering servers  
Procedure  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
There are two possible ways of adding a server to the system: you can either  
add a completely new server to the system with the xpadd -srvcommand, or  
you can copy an existing server with the xpcopy -srvcommand and then  
modify the relevant attributes.  
If you want to allow administrators of other hosts to assign supervisors to a new  
server, you must define a corresponding permission list. This is described in the  
section “Creating a permission list” on page 144.  
Adding a completely new server  
●
To add a new server to the system, use the following command:  
xpadd -srv server_name [-ho host_name]  
For server_name specify a unique name for the new server. If the name  
already exists, the command is rejected.  
host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the server is to  
be added. Only the Xprint V7.0 administrator can add a server on a remote  
host, but rootand subrootcan administer this server.  
●
Activate the server:  
xpchange -srv server_name  
You must run this command, as every new server is first set to OFFfor all its  
states (-st, -si, -so) and is therefore not available in the system. The  
servers are activated automatically when Xprint V7.0 is started (xpstart  
command).  
When a server is activated for the first time, Xprint V7.0 creates in the  
opt/Xprint/SVdirectory a subdirectory for this server which contains its  
name, unless there is already a directory with the same name.  
When adding a new server, you can also use the options -spscheduling and -up  
user_privileges to define which scheduling policy is to be used and which users  
can assign supervisors to the server (see section “Administering permission  
lists” on page 143). For more detailed information refer to the “Xprint V7.0  
Reference Manual”.  
-
194  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering servers  
Note that Xprint V7.0 creates a default server when you define a new supervisor  
without specifying an associated server (xpadd -spv -se). Similarly, a default  
server is created when you add a new printer without specifying a supervisor  
(xpadd -dev -su). This default server is then assigned the name of the super-  
visor or printer. It is only created if it does not yet exist in the system.  
Copying and modifying a server  
Using the xpcopy -srvcommand you can copy existing servers in the system  
quite easily. This is useful if the new server is to have similar attributes to an  
existing server. With the xpcopy -srv command, you define a new server on  
the host on which you issue the command unless you specify another host with  
the -hooption.  
●
Copy the relevant server  
xpcopy -srv name_old_server name_new_server [modifications]  
[-ho host_name]  
For name_old_server specify the name of the server you want to copy.  
For name_new_server specify the name of the new server. If the name already  
exists, the command is rejected.  
host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the server is to  
be added. Only the Xprint V7.0 administrator can add a server on a remote  
host.  
For modifications specify the modifications you want to make. For more  
detailed information on possible modifications refer to the “Xprint V7.0  
-
Reference Manual”. With the options -spscheduling and -upuser_privileges  
you can define which scheduling policy applies and which users can assign  
supervisors to the server (see section “Administering permission lists” on  
page 143). See the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual” for more detailed  
information.  
Examples  
You want to copy the server hudson and name the new server nashua, nashua  
–
being controlled by host nile. Furthermore, you want the new server nashua  
to process the smallest job first instead of the biggest job as is defined for  
server hudson.  
xpcopy -srv hudson nashua -ho nile -sp SMALL  
xpchange -srv nashua -st ACTIVE  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
 
Administering servers  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
–
–
To add a new server nashua on the remote host colorado:  
xpadd -srv nashua -ho colorado  
xpchange -srv nashua -st ACTIVE  
To add the new server delaware based on server nashua on the remote host  
nile,and to specify that the new server delaware is to process the biggest  
print jobs first:  
xpcopy -srv nashua delaware -ho nile -sp BIG  
xpchange -srv delaware -st ACTIVE  
6.15.2 Deleting a server  
With the command xpdel -srvyou can delete any server you administer.  
When you delete a server, its directory  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/SV/server_name is also deleted.  
If the server has the status ACTIVEor is connected to an existing supervisor, it  
cannot be deleted.  
Note: If you delete a server, any jobs on it which might still be pending are also  
deleted.  
To delete a server, proceed as follows:  
●
Make sure that the server is no longer connected to a supervisor and that it  
is not processing any print jobs.  
xpshow -srv server_name -diR  
For server_name you specify the name of exactly one server you want to  
delete. If you want to delete several servers, you must repeat this command  
for each one.  
For selection you can either specify a list of form names, or you can define a  
list of selection criteria with the -scl “selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) according to  
which the forms to be deleted are selected.  
●
If references to the server are displayed, you must remove these by  
modifying the displayed objects accordingly.  
196  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering servers  
●
Deactivate the server:  
xpchange -srv [selection]-st NOT_ACTIVE  
For selection you can either specify a list of servers you want to deactivate,  
or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section  
“Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria  
according to which the relevant servers are selected. If you do not specify  
selection, all servers are deactivated.  
●
Delete the server:  
xpdel -srv selection  
You can also delete several servers at once via the selection criteria  
lists mentioned above. In this case, however, you must make sure that  
each of the servers is  
i
–
–
–
inactive  
not connected to a supervisor  
not processing any jobs.  
6.15.3 Changing the status of a server  
The status of a server can assume the values ACTIVEor NOT_ACTIVE or  
SHUTDOWN; the spoolin status and the spoolout status can be either ONor OFF.  
Proceed as follows:  
●
Find out the status of the server(s):  
xpstat -srv [selection]  
For selection you can either specify a list of the servers whose status you  
want to display, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list  
of criteria according to which the relevant servers are selected. If you do not  
specify selection, the status of all servers is displayed.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
197  
         
Administering servers  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
●
Change the status:  
xpchange -srv [selection]modifications  
For modifications specify the required changes. These may be: -st ACTIVE  
(optional as this is the default) or -st NOT_ACTIVE, -si OFFor -si ON for the  
spoolin status and -so OFFor -so ON for the spoolout status, and -sa WARMor  
-sa COLD(sa standing for system activation) for retaining or deleting the print  
jobs from previous sessions. For more detailed information refer to the  
“Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
If you deactivate a server with xpchange -srv[selection] -st  
NOT_ACTIVE, all the printers assigned to it are also deactivated. All  
print jobs active on these printers are stopped immediately and set to  
the status INTERRUPTED. If you activate a server with xpchange -srv  
[selection], the printers assigned to it are not activated automatically.  
i
Examples  
–
To reactivate server nashua and retain the jobs from the previous session:  
xpchange -srv nashua -sa WARM  
–
To deactivate all servers controlled by host colorado:  
xpchange -srv -scl "-ho colorado" -st NOT_ACTIVE  
6.15.4 Modifying the attributes of a server  
You can modify the attributes of a server if, for example, you want to assign  
permissions to it which were not assigned when the server was set up.  
Note: The attributes of a server with the status ACTIVEcannot be modified.  
Proceed as follows:  
●
Find out the status of the relevant server(s):  
xpstat -srv [selection]  
For selection you can either specify a list of the servers whose status you  
want to display, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list  
of criteria according to which the relevant servers are selected. If you do not  
specify selection, the status of all servers is displayed.  
198  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering servers  
●
●
If necessary, deactivate the relevant server(s):  
xpchange -srv [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
Modify the relevant attributes:  
xpmod -srv [selection]modifications  
For modifications you can specify all the values which can also be used when  
adding a server. With the options -spscheduling and -upuser_privileges you  
can define respectively what scheduling policy applies and which users can  
assign supervisors to the server (see section “Administering permission  
lists” on page 143). See the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual” for more  
detailed information.  
●
Reactivate the server(s):  
xpchange -srv [selection]  
Examples  
–
–
To modify the server nashuasuch that it no longer processes the jobs with  
the highest priority first but the jobs with the highest security level:  
xpstat -srv nashua  
xpchange -srv nashua -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -srv nashua -sp SECURITY  
xpchange -srv nashua  
To modify all the servers of host coloradosuch that each server only  
processes a maximum of 20 print jobs:  
xpstat -srv -scl "-ho colorado"  
xpchange -srv -scl "-ho colorado" -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -srv -scl "-ho colorado" -mj 20  
xpchange -srv -scl "-ho colorado"  
(The -mj option stands for maximum jobs.)  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
199  
 
Administering supervisors  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.16 Administering supervisors  
A supervisor controls one or more printers and provides them with user data. A  
supervisor is controlled by one server and must be located on the same host as  
the printers it controls.  
If you want to...  
Read...  
add a supervisor  
section “Adding a supervisor” on  
page 200  
delete a supervisor  
section “Deleting a supervisor” on  
page 205  
change the status of a supervisor  
section “Activating or deactivating  
supervisors” on page 203  
modify the attributes of a supervisor section “Modifying the attributes of a  
supervisor” on page 204  
Table 26: Administering supervisors  
6.16.1 Adding a supervisor  
There are two possible ways of adding a supervisor: you can either define a new  
supervisor from scratch or you can copy an existing one and, if required, modify  
its attributes.  
Note: If you add a new supervisor to the Xprint V7.0 system, the supervisor  
status is automatically set to NOT_ACTIVE. When the supervisor is  
activated for the first time (see section “Activating or deactivating super-  
visors” on page 203), a subdirectory with the name of the supervisor is  
created in the /var/spool/Xprint/config/SPdirectory (unless this has  
already been done).  
Defining a new supervisor  
●
Add a new supervisor to the system:  
xpadd -spv supervisor_name [-se server_name][-ho host_name]  
supervisor_name is the unique name of the new supervisor. If there is already  
a supervisor with this name, the command is rejected. For server_name  
specify the name of the server on which the supervisor is to be added. A  
server name must be specified, otherwise the default name is used.  
host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the supervisor  
200  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering supervisors  
is to be added. Only the Xprint V7.0 administrator, rootand subrootcan add  
a supervisor on a remote host. Using the additional option -cacomment_for_  
administrator you can also assign a comment to the supervisor when adding  
it to the system.  
●
Activate the supervisor:  
xpchange -spv supervisor_name  
Adding a supervisor by copying an existing supervisor  
Using the xpcopy -spvcommand you can copy existing supervisors in the  
system quite easily. This is useful if the new supervisor is to have similar  
attributes to an existing supervisor. Proceed as follows:  
●
Copy the relevant supervisor:  
xpcopy -spv name_old_supervisor name_new_supervisor [modifications] \  
[-ho host_name]  
For name_old_supervisor specify the name of the supervisor you want to copy.  
For name_new_supervisor specify the name of the new supervisor. If the name  
already exists, the command is rejected.  
host_name represents the name of the remote host on which the supervisor  
is to be added. Only the Xprint V7.0 administrator can add a supervisor on  
a remote host.  
For modifications specify the modifications you want to make. Each entry in  
this list consists of an option of the xpadd -spvcommand as well as a corre-  
sponding value. For more detailed information, see the description of this  
command in the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
Using the additional option -cacomment_for_ administrator you can also  
assign a comment to the supervisor when adding it to the system.  
●
Here also you must activate the supervisor:  
xpchange -spv supervisor_name  
A supervisor that is copied from the server of a local host to a remote  
host remains assigned to the server of the source host. If you want  
i
the supervisor and server to be defined on the same host, you should  
use the option -seserver_name when copying, to immediately assign  
the new supervisor to a server of the remote host before activating the  
supervisor (see example below).  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
         
Administering supervisors  
Examples  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
–
To define the new supervisor delawareon server nashua and activate it:  
xpadd -spv delaware -se nashua  
xpchange -spv delaware  
–
To define the new supervisor coloradoby copying the existing supervisor  
nashua, adding the comment new_supervisor for the Xprint V7.0 adminis-  
trator. Then the new supervisor colorado is activated:  
xpcopy -spv nashua colorado -ca new_supervisor  
xpchange -spv colorado  
–
–
To define and activate supervisor hudson on the server nashua of the remote  
host nile, adding the comment from_host_colorado for the Xprint V7.0  
administrator.  
xpadd -spv hudson -se nashua -ho nile -ca from_host_colorado  
xpchange -spv hudson  
To add supervisor colorado on the server nashua of the remote host nile  
by copying supervisor delaware from the local host. Then the new super-  
visor coloradois activated.  
xpcopy -spv delaware colorado -se nashua -ho nile  
xpchange -spv colorado  
In this example, the option -se nashua is used to replace the assignment of  
the original supervisor delawareto the server of the local host by the  
assignment of the new supervisor coloradoto the server nashua of the  
remote host nile.  
202  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering supervisors  
6.16.2 Activating or deactivating supervisors  
You can change the status of any supervisor you administer. A supervisor can  
assume three status values: ACTIVE, SHUTDOWNand NOT_ACTIVE. SHUTDOWNmeans  
that the status NOT_ACTIVEhas been requested for the supervisor but has not  
yet been reached.  
The status needs to be changed above all in two cases:  
1. If a new supervisor is added to the Xprint V7.0 system, its status is automat-  
ically set to NOT_ACTIVE. For the supervisor to be able to perform its functions  
it must be set to the status ACTIVE.  
2. If you want to delete a supervisor or modify its attributes, you must first  
deactivate it (status NOT_ACTIVE). A supervisor with the status ACTIVEcannot  
be deleted nor modified.  
If you deactivate a supervisor with xpchange -spv[selection] -st  
NOT_ACTIVE, all the printers assigned to it are also deactivated. If you  
activate a supervisor with xpchange -spv [selection], the printers  
i
assigned to it are not activated automatically.  
●
To change the status of a supervisor, enter the following command:  
xpchange -spv [selection]-st status  
For selection you can either specify a list of the supervisors you want to  
activate or deactivate, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option  
(see section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a  
list of criteria according to which the relevant supervisors are selected. If  
selection is not specified, the status of all supervisors is changed.  
status is the status the supervisor is to have. This variable can assume the  
values ACTIVEor NOT_ACTIVE.  
Examples  
–
To activate the supervisor marcus:  
xpchange -spv marcus  
–
To deactivate all supervisors with the comment “please_delete”:  
xpchange -spv -scl “-ca please_delete“ -st NOT_ACTIVE  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
203  
           
Administering supervisors  
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
6.16.3 Modifying the attributes of a supervisor  
You can modify the attributes of any supervisor you administer.  
You cannot modify the attributes of an active supervisor. You must first  
set it to the status NOT_ACTIVE.  
i
To modify the attributes of a supervisor, proceed as follows:  
●
Deactivate the relevant supervisor(s):  
xpchange -spv [selection] -st NOT_ACTIVE  
For selection you can either specify a list of the supervisors you want to  
deactivate, or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see  
section “Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list  
of criteria according to which the relevant supervisors are selected. If  
selection is not specified, the status of all supervisors is changed.  
●
Modify the relevant attributes:  
xpmod -spv [selection] modifications  
For modifications specify the attributes to be modified. You can use all the  
options which are allowed when adding a new supervisor with the  
xpadd -spvcommand. With the options -cacomment_for_administrator,  
-seserver_name and -hohost_name you can add a comment about the  
supervisor for administrators, or you can assign the supervisor to another  
server or host respectively. For more detailed information refer to the “Xprint  
V7.0 - Reference Manual”.  
●
Reactivate the supervisor(s):  
xpchange -spv [selection]  
Examples:  
–
To modify the attributes of supervisor marcusand add a comment for the  
administrator saying that this supervisor is a copy of supervisor nile:  
xpchange -spv marcus -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -spv marcus -ca copy_of_nile  
xpchange -spv marcus  
–
To add a comment to all supervisors of host coloradosaying that these can  
be deleted:  
xpchange -spv -scl "-ho colorado" -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -spv -scl "-ho colorado" -ca please_delete  
xpchange -spv -scl "-ho colorado"  
204  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Xprint V7.0  
Administering supervisors  
6.16.4 Deleting a supervisor  
With the command xpdel -spvyou can delete any supervisor you administer.  
A supervisor with the status ACTIVEcannot be deleted. Therefore you  
must first deactivate the supervisor. You can also not delete a supervisor  
which is referenced by other objects, e.g. a printer.  
i
To delete a supervisor from the Xprint V7.0 system, proceed as follows:  
●
Deactivate the supervisor:  
xpchange -spv [selection]-st NOT_ACTIVE  
For selection you can either specify a list of the supervisors to be deactivated,  
or you can use the -scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section  
“Selection criteria list” on page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria  
according to which the relevant supervisors are selected. If selection is not  
specified, all supervisors are deactivated.  
●
Check whether the supervisor is referenced by any other objects:  
xpshow -spv supervisor_name -diR  
Cancel any existing references. How to do this is described in the sections  
dealing with assigning a supervisor to the relevant object (e.g. to a printer).  
●
Delete the supervisor:  
xpdel -spv selection  
Examples  
–
To deactivate and delete the supervisor delaware:  
xpchange -spv delaware -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpdel -spv delaware  
–
To deactivate and delete all supervisors with the comment “please_delete”:  
xpchange -spv -scl "-ca please_delete" -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpdel -spv -scl "-ca please_delete"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
205  
     
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Interoperability  
This chapter describes how you can interact with other spooler systems.  
7.1  
Introduction  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to interact with other spooler systems. The following  
figure illustrates the various possibilities:  
Figure 12: Interoperation with other spooler systems  
This means that you can make the printers in remote Xprint V7.0 systems also  
available to users of the local Xprint V7.0 domain and, vice versa, the printers  
of the local Xprint V7.0 domain can be made available to users of remote  
spooler systems.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
207  
     
Introduction  
Interoperability  
Xprint V7.0 can assume the role of a client that uses the print services of the  
other spooler system involved, or the role of a server that makes its printers  
available to other systems. In the previous figure this is illustrated by two arrows  
from and to the other spooler system. If the arrows are of different colors, there  
are two possible ways of interoperation which depend on the software used.  
These methods are as follows:  
Type of interoperation  
Description  
Accessing a BSD printer spooler from Xprint V7.0, i.e.  
sending print jobs to printers connected via a BSD printer  
spooler.  
page 209  
Connecting Xprint V7.0 and another printer spooler via a  
gateway, i.e. allowing access from Xprint V7.0 to another  
printer spooler and vice versa.  
page 213  
Table 27: Interoperation methods  
These methods are based on two different ways of interconnecting different  
spooler systems. In the case of interoperation with BSD printer spoolers, you  
can allow local Xprint V7.0 users access by defining for every printer of the BSD  
system a local printer which forwards the print jobs to the BSD system like an  
lprclient. This functionality is available in any Xprint V7.0 system, including  
those not installed as network systems. In such a case, access to the BSD  
system is effected via a fast filter which is assigned to the local (pseudo) printer.  
Xprint V7.0 also allows you to define what are called gateways to other Xprint  
V7.0 systems. Gateways allow bidirectional connections between Xprint V7.0  
and other spooler systems. Such gateways can only be defined if the gateway  
package of Xprint V7.0 was purchased.  
208  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Accessing BSD printers  
7.2  
Accessing BSD printers  
This section describes how you can allow access to the printers of a BSD  
spooler from within Xprint V7.0 via the fast filter bsd.  
7.2.1 Basic information  
You can allow users of the local Xprint V7.0 domain access to BSD printers  
which meet the following requirements:  
–
the printers are defined on a computer with a BSD printer spooler (e.g. a  
BSD system, Novell Netware®, Windows NT® Servers, Windows 2000®  
Servers, LINUX etc.)  
–
–
–
an lpdprocess is running on the remote system which allows other  
computers to use the printers defined there  
your Xprint V7.0 domain is connected to the remote system via a network  
and the TCP/IP protocol (can be checked with the pingcommand)  
at least one of the systems in your Xprint V7.0 domain is allowed to use the  
printers connected to the remote system (e.g. by the file /etc/hosts.lpd  
on the remote system or the remote BSD system).  
If these requirements are met, you can establish a connection to these printers  
which allows print jobs to be sent to them from within the local Xprint V7.0  
domain. The following figure illustrates the basic structure of such a connection:  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
     
Accessing BSD printers  
Interoperability  
Figure 13: Accessing BSD printers  
To establish the connection to a BSD printer, you must configure a pseudo  
printer on one system in your Xprint V7.0 domain which the Xprint V7.0 users  
can specify as the target for their print jobs and which forwards the print jobs it  
receives to the BSD printer by using the fast filter bsdfor printing.  
As this pseudo printer is addressed just like a local printer, it is fully transparent  
to the users that the document is printed on a BSD printer and not on a local  
printer. The only difference to a local printer is the fact that print jobs cannot be  
administered after submission. Also, displaying the job queue is only possible  
to a certain extent as print jobs are considered to be not yet printed only as long  
as they are not yet transferred to the remote BSD printer spooler.  
If this functionality is required, access via the fast filter bsdis not sufficient. In  
this case, a gateway connection must be established (see section “Gateways”  
on page 213).  
7.2.2 Configuring printers for BSD Xprint V7.0  
If you want to provide access to a BSD printer, you must first define the fast filter  
bsdin the system and then assign it to a local printer configured specially for  
this purpose. This local pseudo printer then acts as a substitute for the real BSD  
printer. As soon as it receives a job, it passes it on to the specified BSD printer  
spooler where the job will later be printed.  
Proceed as follows:  
210  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interoperability  
Accessing BSD printers  
●
Make sure the fast filter bsdis already configured:  
xpshow -flt  
If the filter bsdis not displayed, you must first add it to the system (the filter  
is supplied with Xprint V7.0). Enter the following command:  
xpadd -flt bsd -tp FAST -cm bsd -op "LOGIN *=*" \  
"PRINTER *=*" "DOC-REF *=*" "COMMENT *=*" "TITLE *=*"  
●
Define the printer as you would a local printer, at the same time assigning to  
it the filter bsd:  
xpadd -dev bsd_printer -da pseudo_file -fl bsd\  
-ca "queue=remote_printer host=host_name" [-pc pcl] -aa  
For bsd_printer specify a unique name under which the BSD printer is to be  
known in the Xprint V7.0 domain.  
For pseudo_file specify any file name of an empty file instead of a real printer  
address. This file is required to control access to the print queue; it does not  
have anything to do with the actual print job. If necessary, configure the path.  
With the -caoption (administrator’s comment) you must specify the name of  
the BSD printer in the form queue=remote_printer and the name of the host to  
which the BSD printer is connected (host=host_name).  
If the name of the remote printer (remote_printer) is the same as that  
of the local pseudo printer (bsd_printer), “queue=remote_printer” need  
not be specified.  
i
You must separate these specifications with a blank. If the LPD service at  
the BSD system is defined at a different port than usual, this port number  
can also be defined here by additionally specifying an entry  
port=port_number.  
If required, specify for pcl a PCL defined in the system which corresponds to  
the BSD printer. If the required PCL does not yet exist, you can define it as  
described in the section “Adding a PCL” on page 180.  
Example  
You want to configure a new BSD PostScript printer BSD_PS at host host3. The  
fast filter bsd, however, is not yet configured in the system, and the printer is to  
be activated automatically each time Xprint V7.0 is started:  
xpadd -flt bsd -tp FAST -cm bsd -op "LOGIN *=*" \  
"PRINTER *=*" "DOC-REF *=*" "COMMENT *=*" "TITLE *=*"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
211  
Accessing BSD printers  
Interoperability  
xpadd -dev BSD_PS -da /var/tmp/PS1 -fl bsd \  
-ca "queue=PS1 host=host3" -pc POSTSCRIPT -aa  
Troubleshooting  
If your print jobs are rejected by the remote system, add "--compatible"in  
the comment field. This is necessary if the remote system is an ATT lpspooler.  
For example, to modify the remote printer BSD_PSaccordingly, use the following  
command:  
xpmod -dev BSD_PS -ca "queue=PS1 host=host3 --compatible"  
212  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Gateways  
7.3  
Gateways  
Gateways allow access to various other spooler systems: to other Xprint V7.0  
domains, to systems with BSD spoolers and to BS2000 systems on which the  
DPRINT spooler is installed. This section describes the characteristics of  
gateways and how they are configured.  
7.3.1 Gateway characteristics  
Gateways allow the bidirectional connection of an Xprint V7.0 domain with:  
–
other Xprint V7.0 domains  
– lpdspoolers in BSD-UNIX systems (e.g. SunOS®, Linux, Ultrix32®)  
– lpd daemons in Novell NetWare® servers, UNIX® SVR4 systems,  
Microsoft® Windows NT® servers, Microsoft® Windows 2000® servers etc.  
–
DPRINT spoolers in BS2000 systems  
This allows you to make the printers in remote Xprint V7.0 systems also  
available to users of the local Xprint V7.0 domain and, vice versa, the printers  
of the local Xprint V7.0 domain can be made available to users of remote  
spooler systems.  
7.3.2 Setting up a gateway connection  
This section first describes the general rules for and the basic procedure of  
configuring a gateway connection to another printer spooler. A detailed  
description of how to establish a gateway connection to another printer spooler  
can be found in the following sections:  
Type of gateway  
Description  
page 214  
page 219  
page 223  
connecting Xprint V7.0 and a BSD printer spooler  
connecting two Xprint V7.0 domains  
connecting Xprint V7.0 and a DPRINT printer spooler  
(BS2000)  
Table 28: Establishing a gateway connection  
Only the Xprint V7.0 administrator can configure gateways.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
213  
         
Gateways  
Interoperability  
To configure a gateway, you must first define the host of the local Xprint V7.0  
domain that is to be used as the gateway to the other printer spooler. For this  
purpose, you can use any host in the local Xprint V7.0 domain which has access  
to the physical connection to the target system. This host must be reliable,  
robust and fail-safe as the connection to the other printer spooler should always  
be available. First, a local gateway object is defined for this host.  
The local gateway is responsible for the physical connection to the remote  
printer spooler. For every logical connection to a host in another spooler system  
it is also necessary to define what is called a partner gateway. The partner  
gateway is assigned to a local gateway and thus to a physical connection.  
Several partner gateways may be defined for access to several remote printer  
spoolers which all use the same local gateway. This however requires that all  
the remote printer spoolers be of the same type (e.g. BSD).  
As soon as the connection between these two gateways has been defined and  
the local gateway has been activated, the connection can be used for printing.  
However, in this case, printing is subject to specific restrictions which depend  
on the configuration of the partner gateway.  
To be able to successfully establish a gateway connection to a partner  
system, it is essential that you make some configurations on the partner  
system too:  
i
–
–
So that users can print on the remote system via the gateway, the  
remote system must grant the required permission.  
If users of the remote system are to print on the local Xprint V7.0  
system, the local system must be declared there.  
In any case these measures must be taken in accordance with the  
descriptions in the relevant system documentation.  
If the other printer spoolers also are to access the local printers via the gateway,  
the partner gateway must additionally be registered as an allowed gateway at  
the local gateway. All allowed gateways allow the corresponding remote hosts  
access to the resources of the local Xprint V7.0 domain.  
7.3.3 Gateways to BSD spoolers  
As with the fast filter bsd, configuring a gateway to a BSD spooler also allows  
users of the local Xprint V7.0 domain to access printers defined in the remote  
BSD spooler. Unlike jobs printed with bsd,print jobs printed via gateways can  
still be administered after submission.  
214  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Interoperability  
Gateways  
The following figure shows the basic structure of such a gateway connection  
and the possibilities it offers:  
Figure 14: Structure of a gateway connection  
Requirements  
Configuring a gateway to a BSD spooler in a remote system requires that an  
LPD spooler be active on the remote host to which the gateway connection is  
established.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
Gateways  
Interoperability  
Defining the local gateway  
The local gateway is defined as follows on a host which, if possible, should have  
a constant connection to the BSD spooler to which the connection is to be  
established:  
xpadd -gtw local_gw -tp LOCAL -ho local_host -ga 515 \  
-np TCP -pp BSD [-aa] [-op option_list]  
This command configures a local gateway named local_gw which administers  
the physical connection to the BSD system. For local_gw any name can be  
used; it does make sense, however, to use a name which indicates on which  
host the gateway is configured. With the option -ho local_host you specify the  
name of the host which is to act as the gateway to the BSD system from the local  
Xprint V7.0 domain.  
The option -ga 515specifies that the port 515is to be used for accessing the  
BSD print services. If the BSD system uses a different port number for the print  
services (see /etc/servicesfile on the BSD host), you must specify the  
relevant port number here.  
The port number is very important as no two gateways with the same port  
number can run at the same time on a system.  
i
The option -np TCPdefines that the TCP/IP protocol is used. No other protocol  
can be specified. For the connection to BSD printer spoolers the print protocol  
must be selected with the option -pp BSD. With the -aaoption you can define  
that the gateway is activated automatically each time Xprint V7.0 is started.  
The option -opoption_list can be used to adjust the behavior of the local  
gateway. The following options/values are possible:  
"MODE:COMPATIBLE"  
This option is used to send requests to a BSD server. It requires the local  
gateway to act as a SUN BSD lpclient. This option must be specified if  
jobs are rejected by remote BSD lpddaemons for no obvious reason.  
For example: for all local gateways defined in "-bl", the option  
"MODE=COMPATIBLE"must be set if the partner gateway represents an  
ATT lpspooler system.  
"PI=<first_port_number_client>"  
"PA=<last_port_number_client>"  
These two options are important for receiving requests from remote BSD  
clients. The two values define the port range the remote BSD client must  
use for sending jobs to the local gateway or receiving jobs from it. Default  
values are "PI=721"and "PA=731".  
216  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Gateways  
“GTW_START_PAGE=YES/NO"  
provides a way to enforce ("YES") or suppress ("NO") the header page.  
“GTW_SEPARATOR_PAGE=YES/NO"  
provides a way to enforce ("YES") or suppress ("NO") the separator  
sheet.  
“GTW_END_PAGE=YES/NO"  
provides a way to enforce ("YES") or suppress ("NO") the trailer page.  
Other interesting options are described in the Reference Manual.  
Troubleshooting  
If requests from a remote BSD client are rejected by the local gateway, the  
following values must be used:  
-op "PI=0" "PA=0123"  
Therefore the safest way to define a local BSD gateway is to use the  
following command:  
i
xpadd -gtw ... -op "PI=0" "PA=1023" "MODE=COMPATIBLE"  
Defining the partner gateway  
A separate partner gateway must now be specified for each connection to a  
BSD printer spooler. The partner gateway is defined using the following  
command:  
xpadd -gtw bsd_partner -tp PARTNER -ho bsd_host -ga 515 \  
-bl local_gw -np TCP -pp BSD [-op option_list]  
This command configures a partner gateway named bsd_partner which admin-  
isters the logical connection to a special BSD printer spooler. For bsd_partner  
any name can be used; it does make sense, however, to use a name which  
indicates to which host the gateway is configured. With the option -ho bsd_host  
you specify the name of the remote host on which the LPD daemon process of  
the BSD spooler runs.  
The option -ga 515specifies that the port 515is to be used for accessing the  
BSD print services. If the BSD system uses a different port number for the print  
services (see /etc/servicesfile on the BSD host), you must specify the  
relevant port number here.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
217  
Gateways  
Interoperability  
The partner gateway must be assigned with the -bl local_gw option to the local  
gateway administering the physical connection. local_gw can be an individual  
gateway or a list of local gateways. In the latter case, the first active gateway in  
the list is used to send a request to the partner gateway. The option -np TCP  
defines that the TCP/IP protocol is used. No other protocol can be specified. In  
addition, the print protocol must be selected with the -pp BSDoption.  
The option -opoption_list can be used to define the behavior of the local  
gateway toward the corresponding contact gateway. Here the options  
"PI=..."and "PA=..."are available. Default values are "PI=721"and  
"PA=731". This port range is used by the local gateway to establish the  
connection to the BSD partner.  
The safest way to define a partner gateway is not to use the -opoption  
but to accept the default values.  
i
Xprint V7.0 also offers the option of addressing a number of clients via a partner  
gateway. In this case, use the following command:  
xpadd -gtw bsd_group -pp BSD -tp PARTNER -ga 515 \  
-ho bsd_host -bl local_gw -oh pattern  
For pattern specify a string with replacement characters. These can be either the  
asterisk (*, representing any string) or the question mark (?, representing any  
character). This string is used for the host list in the /etc/hostsfile, i.e.:  
if the option "-op d241p*"is specified, the partner gateway represents all the  
hosts in the /etc/hostslist which begin with d241p.  
Allowing print jobs to be submitted by the BSD spooler  
If you want to allow users of the BSD spooler to submit print jobs for local  
printers via the gateway, the partner gateway must be defined as an allowed  
gateway at the local gateway. To do this, use the following command:  
xpmod -gtw local_gw -ag+ bsd_partner  
With this command, the partner gateway bsd_partner is assigned to the local  
gateway local_gw as an allowed gateway. Only the BSD systems which are  
connected to the local Xprint V7.0 domain via allowed partner gateways are  
allowed to use its print services.  
You can also define all partner gateways as allowed gateways by using the  
keyword ALL:  
xpmod -gtw local_gw -ag ALL  
218  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Gateways  
In this case only the value ALLneeds to be specified with the -agoption.  
Therefore, the +character is not specified after the -agoption in the example  
above.  
Please note that when the option -ag ALLis used, any partner gateway  
added is automatically given the permission to contact the local gateway.  
i
Activating the gateway connection  
To be able to print via the gateways, the corresponding local gateway must be  
activated. Activation with the xpchangecommand can be effected on several  
levels: you can allow only the export of print jobs via the assigned partner  
gateways, only the import from these gateways, or both. The following  
command allows both the import and export of print jobs:  
xpchange -gtw local_gw  
If only the import of print jobs is to be allowed, you can use the -gi ONoption;  
to only allow the export, use the -go ONoption.  
Example  
To configure a gateway connection from the local host nashua to the lpdspooler  
of the BSD-UNIX system picasso:  
xpadd -gtw GTW_nashua -tp LOCAL -ga 515 -ho hudson -np TCP \  
-pp BSD -aa  
xpadd -gtw GTW_picasso -tp PARTNER -ho picasso -ga 515 \  
-bl GTW_nashua -np TCP -pp BSD  
xpmod -gtw GTW_nashua -ag+ GTW_picasso  
xpchange -gtw GTW_nashua  
7.3.4 Gateways to other Xprint V7.0 domains  
Xprint V7.0 also allows you to establish gateway connections between  
independent Xprint V7.0 domains. This makes it possible to distribute the  
administration tasks in fairly large networks, for example at department level by  
assigning each department its own Xprint V7.0 domain with an Xprint V7.0  
administrator of its own.  
A connection between the individual domains can then be established via  
gateways.  
The following figure shows the basic structure of such a gateway connection  
and the possibilities it offers:  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
219  
 
Gateways  
Interoperability  
Figure 15: Gateway connection to another printer domain  
Defining the local gateway  
The local gateway is defined as follows on a host which, if possible, should have  
a constant connection to the other Xprint V7.0 domain to which the connection  
is to be established:  
xpadd -gtw local_gw -tp LOCAL -ho local_host \  
-ga gtw_port -np TCP -pp GIP2 [-aa]  
This command configures a local gateway named local_gw which administers  
the physical connection to the other Xprint V7.0 domain. For local_gw any  
name(s) can be used; it does make sense, however, to use names which  
indicate on which host the gateways are configured. With the option -ho  
local_host you specify the name of the host which is to act as the gateway from  
the local Xprint V7.0 domain to the other Xprint V7.0 domain.  
220  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Gateways  
The option -ga gtw_port specifies which TCP/IP port number is to be used. The  
default is 9999.  
The port number is very important as no two gateways with the same port  
number can run on a system at any one time.  
i
The option -np TCPdefines that the TCP/IP protocol is used. No other protocol  
can be specified. For the connection to other Xprint V7.0 domains the print  
protocol must be selected with the option -pp GIP2. With the -aaoption you can  
define that the gateway is activated automatically each time Xprint V7.0 is  
started.  
Defining the partner gateway  
A separate partner gateway must now be specified for each connection to  
another Xprint V7.0 domain. This partner gateway defines a logical connection  
to another host on another Xprint V7.0 domain. On this host, a gateway for the  
connection to the local gateway must also be configured (mirrored configu-  
ration). The partner gateway is configured using the following command:  
xpadd -gtw spool_partner -tp PARTNER -ho spool_host -ga gtw_port \  
-bl local_gw -np TCP  
This command configures a partner gateway named spool_partner which admin-  
isters the logical connection to a special Xprint V7.0 domain. For spool_partner  
any name can be used; it does make sense, however, to use a name which  
indicates to which Xprint V7.0 domain the gateway is configured. With the option  
-ho spool_host you specify the name of the remote host on which the gateway  
to the other Xprint V7.0 domain is configured.  
The option -ga gtw_port specifies which TCP/IP port number is to be used. This  
number must correspond to that of the local gateway of the other Xprint V7.0  
domain.  
The partner gateway must be assigned with the -bl local_gw option to the local  
gateway administering the physical connection. local_gw can represent a single  
gateway or a list of local gateways. The option -np TCPdefines that the TCP/IP  
protocol is used. No other protocol can be specified.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
221  
Gateways  
Interoperability  
Allowing print jobs to be submitted by users of the other Xprint V7.0  
domain  
If you want to allow users of the other Xprint V7.0 domain to submit print jobs  
for local printers via the gateway, the partner gateway must be defined as an  
allowed gateway at the local gateway. To do this, use the following command:  
xpmod -gtw local_gw -ag+ spool_partner  
With this command, the partner gateway spool_partner is assigned to the local  
gateway local_gw as an allowed gateway. Only the Xprint V7.0 domains which  
are connected to the local Xprint V7.0 domain via allowed partner gateways are  
allowed to use its print services.  
You can also define all partner gateways as allowed gateways by using the  
keyword ALL:  
xpmod -gtw local_gw -ag ALL  
In this case only the value ALLneeds to be specified with the -agoption.  
Therefore, the +character is not specified after the -agoption in the example  
above.  
Please note that when the option -ag ALLis used, any partner gateway  
added is automatically granted permission to access the local gateway.  
i
Activating the gateway connection  
To be able to print via the gateways, the corresponding local gateway must be  
activated. Activation with the xpchangecommand can be effected on several  
levels: you can allow only the export of print jobs via the assigned partner  
gateways, only the import from these gateways, or both. The following  
command allows both the import and export of print jobs:  
xpchange -gtw local_gw  
If only the import of print jobs is to be allowed, you can use the -gi ONoption;  
to only allow the export, use the -go ONoption.  
Restrictions of gateways to other Xprint V7.0 domains  
Working with gateways to other Xprint V7.0 domains is subject to certain restric-  
tions which the users of these gateways must be familiar with:  
–
The -rmoption of the xpadd -jobcommand cannot be used.  
222  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Gateways  
Example  
To configure a gateway connection from the local host hudson to host purpleof  
another Xprint V7.0 domain:  
xpadd -gtw GTW_hudson -tp LOCAL -ho hudson -np TCP \  
-pp GIP2 - ga 5300 -aa  
xpadd -gtw GTW_purple -tp PARTNER -ho purple -ga 5300 \  
-bl GTW_hudson -np TCP -pp GIP2  
xpmod -gtw GTW_hudson -ag GTW_purple  
xpchange -gtw GTW_hudson  
7.3.5 Gateways to DPRINT spoolers  
Gateways to DPRINT spoolers allow the users of the local Xprint V7.0 domain  
to access printers connected to BS2000 mainframes on which the spooler  
system DPRINT is installed. Vice versa, they can also be used to allow users of  
such BS2000 mainframes to access the printers of the local Xprint V7.0 domain.  
The following figure shows the basic structure of such a gateway connection  
and the possibilities it offers:  
Figure 16: Gateway connection to DPRINT spoolers  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
223  
 
Gateways  
Interoperability  
Requirements  
If a gateway to a DPRINT spooler in a BS2000 system is to be configured, the  
software openFT must be installed on the host for which the local gateway is to  
be configured. For the openFT rootuser, OBS, IBRand IBPmust be set to the  
value 100 (see openFT command ftmoda).  
Defining the local gateway  
If a local gateway to another Xprint V7.0 domain already exists on a host which  
meets the requirements mentioned above, this gateway can also be used for  
connections to DPRINT spoolers.  
The local gateway is configured in exactly the same way as a gateway to  
another Xprint V7.0 domain:  
xpadd -gtw local_gw -tp LOCAL -ho local_host \  
-ga gtw_port -np protocol -pp GIP2 [-aa]  
This command configures a local gateway named local_gw which administers  
the physical connection to the DPRINT spooler. For local_gw any name can be  
used; it does make sense, however, to use a name which indicates on which  
host the gateway is configured. With the option -ho local_host you specify the  
name of the host which is to act as the gateway from the local Xprint V7.0  
domain to the DPRINT spooler.  
In the case of a TCP/IP connection, the option -ga gtw_port specifies which  
TCP/IP port number is to be used. The default is 9999.  
The port number is very important as no two gateways with the same port  
number can run at the same time on a system.  
i
The option -npprotocol defines whether the TCP/IP protocol (TCP) or the ISO  
(ISO) protocol is used. The ISO protocol is only available for users. For the  
connection to DPRINT spoolers the print protocol must be selected with the  
option -pp GIP2. With the -aaoption you can define that the gateway is activated  
automatically each time Xprint V7.0 is started.  
Defining the partner gateway  
The partner gateway is defined as follows:  
xpadd -gtw dprint_partner -tp PARTNER -ga port -bl local_gw \  
-on original_name -oh original_host -op "FT=tns_entry"  
224  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Gateways  
This command configures a partner gateway named dprint_partner which  
administers the logical connection to a special DPRINT spooler. For  
dprint_partner any name can be used; it does make sense, however, to use a  
name which indicates to which DPRINT spooler the gateway is configured. With  
the option -oh dprint_host you specify the name of the remote host on which the  
gateway to the DPRINT spooler is configured. Additionally, you must specify  
with -on original_name the name of the DPRINT gateway on the corresponding  
BS2000 system if it is not identical with the gateway name dprint_partner. In  
practice, original_name and dprint_host are identical; this is the BCAM host name  
of the BS2000 system in capital letters.  
In this case, the definition of the partner gateway also requires the specification  
of the additional option -op "FT=tns_entry", which specifies the TNS entry of the  
FT service on the host for the partner gateway:  
The option -ga port specifies which TCP/IP port number is to be used. This  
number must correspond to that of the DPRINT gateway of the DPRINT  
spooler.  
The partner gateway (or a list of partner gateways) must be assigned with the  
-bl local_gw option to the local gateway administering the physical connection.  
Adjusting the local Xprint V7.0 domain  
If the gateway is configured in such a way that the users of the DPRINT system  
can also use the printers of the local Xprint V7.0 domain, some adjustments are  
required at the local Xprint V7.0 domain, as DPRINT users might print  
documents with the EBCDIC character set.  
For this reason, a slow filter must be added to the Xprint V7.0 configuration for  
every possible content type the DPRINT users might use for EBCDIC  
documents.  
In any case, at least the following filter is required:  
xpadd -flt filter_name -it EBCDIC_ EBCDIC_COMPATIBLE \  
-ot ’xpshow -pcl -di ´-id´’ -cm ebcdic2ascii \  
-op "pcl *=*" "COMMENT *=1"  
This command defines a filter with any unique name filter_name for the DPRINT  
format EBCDIC_COMPATIBLE. As the output format for this filter all defined PCLs  
are specified. For any other document types you might have to define other  
filters using this procedure (e.g. EDCDIC_POSTSCRIPTto POSTSCRIPT):  
xpadd -flt ... -it EBCDIC_POSTSCRIPT -ot POSTSCRIPT\  
-cm ebcdic2ascii -op "pcl *=*" "COMMENT *=1"  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
225  
Gateways  
Interoperability  
Restrictions of gateways to DPRINT spoolers  
Wildcards (* or ?) are not allowed but you can specify  
xpshow -dev dprint_gateway!without a printer name and  
xpshow -dgr dprint_gateway!without a printer group name. In this case all  
corresponding resources are displayed.  
If information on a printer of a DPRINT spooler is displayed, you should be  
aware that some of the requested items of information are not supported by the  
DPRINT spooler. The displayed values for this information are invalid (amongst  
others this applies to the information on Keep connection, Open retry time,  
Automatic activation, Polling enabledand Priority).  
When defining a print job for a DPRINT printer with xpadd -job,the following  
must be observed:  
For every job a document type must be specified with the -ctoption. The  
document type PLAIN_TEXTrepresents an ASCII text which contains  
only the control characters CR, LFand FF. This data type replaces the  
i
value SIMPLEwhich is not supported under DPRINT.  
Examples  
To configure a gateway connection between the local host hudsonand the  
DPRINT spooler of the BS2000 system D255S017:  
xpadd -gtw GTW_hudson -tp LOCAL -ga 5200 -ho hudson -np TCP \  
-pp GIP2 -aa  
xpadd -gtw GTW_S017 -tp PARTNER -ho d255s017 -ga 5200 \  
-on D255S017 -oh D255S017 -bl GTW_hudson -np TCP \  
-pp GIP2 -op "FT=FT25517"  
xpmod -gtw GTW_hudson -ag GTW_S017  
xpchange -gtw GTW_hudson  
Please note that the host hudsonrunning the gateway GTW_hudsonmust  
be a Outputware host which has openFT installed. Furthermore, the  
option  
i
-op"FT=xxxxx"must be specified when defining the partner gateway  
GTW_SO17(DPRINT), where xxxxx is the name of the FT partner, in this  
case FT25517. The value xxxxx depends on the configuration of openFT.  
226  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Administering gateways  
7.4  
Administering gateways  
This section contains a brief description of the most important aspects of admin-  
istering existing gateways.  
The following table serves as a guide to the possible tasks involved in adminis-  
tering gateways:  
If you want to...  
Read...  
add another connection to an existing section “Configuring an additional  
local gateway (only for Xprint V7.0  
administrators)  
connection from an existing gateway”  
on page 227  
delete a gateway (only for Xprint V7.0 section “Deleting a gateway  
administrators) connection” on page 229  
deactivate a gateway (only for Xprint section “Deactivating a gateway” on  
V7.0 administrators, subrootand  
page 230  
root)  
reactivate a gateway  
section “Activating a gateway” on  
page 232  
obtain information on a gateway  
Table 29: Administering gateways  
section “Obtaining information on a  
gateway” on page 233  
7.4.1 Configuring an additional connection from an  
existing gateway  
Once you have configured a connection from a local gateway to a remote  
partner gateway, you can configure additional connections to other partner  
gateways from the local gateway, provided those partner gateways use the  
same network protocol (TCPor ISO). ISO is only available for users.  
Furthermore, optimum functionality is only ensured if the print protocol is the  
same (GIP2or BSD). It is possible, for example, to configure another connection  
to another BSD-UNIX system from a local gateway for which a connection to a  
remote BSD-UNIX system already exists.  
Also for configuring additional connections of a local gateway to other  
partner gateways you must be logged in as the Xprint V7.0 administrator.  
Only this administrator has the required privileges.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
 
Administering gateways  
Interoperability  
To configure additional connections to other gateways, proceed as follows:  
●
First check whether there is a local gateway to which you can add the new  
connection:  
xpshow -gtw -scl "-tp LOCAL -np protocol -pp gateway_type"  
This command returns a list of all the local gateways of the type gateway_type  
using the network protocol protocol.  
●
●
Then define the new partner gateway with the xpadd -gtw command, as  
described earlier in this section for the individual gateway types (see section  
“Gateways” on page 213).  
If you want to allow the partner gateway to print on printers of the local Xprint  
V7.0 domain via the local gateway, deactivate the local gateway:  
xpchange -gtw gateway -st NOT_ACTIVE  
You only need to deactivate the local gateway if you want to modify the list  
of allowed gateways. This is not necessary if you have defined the local  
gateway with -ag ALLor if the you do not want to make the new gateway an  
allowed gateway (define it only for sending requests), e.g.:  
xpmod -gtw gateway -ag+ partner_gateway  
Then reactivate the local gateway with the following command:  
xpchange -gtw gateway  
●
Example  
To set up an additional connection from the local gateway nashuato the lpd  
spooler of the BSD-UNIX system picasso:  
xpshow -gtw -scl "-tp LOCAL -np TCP -pp BSD"  
only returns the gateway GTW_nashua  
xpadd -gtw GTW_picasso -tp PARTNER -ho picasso -ga 515 \  
-bl GTW_nashua -np TCP -pp BSD  
xpchange -gtw GTW_nashua -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -gtw GTW_nashua -ag+ GTW_picasso  
xpchange -gtw GTW_nashua  
228  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Interoperability  
Administering gateways  
7.4.2 Deleting a gateway connection  
A gateway connection that is no longer needed, for example because the  
remote partner computer no longer exists, can be deleted. If you only want to  
stop the use of a gateway connection temporarily, you can deactivate it  
completely or only in one direction (see section “Deactivating a gateway” on  
page 230).  
A gateway can only be deleted by the Xprint V7.0 administrator. You must  
first log in accordingly.  
i
●
If you want to delete a partner gateway, you must first check whether the  
gateway to be deleted is registered as an allowed gateway at the responsible  
local gateway:  
xpshow -gtw local_gw -diL  
If this is the case, deactivate the local gateway, remove the partner gateway  
from the list of allowed gateways and reactivate the local gateway:  
xpchange -gtw local_gw -stN  
xpmod -gtw local_gw -ag- gateway  
xpchange -gtw local_gw  
●
To finally delete the gateway, use the following command:  
xpdel -gtw gateway  
where gateway is the name of the gateway to be deleted. If gateway is a local  
gateway, it must be deactivated before deletion.  
Bear in mind that a complete gateway connection consists of two  
gateways - the local gateway and the partner gateway. If you want to  
delete the connection completely, you must delete both gateways. To find  
out which gateways are defined, use the xpshow -gtwcommand (see  
section “Obtaining information on a gateway” on page 233).  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
229  
   
Administering gateways  
Examples  
Interoperability  
–
To delete the only connection originating from the gateway GTW_hudsonto the  
partner gateway GTW_purple:  
xpchange -gtw GTW_hudson -st NOT_ACTIVE  
xpmod -gtw GTW_hudson -ag- GTW_purple  
xpdel -gtw GTW_purple  
xpdel -gtw GTW_hudson  
–
To delete a gateway connection from the gateway GTW_nashuato the partner  
gateway GTW_picasso, but maintaining the connections to other partner  
gateways:  
xpchange -gtw GTW_nashua -stN  
xpmod -gtw GTW_nashua -ag- GTW_picasso  
xpdel -gtw GTW_picasso  
xpchange -gtw GTW_nashua  
7.4.3 Deactivating a gateway  
If a local gateway is to be modified or temporarily not used, you can lock it  
against further use by deactivating it. There are three possible ways of doing  
this:  
–
You can deactivate a local gateway completely so that no gateway  
connection (in either direction) can be used.  
–
You can deactivate the passing on of print jobs to the other printer spooler  
or only the use of the gateway by the other printer spooler (one direction).  
This affects all partner systems.  
–
You can deactivate only the access from one partner gateway to a local  
gateway. This can prevent a specific remote system from sending requests  
to the local Xprint V7.0 system.  
To deactivate a local gateway, you must be logged in as the administrator.  
i
230  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interoperability  
Administering gateways  
Deactivating a local gateway completely  
●
Use the following command to completely deactivate a gateway:  
xpchange -gtw gateway -st NOT_ACTIVE  
where gateway is the local gateway to be deactivated. This deactivates the  
connections to all remote partner gateways connected to the local gateway.  
The option -st NOT_ACTIVEmay be abbreviated to -stN.  
Once the gateway is deactivated, you can modify or delete it.  
Deactivating the export of jobs from the local Xprint V7.0 domain  
You only want to deactivate the export of jobs from the local system to a partner  
system via a local gateway.  
●
To deactivate the export of jobs, enter the following command:  
xpchange -gtw gateway -go OFF  
Deactivating the import of jobs via a local gateway  
If you want to temporarily deny access to the resources of the local Xprint V7.0  
domain for all partner gateways, you can deactivate the import of jobs for the  
local gateway.  
●
To deactivate the import of jobs via the local gateway, enter the following  
command:  
xpchange -gtw gateway -gi OFF  
Deactivating the import of jobs via one gateway connection only  
If you want to temporarily deny access to the resources of the local Xprint V7.0  
domain to only one of several partner gateways, you can remove it from the list  
of allowed gateways of the responsible local gateway. Proceed as follows:  
●
●
●
Deactivate the local gateway to which the partner gateway is assigned:  
xpchange -gtw local_gw -stN  
Remove the partner gateway from the list of allowed gateways:  
xpmod -gtw local_gw -ag- partner_gw  
Reactivate the local gateway:  
xpchange -gtw local_gw  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
Administering gateways  
Interoperability  
7.4.4 Activating a gateway  
Three points are important for activating a gateway:  
–
–
–
Activation of the local gateway itself. Only an active gateway can be used by  
local and remote users.  
Setting up a backward link from a partner gateway to the local gateway.  
A connection between two gateways requires such a backward link.  
Allowing a partner gateway access. Only if a partner gateway is granted  
access explicitly can users of the partner system access the local resources.  
Only the Xprint V7.0 administrator, subrootor rootcan activate a  
gateway. You must first log in accordingly.  
i
Activating the local gateway  
●
To completely activate a gateway, use the following command:  
xpchange -gtw gateway  
where gateway is the gateway to be activated. This also activates all the  
connections between remote partner gateways and the local gateway.  
Activating job export mode for a local gateway  
You can activate a local gateway such that it can process the requests of the  
allowed partner gateways, proceed as follows.  
●
Activate the connection using the following command:  
xpchange -gtw gateway -go ON  
Activating job import mode for a local gateway  
If you want to grant a partner gateway access to the resources of the local Xprint  
V7.0 domain, you must enter the partner gateway as an allowed gateway on the  
local gateway.  
●
Reactivate the local gateway using the following command:  
xpchange -gtw gateway -gi ON  
232  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interoperability  
Administering gateways  
7.4.5 Obtaining information on a gateway  
As an administrator, you can display the status and the definition of local or  
partner gateways.  
Displaying the definition of gateways  
●
Information on the definition of gateways can be obtained with the following  
command:  
xpshow -gtw [selection] [-di display]  
If selection is not specified, the command refers to all the gateways in the  
local Xprint V7.0 system. Otherwise you can either specify a list of the  
gateways on which you want information to be displayed, or you can use the  
-scl“selection_criteria_list” option (see section “Selection criteria list” on  
page 266 in the Appendix) to define a list of criteria according to which the  
gateways are selected.  
With the option -didisplay you can determine the scope of the display as for  
all the other Xprint V7.0 objects.  
Displaying the status of local gateways  
●
You can display the status (active or not active) of a local gateway with the  
following command:  
xpstat -gtw [selection] [-di display]  
For selection you have the same options as described under the xpshow  
command (see above).  
Displaying the status of partner gateways  
●
You can display the status of a partner gateway if the corresponding local  
gateway is in the ACTIVEstate with gateway_outenabled. For partner  
gateways, all the fields are left empty except the Statefield. Use the  
following command:  
xpstat -gtw [selection] [-di display]  
For selection you have the same options as described under the xpshow  
command (see above). When the identifier list is empty or contains only *  
then only LOCALgateways will be looked for. In other cases, both LOCALand  
PARTNERgateways will be looked for.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Installing Xprint V7.0  
This chapter describes how to install and configure Xprint V7.0 on a system.  
8.1  
Considerations  
Before installing Xprint V7.0 you should define the individual parameters of the  
spooler configuration.  
If you are not familiar with Xprint V7.0, you should first read the chapter “Intro-  
duction to Xprint V7.0” starting on page 5 to get acquainted with the concepts  
of Xprint V7.0 and to understand the basic terms used in this section. In  
particular you should first define the following configuration parameters:  
–
–
Number and names of the hosts planned for your Xprint V7.0 system.  
Hierarchy of the hosts in your system (i.e. which host you want to set up as  
the master host and which hosts as potential masters, slaves or parasite  
hosts).  
–
Number of servers and supervisors required for controlling all the printers,  
and the hosts on which these are to be set up.  
Be aware that Xprint V7.0 is a licensed product. Its usage is protected by a  
software key. If you do not have this key at installation time, you can still start  
the product and use it with the full functionality during an evaluation period. At  
the end of this period, if no license has been installed, you will no longer be able  
to use the product at all. See the section “Product licensing” on page 243 for  
more details.  
For more information on installing the product and any last-minute modifi-  
cations, refer to the Release Notes delivered with Xprint V7.0.  
i
8.2  
Configuring the local area network (LAN)  
You should configure your LAN before installing Xprint V7.0, otherwise you may  
encounter problems when using Xprint V7.0.  
The following instructions assume that you have experience in adminis-  
tering local area networks; you should also know how to update the  
entries in the relevant files of your LAN software. If you have questions  
on any of these points, refer to the documentation for your LAN software.  
i
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
235  
           
Setting the language for the Xprint V7.0 system  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
To configure a network of type TCP/IP you only need to add an entry to the file  
/etc/serviceson each host in the network. This entry must have the identifier  
Xprint V7.0_db; the connection number must be the same on all hosts:  
Xprint V7.0_db 5999/tcp # Xprint V7.0 , the distributed print  
service  
The files /etc/hostsand /etc/servicesshould at least have the access  
rights -r--r--r--; otherwise Xprint V7.0 might not run smoothly.  
8.3  
Setting the language for the Xprint V7.0  
system  
The Xprint V7.0 NLS message files are located in the directory  
/var/spool/Xprint/config/MSG. The subdirectories Enand Decontain the  
messages in English and German. To select the desired language for the Xprint  
V7.0 system, the shell variable LANGshould be set to the correct value (Enor De).  
In addition, the complete path of the directory holding the Xprint V7.0 message  
files (/var/spool/Xprint/config/MSG/%l/%N.cat) should be entered in the shell  
variable NLSPATH.  
236  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Installation (new)  
8.4  
Installation (new)  
Xprint V7.0 is delivered on a data medium (CD-ROM or magnetic tape  
cartridge) which contains several packages. Depending on the platform, two  
installation procedures are possible: pkgaddand cpio. The following figure  
provides an overview of the installation process:  
Figure 17: Installation procedures  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
237  
 
Installation (new)  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
8.4.1 Installing with cpio  
To install Xprint V7.0, you require a minimum of 15 megabytes free storage  
space. Also, the Xprint V7.0 database requires additional storage space the size  
of which directly depends on the contents of the database (the number of  
servers, printers, PCLs etc.).  
To install the Xprint V7.0 software, proceed as follows:  
●
log in as root, change to the /tmp directory and enter the following command:  
cpio -icvBd Install < <device>  
Where device represents the path of the device from which you install the  
software, i.e. the pathname of the special file of the magnetic tape drive or  
of the CD-ROM drive.  
●
Enter the following command:  
/tmp/Install `pwd`  
Then the Xprint V7.0 directory is created in which the entire software is going  
to be installed.  
Xprint V7.0 can also be installed in another directory. In this case you  
should create a link between the actual Xprint V7.0 directory and the  
/var/spool/Xprintdirectory.  
i
In the case of installations with cpio, DBinstallmust be called manually and  
there is no automatic configuration of printers.  
8.4.2 Installing with pkgadd  
The pkgaddcommand provides another way of installing Xprint V7.0. In the  
case of this command, the installation procedure is menu-driven, you only need  
to follow the instructions or select one of the options offered by the program.  
Start the installation with the following command:  
pkgadd -d <device_name>/Xprint V7.0.pkg  
device_name represents the identifier of the device from which you install the  
software, i.e. the identifier of the magnetic tape drive or of the CD-ROM drive.  
238  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Installation (new)  
8.4.3 Installing with sd method  
After inserting the media in the correct device, enter the following command and  
just follow the guided dialogue:  
swinstall  
In case of migration from earlier version, it is suggested to take a backup of the  
current DB before starting the installation.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
239  
 
Installation (new)  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Initializing the Xprint V7.0 database  
To be able to work correctly, Xprint V7.0 requires a database.  
This database can be initialized automatically as part of the Xprint V7.0 instal-  
lation process. The user is asked whether he/she wants a database to be  
installed or not. If the user responds with yes, he/she will be asked whether the  
database is to be installed in any case or only if an already existing database  
has been found to be defective.  
If an initialization is started even though there is an old database, this is backed  
up in the directory DB.backupin any case, no matter if defective or not.  
To restore such a backup database, you must first deactivate the Xprint V7.0  
system. Then you must delete the directory config/DBand rename the directory  
config/DB.backupto config/DB.  
Automatic configuration of printers  
Xprint V7.0 offers the option of having printers configured automatically during  
installation of the packages. If you select this option, you will be asked to select  
one or more printers from a menu in the course of the installation process. To  
find out which devices are supported, see the section “Supported printers and  
PCLs” in the Reference Manual.  
In the case of installations with cpio, DBinstallmust be called manually and  
there is no automatic configuration of printers.  
240  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Installation (users only)  
8.5  
Installation (users only)  
Xprint V7.0 is delivered on a data medium (CD-ROM, magnetic tape cartridge)  
which contains several packages. These packages are installed with the pkgadd  
command. The following figure provides an overview of the installation process:  
Figure 18: Installation process (Reliant UNIX users)  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
241  
 
Installation (users only)  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
8.5.1 Installation with pkgadd  
The pkgadd command provides a menu-driven installation procedure; you only  
need to follow the instructions or select one of the options offered by the  
program.  
Start the installation with the following command:  
pkgadd -d <device_name>  
device_name represents the identifier of the device from which you install the  
software, i.e. the identifier of the magnetic tape drive. To install Xprint V7.0 from  
CD-ROM, use the system administration interface sysadm.  
Initializing the Xprint V7.0 database  
To be able to work correctly, Xprint V7.0 requires a database.  
This database can be initialized automatically as part of the Xprint V7.0 instal-  
lation process. The user is asked whether he/she wants a database to be  
installed or not. If the response is yes, he/she will be asked whether the  
database is to be installed in any case or only if an already existing database  
has been found to be defective.  
If an initialization is started even though there is an old database, this old  
database is backed up in the directory DB.backupwhether it is defective or not.  
To restore such a backup database, you must first deactivate the Xprint V7.0  
system. Then you must delete the directory config/DBand rename the directory  
config/DB.backupto config/DB.  
Automatic configuration of printers  
Xprint V7.0 allows you to have printers configured automatically during instal-  
lation of the packages. If you select this option, you will be asked to select one  
or more printers from a menu in the course of the installation process. To find  
out which devices are supported, see the section “Predefined printers and  
PCLs” in the Reference Manual.  
242  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Installation (users only)  
8.5.2 Product licensing  
The execution and some features of Xprint V7.0 are protected by a license key.  
When you have installed Xprint V7.0 you can use its full functionality without a  
key for an evaluation period. At the end of this period, Xprint V7.0 will become  
unusable unless a valid key has been installed.  
8.5.3 Types of licenses  
Different types of licenses can be supplied, depending on the Xprint V7.0  
entities you need to configure on your host, the number of devices to be  
controlled, or the extra features you wish to use.  
Basic licenses  
The basic licenses are the following:  
●
●
●
Xprint V7.0 Local  
Xprint V7.0 runs on a single host and not in a domain. This license level  
includes all the interfaces (including Mercator and the API), the printing  
services (possibility of configuring servers and supervisors) and the  
attachment of BSD Printers (BSD fast filter) on one isolated host. Gateways  
only support incoming requests from Wprint. Any other interdomain  
operation requires the Net Server license (see below). Xprint V7.0 Local is  
basically limited to a maximum of 2 devices, but device upgrade licenses can  
be added to increase this limit.  
Xprint V7.0 Net Client  
This level offers all the Xprint V7.0 interfaces (including Mercator and the  
API). It does not include the possibility of configuring devices on the host.  
Xprint V7.0 Net Client hosts can only be configured with SLAVEor PARASITE  
responsibility. This does not prevent the administration of the Xprint V7.0  
domain from a Net Client, it merely prevents the host from becoming master  
of the database. Net Clients can submit jobs to other domains. Gateways  
configured on an Xprint V7.0 Net Client can only accept requests from  
Wprint, and cannot be used for output.  
Xprint V7.0 Net Server  
This level includes the features of Xprint V7.0 Net Client, and adds the possi-  
bility of setting up devices on the host, configuring the host as POTENTIAL  
MASTER, and executing fully operational gateways. At least one Xprint V7.0  
Net Server license is required in an Xprint V7.0 domain. The number of  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
243  
           
Installation (users only)  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
devices in a domain is basically limited to 32, independently of the number  
of Net Clients and Net Servers. This limit can be increased with device  
upgrade licenses.  
Device upgrade licenses  
These licenses can be installed to increase the number of devices that can be  
configured in Xprint V7.0. Without printer upgrade license, a host with Xprint  
V7.0 Local is limited to two devices, while a domain is limited to 32 devices.  
●
●
●
●
Device Upgrade to 32  
can be added to Xprint V7.0 Local and extends the number of devices that  
can be defined on the host to 32.  
Device Upgrade to 128  
can be added to Xprint V7.0 Local, or in an Xprint V7.0 domain, and extends  
the number of devices to 128.  
Device Upgrade to 256  
can be added to Xprint V7.0 Local, or in an Xprint V7.0 domain, and extends  
the number of devices to 256.  
Unlimited Device Upgrade  
can be added to Xprint V7.0 Local, or in an Xprint V7.0 domain, and removes  
all limits on the number of devices.  
Extra feature licenses  
These licenses protect very specific parts of the product.  
●
Xprint V7.0 R/3 Kit  
This license is required for execution of the client component of the Xprint  
V7.0 R/3 kit.  
Other special feature licenses exist, but are restricted to specific platforms or  
environments.  
Site license  
This license can be combined with any of the functional features. It allows you  
to use the same license key on different hosts. The main advantage of a site  
license is that you only have to install one key per domain rather than one key  
on each host in the domain.  
244  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Installation (users only)  
8.5.4 Installing a license key  
Where to install a license key  
Basic license keys and extra feature keys need to be installed on every host  
where Xprint V7.0 functions are to be enabled. Device upgrade licenses and site  
licenses are global to a domain: only one such key has to be installed in a  
domain.  
One key may cover several features, including the maximum number of devices.  
But if several keys are found on a host, Xprint V7.0 will merge all the valid ones  
to determine which features are enabled.  
Two examples will clarify the interpretation of the keys by Xprint V7.0.  
Example 1  
Host B  
Host C  
Net Server  
+
SAP  
Net Client  
Host A  
Net Server  
Host D  
+
256 devices  
Host C has a key for Xprint V7.0 Net Server and the Xprint V7.0 R/3 Kit.  
Both hosts A and D need a key to start Xprint V7.0, either Net Client or Net  
Server. Host D has a second key that allows up to 256 devices. This device limit  
is automatically known throughout the Xprint V7.0 domain.  
If no key is present, as for example on host B, Xprint V7.0 can be used during a  
limited period after software installation. This possibility is offered only once per  
version...  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
245  
   
Installation (users only)  
Example 2  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
A site license needs to be installed only once in an Xprint V7.0 domain. It is  
propagated throughout the domain by Xprint V7.0’s internal mechanisms.  
Host B  
Host C  
Net Server  
SAP  
+
Site NeT Server  
Host A  
Host D  
256 devices  
A site license is available on B, which offers Net Server. This privilege is given  
to all the hosts in the domain. No keys are thus needed on A, C and D.  
If keys are found locally while a site key is active, Xprint V7.0 increments the site  
key locally with any additional privilege: Host C has Net server from the site  
license plus the local key Net Server it already had (no advantage), plus R/3 kit.  
Host D has Net Server from the site license. Its second key allows up to 256  
devices in the domain.  
How to install a license key  
The keys to be installed consist of one or more strings made up of printable  
characters and spaces. Each string ends with a colon (:) in order to clearly  
delimit the final character.  
The keys are saved in files whose names are prefixed with DPM(standing for  
Distributed Printing Manager). The rest of the filename is free. These files are  
located in the directory /etc/.OSL_LICENCEon UNIX platforms and in  
Xprint/config/data on Windows.  
Two methods can be considered in order to install a license key : manually or  
using the xpkey command.  
Manual installation  
Make sure the directory /etc/.OSL_LICENCE exists and give it the access mode  
0555. Create A DPM<suffix> file with the license string exactly as provided,  
where suffix is any free string allowed in a file name.  
246  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Xprint V7.0  
Installation (users only)  
The license string must be on first column of first line of the file. The string in  
some cases may be on two lines each ended with the ’:’ character.  
Example:  
mkdir /etc/.OSL_LICENCE  
chmod 0555 /etc/.OSL_LICENCE  
cat > /etc/.OSL_LICENCE/ DPM.0998  
JG he iM X3 Ln Fs PM g1 Th FH Gj Dq 0L gf:  
^D  
chmod 0555 /etc/.OSL_LICENCE/DPM.0998  
Installation with xpkey:  
The same key can be installed with xpkey as follow :  
xpkey -i "JG he iM X3 Ln Fs PM g1 Th FH Gj Dq 0L gf:"  
Please refer to the “Xprint V7.0 - Reference Manual” for a complete description of  
xpkeycommand.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
9.1  
Approach  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows is the port of Xprint V7.0 (UNIX) to the Windows Server  
platform. It brings the rich functionality of Xprint V7.0 as a print server to the PC  
world and co-exists amiably with the native Windows spooler.  
Xprint V7.0 on Windows is not a complete rewrite of Xprint V7.0. It is delivered  
with a run-time environment that allows UNIX applications to run on Windows  
NT or Windows 2000. Only the graphical Xprint V7.0 management interface  
Mercator has been rewritten to look like a standard Windows application.  
The architecture is identical to the architecture of Xprint V7.0 on UNIX: server  
and supervisors can be defined independently, gateways can be configured for  
interdomain printing, and an Xprint V7.0 daemon and database manager run  
during the Xprint V7.0 session.  
This approach simplifies the integration of the Windows computers into an  
existing Xprint V7.0/UNIX configuration: a Windows print server can be added  
in an Xprint V7.0 domain exactly like a plain UNIX host. Windows computers  
can be defined as potential masters or slaves, and the whole domain can still  
be administered from a single point (UNIX or Windows). For the daily Xprint  
V7.0 management tasks, the print system administrator does not even need to  
know which hosts are UNIX and which Windows. The type of platform hosting  
the print server is also totally transparent to the end users and the applications  
submitting print requests.  
For Windows users printing from graphical applications (word processors,  
spreadsheets,...) Wprint can be used to route the print jobs to Xprint V7.0, with  
the optional possibility of specifying Xprint V7.0 job parameters or setting  
default ones. The full set of Xprint V7.0 commands is also available on Windows  
and can be called from a DOS shell window. The xpaddcommand, for example,  
can still be used to print a pre-formatted file received by mail.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
249  
       
Requirements  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
9.2  
Requirements  
Xprint V7.0 is designed to run on Windows NT Server 4.0, Windows 2000  
Server or on Windows 2000 Advanced Server for Intel processors, and  
compatible platforms.  
We do not recommend you to run Xprint V7.0 on Windows NT Workstation or  
Windows 2000 Professional. The intrinsic restrictions on the number of connec-  
tions that can be simultaneously open on these operating systems cause Xprint  
V7.0 to be relatively unstable.  
9.3  
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX  
The Xprint V7.0 manuals describe Xprint V7.0 on UNIX. In general, their  
contents also apply to Xprint V7.0 on Windows. However, there are a number of  
differences due to the nature of the operating systems, and these differences  
are described in this section.  
9.3.1 Installation and license key  
The installation of Xprint V7.0 for Windows conforms to the standards for this  
platform: a setup wizard guides you in the successive steps of the installation.  
The wizard is automatically started when you introduce the CD-ROM medium.  
If the wizard does not appear, start it manually by executing D:\setup(if Dis  
your CD-ROM drive). Wprint, the client program to print from Windows applica-  
tions, can optionally be installed along with Xprint V7.0.  
During the installation you will be prompted for the Xprint V7.0_dbentry. This  
entry identifies the TCP port number for the Xprint V7.0 database. It is automat-  
ically added to the file %SystemRoot%\system32\drivers\etc\services.  
Xprint V7.0 must be installed on a local hard drive. The network shared drives  
are not supported.  
Be careful that temporary files will be stored in the selected installation path.  
Indeed, the files to be printed are temporary stored in some installation subdi-  
rectories.  
At the end of the first installation, two GIP2 gateways are created (a LOCAL and  
a PARTNER one) to allow the access from a Wprint client.  
250  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX  
You need a license key to use Xprint V7.0. If this key is available to you at instal-  
lation time you can introduce it during the setup. Otherwise, Xprint V7.0 will run  
with the full functionality during a limited period, giving you sufficient time to get  
an official license key. If the product has already been installed you can  
introduce the definitive key or an upgrade key using the command xpkey -i,  
which is described in the Reference Manual.  
9.3.2 Integration with Wprint  
The Wprint product is the Windows integrated client for Xprint V7.0. This  
product provides a very easy way to print from the Windows applications to your  
favourite Xprint V7.0 printers and also a powerful management of your print jobs  
submitted to Xprint V7.0. This is the major reason why Wprint is delivered on  
the same media as Xprint V7.0 for Windows.  
For better performance, it is advised to install Wprint and Xprint V7.0 on the  
same drive.  
The installation procedure proposes three types of installations: "Xprint V7.0  
and Wprint" (the suggested one), "Xprint V7.0 only" and "Wprint only".  
- The "Xprint V7.0 and Wprint" mode provides a complete solution for your  
printing on a Windows server. The applications running on this machine can  
print on Xprint V7.0 printers and the jobs can be managed in Xprint V7.0.  
- The "Xprint V7.0 only" mode is interesting when the Windows is a print server-  
without any application submitting print jobs.  
- The "Wprint only" mode installs only Wprint and is suggested for Windows  
workstations.  
Concerning the integration for the Wprint configuration, the reader is referred to  
the section "2.3.1Graphical interface for administration (Mercator)" and the  
description of this specific Windows functionality. If Wprint is installed on a  
Xprint V7.0 Windows system, it is recommended to use the local gateway as  
entry point in Xprint V7.0.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
251  
   
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
9.3.3 Start-up and shutdown  
Xprint V7.0 appears as a Windows service, which can be controlled from the  
Control Panel. The default start-up mode is automatic, meaning that Xprint V7.0  
is started and stopped at system boot-up and shutdown respectively.  
To start and stop Xprint V7.0, the administrator can either use the xpstart  
/xpstopcommands or operate the service from the Windows Control Panel.  
9.3.4 Responsibilities  
The responsibility levels in Xprint V7.0 are described in the section “Responsi-  
bilities” on page 67. These levels are based exclusively on user identifiers in  
UNIX (for example the root user id) but some of them are mapped to system  
privileges on Windows.  
The different levels are recognized as follows on Windows:  
●
System users, Xprint V7.0 users  
All Windows users can submit print jobs and manage their own jobs.  
Windows users can also be registered in the Xprint V7.0 database, with their  
login id as user name and the node name of the Windows system in the user  
host list. They can then be granted the same rights as registered Xprint  
V7.0/UNIX users (place print jobs at the top of the queue, print on any  
device, security level,...).  
●
●
●
System administrator  
Any user belonging to the Administratorsgroup on Windows is granted  
the same Xprint V7.0 privileges on his system as the root user on UNIX.  
Local Xprint V7.0 administrator (sub-root)  
Any system user can be promoted to sub-root by a system administrator or  
the Xprint V7.0 administrator, as with Xprint V7.0/UNIX.  
Xprint V7.0 administrator  
Any user registered in the Xprint V7.0 database can be nominated Xprint  
V7.0 administrator by modifying the Xprint V7.0 System object.  
252  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX  
One special situation that must be described in more detail is the case where  
root is configured as Xprint V7.0 administrator (which is the default after  
installation). The mapping of the Windows members of the Adminis-  
tratorsgroup to the UNIX root user when root is configured as Xprint V7.0  
administrator means that any member of this group is recognized as Xprint  
V7.0 administrator. On Windows, it is possible to exclude a member of the  
Administratorsgroup from the Xprint V7.0 administration privilege  
merely by creating a user with his login name in the Xprint V7.0 database.  
So, if root is set as Xprint V7.0 administrator of the domain, only those  
members of the Administratorsgroup who are not registered in the  
database will be recognized as Xprint V7.0 administrator. However, the  
members of the Administratorsgroup who are registered in the database  
retain their system administrator rights in Xprint V7.0.  
9.3.5 Printer support  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows supports the following printers:  
–
network printers which can be accessed at a given IP address and TCP port  
number  
–
–
Windows workgroup shared printers  
directly attached printers, connected locally to a serial or parallel port.  
The detection of printer errors (for example end of paper) and the related  
recovery procedure are only provided on network printers. The directly attached  
Windows printers and workgroup shared printers can be used for printing, but  
without any polling of the device status.  
LAN printers  
The configuration is the same as with Xprint V7.0 on UNIX, for example:  
xpadd -dev LANpr -da “193.220.12.12 9100” -coLAN -pcHP-LASERJET  
Workgroup Shared printers  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows can print to printers shared by a Windows station. The  
Xprint V7.0 device must be defined with a PARALLELconnection type and the  
Windows UNC for device address, i.e. the device address is in the form  
\\<hostname>\<printer>, as in the following example:  
xpadd -dev NTPr -da “\\D241PCNT\HP” -coPARALLEL -pc HP-LASERJET  
where D241PCNTis the name of the Windows computer sharing the printer HP.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
253  
     
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
Under Windows, the printer must be shared in a way that allows the operation  
Printfor the account Systemof the Windows station where Xprint V7.0 runs.  
Directly attached printers (serial or parallel connection)  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows is able to print to devices connected to the local ports  
of the computer. The device address must be the path to the corresponding  
Windows reserved file. The reserved files for serial printing are COM1, COM2, …  
and for parallel printing LPT1, LPT2,... The following examples show how to  
define a parallel and a serial printer in Xprint V7.0:  
xpadd -dev PCparallel -da LPT1 -coPARALLEL -pc HP-LASERJET  
xpadd -dev PCserial -da COM1 -coSERIAL -pc HP-LASERJET  
If a printer is defined in the native Windows Spooler on a port which is  
also used by an Xprint V7.0 printer, all the jobs printed with Xprint V7.0  
are automatically redirected to the Windows Spooler. The Spooler  
manages the concurrence with its own jobs, so the jobs from Xprint V7.0  
and the native Windows Spooler are properly serialized.  
i
As already mentioned, it is not possible to retrieve the device status from directly  
attached printers, and the serial port driver on Windows also expects some  
initialization from the Spooler. It is therefore advised to always define the serially  
connected devices in both Xprint V7.0 and the native Spooler.  
9.3.6 Logging  
On Windows, Xprint V7.0 records its logging information in the system event  
log. The logging messages can be retrieved with the Event Viewer (Start /  
Programs / Administrative Tools (Common) / Event Viewer).The  
messages can be found in the Applicationcategory (menu item Log /  
Application.)  
The logged messages are the same as on UNIX.  
9.3.7 Interoperability with the BS2000 DPRINT system  
It is possible to exchange print requests between Xprint V7.0 on Windows and  
the BS2000 DPRINT print system. The only requirement is to install the file  
transfer product "openFT" on the Windows machine where the LOCAL Xprint  
V7.0 gateway GIP2 is running.  
254  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX  
Be careful, the minimal version of openFT supported is the 6.0C00 and this  
product must be installed in "multi-user" mode.  
To configure the openFT product and GIP2 gateways please refer to the  
manuals of this product.  
The specific Windows operations to be performed are the following ones:  
Concerning openFT:  
- a password must be provided to openFT in order to enable the asynchroneous  
file transfers. This is to be performed via:  
’Start/Programs/openFT/Security Administration’  
- the admission set of this account must allow every action.  
Concerning Xprint V7.0:  
- the same account and password must be provided via the tool:  
'set_FTuser -i -' (for the local logged user account)’  
or  
'set_FTuser -i <DOMAIN> <USER>' (for any user account)’  
ex: 'set_FTuser -i domain1 usertest' or user 'usertest' in domain 'domain1'  
9.3.8 WINDOWS 2000 special files  
Windows 2000 supports additional file types such as encrypted and migrated  
files. With this new version of Xprint V7.0, these files are handled as described  
hereafter.  
Printing encrypted files  
Xprint V7.0 runs under the system account. This account does not permit Xprint  
V7.0 to access encrypted files. To print encrypted files with Xprint V7.0, two  
ways are possible.  
1. Encrypted files can be printed using the -cp option that makes a copy of the  
file to be printed into an Xprint V7.0 temporary directory. The copy is made using  
the current user account, immediately after he/she issues the xpaddcommand.  
That copy is not encrypted and is stored in a temporary directory where it can  
be accessed by everybody.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
255  
   
Differences from Xprint V7.0/UNIX  
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
2. To deal with encrypted files without using the -cp option, Xprint V7.0 has to  
impersonate a privileged user before accessing encrypted files. The  
xpsetusercommand can be used to store in a file privileged users accounts  
and passwords that Xprint V7.0 will use later to gain access to the encrypted  
data.  
Two different kinds of accounts can be stored:  
–
–
Personal user accounts can be stored by all users in a Xprint V7.0 data file.  
These accounts and passwords are coded and writen in the file users.dat  
inthesubdirectory Xprint V7.0\data\ENC on the local host.  
A default account can be created by an administrator. Only one default  
account is supported; each new default account replaces the preceding one.  
This information is coded and writen in the file default.dat inthesubdi-  
rectory Xprint V7.0\data\ENC on the local host.  
When a job is sent, Xprint V7.0 firstly checks the job owner’s access rights to  
the file to print. If the job owner has not enough rights to view the encrypted file,  
the job is rejected (with an access error message).  
If the file to print is encryted, then Xprint V7.0 checks if an account exists for the  
job owner in the users.dat file.If not, Xprint V7.0 tries to use the account  
from the default.dat file.  
If no privileged user account can be used for the current job, the job is refused,  
and the user is suggested to use the -cpoption.  
xpsetusercommand can be used at any time. This command is also invoked  
automatically, in graphical mode, at the end of installation.  
Example:  
The file d:\bills\june.prt is encrypted by user “editor”.  
The file d:\bills\april.prt is encrypted by user “supervisor”.  
The file d:\bills\july.prt is encrypted by user “revisor”.  
On Xprint V7.0, the accounts & passwords for user “editor” have been registered  
in the default.dat file.  
The users “revisor” and “supervisor” are registered in the users.dat file.  
Assuming that “manager”, “supervisor” and “revisor” have read/write access to  
the files in the d:\bills subdirectory, and that the -cpoption will not be used:  
–
The user “manager” can print the file d:\bills\june.prt.  
256  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Xprint V7.0 for Windows  
Limitations and restrictions  
–
–
The user “supervisor” can print the files d:\bills\april.prt and d:\bills\june.prt.  
The user “revisor” can print the files d:\bills\july.prt and d:\bills\june.prt.  
See reference guide for a complete description of xpsetusercommand.  
Migrated files  
Migrated files are located on removable storage media. To access such files, the  
user intervention is sometimes required to confirm the recall of the files and/or  
to mount the required removable storage medium. Consequently, migrated files  
can only be printed using the -cpoption that permits making a copy of  
submitted files using the user account. In that case, the user would be invited to  
confirm the recall of the files immediately after issuing the xpadd command. If  
the required storage medium is not yet mounted, the user is also invited to  
mount it.  
If the -cpoption is not used for migrated file, the request is rejected with access  
error on the file. The user is suggested to use the -cpoption.  
9.4  
Limitations and restrictions  
The following limitations are specific to Xprint V7.0 for Windows:  
– xprdir, xpmountand xpconf_devare not available on Windows.  
–
–
Windows hosts cannot be configured as PARASITE.  
the notification method MAILis emulated by the Windows Messenger  
Service.  
–
no fax or mail support.  
– DBinstallcomand does not support the -l option.  
–
–
–
Mercator reduced map is not supported on Windows.  
access to shared drives by means of the xpsetusercommand.  
the wildcards in document names are not supported on Windows due to  
system restrictions.  
–
the BSD gateway option 'SRVTYPE=WINNT' is not supported.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
257  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Appendix  
This Appendix contains various informative sections, tables and worksheets for  
configuring and using Xprint V7.0.  
In detail:  
Section  
Page  
260  
263  
266  
268  
270  
270  
271  
Worksheet for configuring a new host  
Checklist for adding a new printer  
Selection criteria lists  
SNMP Agent  
Axis box support  
TV-CC Integration  
Fax and mail support  
Table 30: Overview of Appendix sections  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Worksheet  
Appendix  
Worksheet  
Host name  
Location  
Copy of database/host type  
Disk capacity (MB)  
Free capacity (%)  
Yes  
No  
Connected printers  
Type  
Name  
Port type  
Device address  
Supervisor name  
Supervisors used  
Name  
Server name  
Host name  
Figure 19: Worksheet  
260  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
Worksheet  
Filling out the worksheet  
You should fill out a separate worksheet for every host in the network that is to  
use the distributed spooler system. First enter the name of the relevant host in  
the network in the top left field “Host name”. The computer will later be entered  
as an Xprint V7.0 host under this name. In the field to the right of it you can  
enter the location of the computer for your reference.  
Then find out the overall disk capacity in Mbytes for the relevant host and the  
free capacity in percent. You need this information to decide whether this host  
is to receive a copy of the Xprint V7.0 database or not. Together with the  
responsible system administrator you can then define whether a copy is to be  
made or not. The database must be stored on at least one of the computers in  
the network. To guarantee availability, however, it is advisable to have several  
copies in the network. In addition, hosts which do not hold a copy of the  
database (what are called parasite hosts) can only use Xprint V7.0 if the  
supporting host assigned to them is running with the database. In addition, the  
processor architecture (Intel, RISC) of the parasite and the supporting host  
must be identical. The database is then shared via a network file system such  
as NFS.  
You should only forego copying the database if the relevant host has little  
or no free disk capacity.  
i
When you have defined whether a copy of the database is to be stored on the  
host, decide on the host type of this computer. If the host is to run without a  
database, enter PARASITEin the “Host type” field.  
If the host is to hold its own copy of the database, you must still decide whether  
it can be the master host, i.e. whether this host can take over the administration  
of the database and its distribution on the other hosts with a database, or  
whether it can only play a passive role. The default for defining a new host is  
potential master, i.e. the host can administer the database. In this case enter  
POT_MASTERin the “Host type” field.  
If the host is to hold a passive copy of the database only, enter SLAVEin the  
“Host type” field of the worksheet. A slave can still use the printers of all the  
other slaves and the connected parasite hosts in the event of all potential  
masters failing.  
Next, you should note down all the printers connected to the host. First enter the  
specifications for the “Type”, “Port type” and “Device address” in the corre-  
sponding columns of the table. Under “Type”, for example, note the type  
identifier of the printer, such as HP-Laserjet or PostScript.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
261  
 
Worksheet  
Appendix  
For “Port type” you have four options:  
SERIAL  
if the printer is connected to a serial port of the computer  
PARALLEL  
if the printer is connected to a parallel port of the computer  
LAN  
if the printer is a LAN printer that is directly integrated in the network. In  
this case, the printer is not directly connected to a computer, but Xprint  
V7.0 requires that it be monitored from one of the computers involved.  
LAN printers also have an Internet address and a port number. The  
Internet address can be specified directly or in form of a host name from  
the file /etc/hosts.  
SCSI  
if supported by your system.  
Depending on the port type, you must then specify a device address for each  
printer. The structure of the device address depends on the port type. It  
specifies the special device file for the port to which the printer is connected, or,  
in the case of LAN printers, via which network address and which network type  
the printer is addressed. The following table contains a number of concrete  
examples of device addresses of printers:  
Port type Device address  
Remark  
SERIAL  
/dev/term/tty001  
/dev/term/tty002  
first serial port of the host  
second serial port of the host  
first parallel port of the host  
PARALLEL /dev/lp0or  
/dev/lp  
/dev/lp1  
second parallel port of the host  
LAN  
129.12.73.68 9100 Internet address and port number of a LAN  
printer (TCP/IP). Ask the responsible network  
administrator for the Internet address of the  
or  
desired printer  
lan_printer 9100  
where lan_printer is the corresponding name  
for 129.12.73.68 registered in /etc/hosts  
SCSI  
e.g.:  
Device address of the SCSI printer  
/dev/io0/sprin022  
Table 31: Device addresses (examples)  
262  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Checklist for adding a printer  
When you have entered all the given data in the worksheet, you can fill out the  
other fields concerning printers (“Name” and “Supervisor name”). It makes  
sense to have the Xprint V7.0 administrator assign these globally to make sure  
that the names are unique within the Xprint V7.0 network. You can choose any  
name you wish, but every printer must be given a unique name. The printers can  
be named, for example, according to their type, their location, or the computer  
to which they are connected. It is only important that the names are unique  
throughout the network.  
On every computer to which printers are connected, there must be at least one  
supervisor defined which controls these printers. Whether several printers are  
to be controlled by one supervisor or whether each printer is to have its own  
supervisor, depends on the resource requirements (processes) and on avail-  
ability considerations. Each supervisor entered in the “Connected printers” table  
in the worksheet must also be entered in the “Name” field in the “Supervisors  
used” table.  
Each supervisor is controlled by a server, for which purpose any server in the  
network can be used. For each local supervisor on the computer, enter the  
name of the server responsible for this supervisor (“Server name” field) and on  
which computer the server runs (“Host name” field).  
As already described, a default supervisor/server can be used for each host. By  
default, these are named after the corresponding host.  
When you have completed the worksheet, the computer can be added to the  
Xprint V7.0 system.  
Checklist for adding a printer  
There are a large number of options available for the xpadd -devcommand,  
which allow you to optimally adjust every printer in the Xprint V7.0 system to  
meet the requirements of your environment. To be able to make the best  
possible use of these options, you may have to set up permission lists, forms,  
fonts, filters etc. before adding a new printer to the system. Furthermore, you  
should know which printer attributes are supported by the PCL of the new  
printer. Use the following questions to check whether all the requirements for  
using the  
xpadd -devcommand are fulfilled.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
263  
   
Checklist for adding a printer  
Questions  
Appendix  
1
2
Has the address of the new printer been defined in the system?  
If you do not want to use the default supervisor: does the supervisor of  
the new printer already exist on the host on which the printer is to be  
added?  
If this is not the case, first set up the supervisor and then add the printer.  
3
4
Are the attributes you have selected for the new printer compatible with  
its PCL?  
Compare the attributes with the LONG display of the xpshow -pcl  
command for the PCL you have selected. In the event of inconsistencies,  
the xpadd -devcommand is rejected.  
If use of the new printer is to be restricted to a specific group of users: is  
there a suitable permission list already available in the Xprint V7.0  
system?  
The section “Creating a permission list” on page 144 contains a  
description of how to set up a permission list.  
5
6
7
If you want to define a default form for the printer: is this form already  
defined in the Xprint V7.0 system?  
For information on how to add a form, see the section “Administering  
forms” on page 156.  
Can the form you have selected as the default form for the printer be  
mounted automatically?  
If this is not the case, select another form or change the option -mmto  
AUTOMATICfor the selected form.  
Is the layup of the default form of the printer compatible with the PCL of  
the printer?  
See the LONG displays of the commands xpshow -frmand xpshow  
-pclto check this. If the layup is not compatible, modify the -lsoption  
of the form accordingly.  
8
Is the font of the default form compatible with the printer’s PCL? See the  
LONG displays of the commands xpshow -fntand xpshow -pclto  
check this. If it is not compatible, modify the form accordingly. If there is  
no suitable font available, you might have to add a font to the Xprint V7.0  
264  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Checklist for adding a printer  
system.  
For information on adding a font, see the section “Administering fonts” on  
page 152.  
9
Is the printer to use a specific set of recovery rules for error recovery?  
In this case make sure that a suitable object is available in the Xprint V7.0  
system. The section “Administering recovery rules” on page 186  
contains detailed information on creating and setting up recovery rules.  
10  
Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter before printing the jobs?  
If this is the case, check if the relevant filter is already available in the  
Xprint V7.0 system.  
The section “Administering filters” on page 162 contains information on  
how to set up a fast filter. Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter  
before printing the jobs? If this is the case, check if the relevant filter is  
already available in the Xprint V7.0 system.  
The section “Administering filters” on page 162 contains information on  
how to set up a fast filter. Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter  
before printing the jobs? If this is the case, check if the relevant filter is  
already available in the Xprint V7.0 system.  
The section “Administering filters” on page 162 contains information on  
how to set up a fast filter. Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter  
before printing the jobs? If this is the case, check if the relevant filter is  
already available in the Xprint V7.0 system.  
The section “Administering filters” on page 162 contains information on  
how to set up a fast filter. Is the printer backend to activate a fast filter  
before printing the jobs? If this is the case, check if the relevant filter is  
already available in the Xprint V7.0 system.  
The section “Administering filters” on page 162 contains information on  
how to set up a fast filter.  
If you have checked all the points listed above and if all the options to be used  
are compatible with the printer’s PCL, you should not have any problems in  
adding the printer.  
You can find a list of the predefined PCLs in the appendix of the Reference  
Manual.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
265  
Selection criteria lists  
Appendix  
Selection criteria list  
General requirements  
In many cases you will directly enter specific names for your operations.  
However, there may be times when you will want to apply changes, for example,  
to several users with the same privileges, or you might not know the exact name.  
In such cases you can use specific criteria to select all the objects corre-  
sponding to these criteria. These criteria are specified in what is called the  
selection criteria list; in general these are the same options as you use with the  
xpaddcommand when you add an object to the Xprint V7.0 system for the first  
time. This option has the following format:  
-scl “selection_criteria_list”.  
When specifying a selection criteria list, you must observe the following:  
–
–
The entire list of criteria must be enclosed in quotes.  
By means of the selection_criteria_list, you can select, for example, all the  
jobs that are to be printed on a specific date; you can display all the users  
who have already printed more than 1000 pages; you can assign a new  
security level to all the users with a specific security level.  
–
–
In the selection_criteria_list you can specify several criteria simultaneously.  
These must be separated by blanks.  
In the selection_criteria_list you can specify almost all the options you can  
use with the xpaddcommand (see also Xprint V7.0 V5.2A - Reference  
Manual). There are, however, certain restrictions and also additional  
features. These are described further below in the section “Special cases”.  
–
–
–
Specifying the wildcards *(any number of characters) and ?(exactly one  
character) is allowed for arguments of non-numeric options.  
For options without arguments (Boolean options) you can find out whether  
the relevant option was specified or not by following it with a +or -character.  
In the case of options that allow you to specify several combined values, the  
selected objects are those which have at least the specified values set. To  
search exclusively for the objects for which exactly the specified values are  
set, follow the option with the =character.  
266  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix  
Selection criteria lists  
Example  
The following command deletes all the devices with the XONprotocol:  
xpdel -dev -scl "-po XON"  
Special cases  
This section describes all the xpaddoptions which are not available as criteria  
or which are available additionally.  
All objects  
Except with -job, -hosand -usr, you can additionally use the option -ad. This  
option is used to select the objects which are assigned to an existing admin-  
istrator.  
Printers  
–
–
–
–
With the -stoption you can select all the devices with a specific status; this  
can be ACTIVEor NOT_ACTIVE.  
With the -sioption you can select devices with a specific spoolin state;  
possible values are ONor OFF.  
With the -sooption you can select devices with a specific spoolout state;  
possible values are ONor OFF.  
With the -rdoption (for redirection) you can select devices with automatic  
redirection to a specific printer.  
Printer groups  
With the -sioption you can select device groups with a specific spoolin state;  
possible values are ONor OFF.  
Print jobs  
–
With the -jooption you can display the jobs assigned to a specific job origi-  
nator.  
–
With the -stoption you can select jobs with a specific job status. The  
following values are possible: ACTIVE, WAIT, TOP, SUSPEND,  
DATA_FILTERING, SCHEDULED, INTERRUPTEDand TERMINATED.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
267  
 
SNMP Agent  
Appendix  
–
–
You can use the -ikoption to select jobs with a specific status by means of  
a keyword (e.g. NOT_ACTIVE) (see xpstat -job)  
The options -jt, -teand -sxcannot be used for job selection.  
Supervisors  
With the -stoption you can select supervisors with a specific status; possible  
values are ACTIVEor NOT_ACTIVE.  
Servers  
–
–
–
With the -stoption you can select servers with a specific status; possible  
values are ACTIVE, NOT_ACTIVEor SHUTDOWN.  
With the -sioption you can select servers with a specific spoolin state;  
possible values are ONor OFF.  
With the -sooption you can select servers with a specific spoolout state;  
possible values are ONor OFF.  
Gateways  
–
–
–
You can use the -stoption to select gateways with a specific status;  
possible values are ACTIVEand NOT_ACTIVE.  
You can use the -gioption to select those gateways which have a specified  
gateway input status; possible values are ONand OFF.  
You can use the -gooption to select those gateways which have a specified  
gateway output status; possible values are ONand OFF.  
Hosts  
The options -poand -pdcannot be used for selecting hosts.  
SNMP Agent  
The Xprint V7.0 SNMP sub-agent is based on the UCD-SNMP (NET-SNMP)  
software on Linux and Unix platforms and on the SNMP Microsoft service on  
Windows NT and Windows 2000.  
268  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
SNMP Agent  
The Xprint V7.0 objects supported by the SNMP agent are hosts, devices,  
device groups, servers, supervisors, gateways and jobs. For each of these  
objects, there is a table in the Xprint V7.0 MIB. These tables contain all the  
attributes displayed by the xpshow and xpstat commands for the corresponding  
objects. The description of each attribute can be found in the comments of the  
MIB file. The MIB file (Xprint V7.0-MIB.txt) is installed in the SNMP subdirectory  
of the Xprint V7.0 installation directory.  
For all supported object types except jobs, the complete domain configuration  
is accessible. In the specific case of jobs, only jobs managed by local servers to  
the agent host are visible.  
The purpose of this agent is the monitoring of Xprint V7.0 activity but not the  
administration. Therefore, only read access is allowed via SNMP agent.  
Moreover, no SNMP trap functionality is supported.  
Be aware that objects from another domain (for instance the partner gateway...)  
are always shown as not active. The purpose of the SNMP agent is to monitor  
objects from the domain, not the objects from another one.  
For efficiency, the Xprint V7.0 information is first completely stored in a "Cache  
area" responsible for collecting the complete definition and state of each  
supported object. This "cache" is notified about configuration updates except for  
hosts becoming "unreachable" due to system or network crash or devices in  
error but located on another host than the agent system. The latter situations  
are anyway detected via a polling mechanism.  
The SNMP agent has also a copy of this information in order to boost access.  
This copy is automatically resynchronised with the "Cache" contents after a  
given delay.  
The information accuracy is determined according to two extended options of  
the host object (where the SNMP agent is running):  
– XP_CM_POLL_TIME: period for devices and hosts state refreshing in the  
"Cache" area. This time determines the maximum time before detection of a  
host no longer reachable or of a DEVICE_ERROR state occurring on  
another host than the SNMP system. The value must be a number  
expressing the time in seconds. The default value is "300" (5 min). A value  
"0" disables this refresh operation and could lead to incorrect states of  
devices and hosts.  
– XP_CM_DISABLE_JOBS: When the monitoring of jobs via the SNMP agent is  
not requested, performances will highly improve. A non null value disable the  
monitoring of jobs and a value of "0" resets to the default behaviour. This  
option is only taken into account at startup.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
269  
Axis box support  
Appendix  
– XP_SNMP_SYNC_TIME: Validity period for the SNMP agent copy of the Xprint  
V7.0 information. Any access to Xprint V7.0 agent after this time will enforce  
a resynchronization of the SNMP agent copy with the "Cache Area". The  
value must be number expressing the time in seconds. The default value is  
"10" (10 seconds). The value "0" means that the resynchronization with the  
"Cache" information occurs at each SNMP access.  
The installation aspects are detailed in the release notice.  
Axis box support  
Introduction  
Two axis fast filters have been written to allow Xprint V7.0 to submit job to printer  
attached to an axis box and to have a follow-up of the printer status ( i.e. : Printer  
Off, Paper End , ...... ).  
These filters are implemented via programs respectively called "prosbsd" for the  
axis firmware <= 5.20 and "prosbsd6" for axis firmware >= 6.0. The axis box  
having a firmware version comprised between 5.20 and 6.0 are not currently  
supported by Xprint V7.0. It is suggested to upgrade the axis box firmware to a  
version 6.0.  
Configuration  
The configuration is detailed in the reference guide appendix.  
TV-CC integration  
When installing the package SIsplgu on a platform where Transview Control  
Center product is installed (package TV-CCA at least version 3.1A), Xprint V7.0  
is automatically integrated in TV-CCA.  
Such integration allows the monitoring of Xprint V7.0 printers: any printer error  
will be intercepted by TV-CC that may initiate a reaction via the Xprint V7.0  
graphical interface.  
270  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
Fax and mail support  
Fax and mail support  
Xprint V7.0 fax and mail support is available on the Unix platforms. The fax/mail  
software supported by Xprint V7.0 as well as the versions and the platforms on  
which the fax/mail solution is certified are given in the following. Even if not  
listed, other versions or platforms may be compatible with Xprint V7.0 .  
VSI-FAX version 3.5.2 on SCO UNIX  
Optio FaxFX version 2.54 on SCO UNIX  
TOPCALL version 3.0 runs on Windows NT. The TOPCALL support in Xprint  
V7.0 is certified on every supported UNIX system.  
SMTP: any SMTP server that is compatible with RFC 1521 can be used. The  
SMTP support in Xprint V7.0 is certified on every supported UNIX system.  
Please inquire about the document formats your fax software supports. Using  
an unsupported format does not generate any error in Xprint V7.0 (it is only a  
document carrier to the fax software) but will lead to unexpected fax output.  
Optio FaxFX does not support the PJL printer language (embedded in  
Postscript files for instance).  
The fax and mail support is not available on the Windows platforms.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
271  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Backend  
This is a driver program responsible for controlling printers. In addition, it is  
responsible for error recovery and printer status information.  
Character set  
The letters, digits, punctuation marks and symbols available for a font.  
Direct printing  
Under Xprint V7.0 you do not necessarily have to place a print job in the print  
queue. You can also send a print job directly to a printer; in this case,  
however, the job cannot be modified after submission.  
Encrypted files  
The Encrypted File System (EFS) introduced in Windows 2000 is used to  
prevent unhautorized access to sensitive stored data.  
Fast filter  
This is a program which enhances the functionality of Xprint V7.0. Above all,  
fast filters are used to enhance the backend program, i.e. their main function  
is to detect feedback messages from the printer and to pass them on to the  
responsible supervisor in a form it can understand. They are executed  
between the supervisor and the printer when the job is being printed.  
Filter  
A filter is a program which enhances the functionality of Xprint V7.0. The  
system differentiates between fast filters and slow filters.  
Font  
Fonts are Xprint V7.0 objects which combine the different pieces of font  
information (typeface, style, character pitch, line spacing, print quality and  
character set) under one name.  
Form  
This is an Xprint V7.0 object with which you can have documents output in  
a predefined layout.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
273  
   
Glossary  
Gateway  
Gateways are Xprint V7.0 objects which allow the connection of an Xprint  
V7.0 domain with different systems (other Xprint V7.0 domains, BSD-UNIX  
systems, etc. Jobs can be exported as well as imported via gateways. There  
may be several gateways running simultaneously on one host.  
HOME directory  
This is the directory in which a user is located after logging in to the  
Outputware system.  
Host  
This is the central computer to which the terminals and printers of the users  
are connected. Under Xprint V7.0 every computer defined in an Xprint V7.0  
domain is referred to as a host. Hosts are divided into three categories:  
master, slave and parasite hosts. The difference lies in the way each one  
handles the Xprint V7.0 database.  
Job  
See print job.  
Job identifier  
Every print job is automatically assigned a character combination called the  
job identifier when it is added to the print queue. This job ID is required to  
make changes to a submitted job.  
Job template  
A job template is an object which can store a sequence of specific options  
of the xpaddcommand which are used frequently for spooling in print jobs.  
If a user specifies this job template when submitting a print job, Xprint V7.0  
automatically uses the predefined options of the template; this saves the  
user the effort of specifying frequently recurring option sequences again and  
again.  
Loadable Resource  
This is an Xprint V7.0 object that may be used for printing documents.  
Resources are data that are document independent and loaded to the  
printer separately from the user’s data. Documents can then call  
downloaded resources.  
274  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Master host  
A master host holds the master copy of the Xprint V7.0 database. When Xprint  
V7.0 is introduced in a network, the first computer on which Xprint V7.0 is  
installed and started assumes the role of the active master host. If Xprint  
V7.0 is terminated on the active master, the next potential master host in what  
is called the host hierarchy assumes its function as active master host.  
Migrated files  
These are files stored on a remote media in order to extend disk space using  
the remote storage facility from Windows 2000.  
Object  
This is a generic term for the individual components with which you work  
under Xprint V7.0 (e.g. printers, printer groups, print jobs, forms).  
Option  
These are special instructions used to govern command execution. All  
options are preceded by a minus sign (-). With most of the Xprint V7.0  
commands you can specify several options (also simultaneously). The  
command line xpadd -drtext -deprinter -fmform1, for example, contains  
the options -dr, -deand -fmwhich are used to alter the function of the  
xpaddcommand.  
Parasite host  
A parasite host is a host which does not have a copy of the Xprint V7.0  
database. It requires Xprint V7.0 to be running on a specific computer which  
is assigned to it as the database server if Xprint V7.0 is to be accessed from  
the parasite host.  
PCL (printer capability list)  
This is an object containing all the information Xprint V7.0 needs for  
controlling a printer. It describes how print options are to be converted into  
the corresponding control characters the printer needs. Furthermore, it  
contains information on the technical features of the printer (e.g. its  
connection protocol) and the conversion of common control characters (form  
feed, line feed, etc.) performed by the printer. It also describes how the  
dialog is to be conducted with the printer.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
275  
Glossary  
Permission list  
Permission lists are Xprint V7.0 objects, in which access rights for other  
objects are defined. There are permission lists for users (USER) and forms  
(FORM) and Xprint V7.0 distinguishes two types of permission list: allowed  
lists and denied lists. The former comprise lists of users (or forms) that are  
allowed to access specific objects, e.g. printers (or which may be used on  
the printers to which the list is assigned, respectively). The latter list objects  
which are not allowed to access specific objects, for example printers (or  
which may not be used on the printers to which the list is assigned, respec-  
tively).  
Print job  
When one or more files are sent off for printing via the xpaddcommand or  
the menu interface, these are combined to form an object named “print job”  
and subsequently treated as such by Xprint V7.0. At spoolin, every print job  
is assigned a job identifier under which it can later be addressed, e.g. to  
change the formatting.  
Printer capability list  
See PCL.  
Printer group  
You can combine several printers to form a printer group. Users can then  
send a job to this group, whereupon the job will be printed on the first printer  
in the group to become available. This avoids long wait times, which might  
occur if only one destination printer is selected. Nevertheless, users can still  
address any printer in a group individually.  
Prompt  
When the system is started in command mode or in a shell window, a  
character sequence appears on the screen indicating that the command  
interpreter is ready for Outputware commands to be entered. Under  
Outputware such a prompt might look like this:  
(xprintadm@nashua)/home/peter:  
This example shows a prompt which gives the name of the user (xprintadm)  
and the name of the host on which the user is logged in (nashua) in paren-  
theses. This is followed by the current directory.  
276  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Raw mode  
When a print job is spooled in in raw mode, Xprint V7.0 sends this file to the  
specified printer without any formatting or processing by a filter.  
Recovery rule  
Recovery rules are used to define the error recovery procedure in the case  
of specific printer conditions.  
SCSI driver  
The SCSI peripheral driver communicates with the SCSI host adapter server  
instead of directly with the hardware. It contains entry-point routines to pass  
user-level request to open and close the device or to read and write data.  
The SCSI peripheral driver populates a request structure with this infor-  
mation, then passes the information to the SCSI host adapter driver. The  
host adapter driver handles the direct communication with the hardware.  
Server  
Servers are the Xprint V7.0 objects which administer incoming print jobs and  
are responsible for scheduling them. Every server manages its own print  
queue, which contains all the print jobs for the printers whose supervisors the  
server controls.  
Slave host  
A slave host is a host which holds a complete copy of the Xprint V7.0 database  
but cannot become active master host itself.  
Slow filter  
This is a program enhancing the functionality of Xprint V7.0. Slow filters are  
executed in parallel to the spooling process, i.e. after job submission and  
before printing. They convert data or allow special print modes such as  
printing in columns or in landscape mode.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
277  
Glossary  
SNMP agent  
The Simple Network Management Protocol, abbreviated SNMP, is the  
Internet standard protocol for exchanging management information between  
management console applications and managed entities. SNMP uses a  
distributed architecture consisting of managers and agents. An agent is an  
SNMP application that responds to queries from SNMP manager applica-  
tions.  
The SNMP protocol provides a set of rules to monitor and manage network  
resources including both hardware components and software applications.  
In the context of Xprint V7.0, the SNMP agent exports Xprint V7.0 infor-  
mation (resources definition and status). The list of exported attributes is  
described in a MIB file delivered in the Xprint V7.0 package.  
Supervisor  
A supervisor is directly in charge of controlling one or more printers. It  
receives the job data from the superordinate server and passes it on to the  
backend program.  
Xprint V7.0 database  
The Xprint V7.0 database contains all the data Xprint V7.0 needs to be able  
to access the Xprint V7.0 resources. This includes information on the  
defined hosts, Xprint V7.0 users, printers and printer groups as well as on forms,  
filters, gateways and  
servers. Only the print jobs are stored on the server, which is responsible for  
their administration.  
Xprint V7.0 domain  
All the Xprint V7.0 objects, in particular the hosts, for which an entry exists in  
a shared Xprint V7.0 database and which are administered by a single Xprint  
V7.0 administrator.  
Xprint V7.0 user  
An Xprint V7.0 user is a user who is registered in the Xprint V7.0 database.  
Xprint V7.0 allows extensive manipulation of the privileges of the Xprint V7.0  
users within the Xprint V7.0 system.  
278  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Related publications  
[1] Xprint V7.0  
Application Programming Interface (API)  
User Guide  
Target group  
This manual is for programmers who want to make use of the Xprint V7.0  
functionality in their programs.  
Contents  
The manual describes how you can use the functions of Xprint V7.0 API  
in your own programs. Furthermore, it contains a reference of all Xprint  
V7.0 API functions and the corresponding macros and functions.  
[2] Xprint V7.0  
Reference Manual  
Target group  
Users and Administrators of Xprint V7.0.  
Contents  
This manual describes all the Xprint V7.0 commands and files and  
serves as a reference book which contains all the information required to  
use and administer Xprint V7.0.  
[3] Xprint V7.0  
Graphical User Interface  
User Guide  
Target group  
Users, system administrators, printer managers and programmers of  
Xprint V7.0  
Contents  
Description of Xprint V7.0 Mercator User Interface for operation, admin-  
istration and maintenance.  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
 
Related publications  
[4] Wprint V3.1  
User Guide  
Target group  
Windows administrators and Wprint NT users  
Contents  
Description of the installation, configuration and operation of Wprint  
V3.1, the Xprint V7.0 client for Windows NT.  
Please apply to your local office for ordering the manuals.  
280  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
A
xpchange 82  
xpdel 80  
access rights  
permission lists for forms 12, 75  
xpmod 81  
permission lists for users 12, 75  
specify allowed list 75  
configure  
gateway 213  
specify denied list 75  
host 105  
activate  
LAN 235  
gateway 232  
new host 98, 105  
on stand-alone system 101  
printer 117  
printer 118, 120  
printer group 131  
server 194, 197  
supervisor 201, 203  
copies  
of individual pages 35  
add  
D
filter 162  
data format 61  
database 97, 99, 103, 106  
DBinstall 86  
deactivate  
font 152  
form 157  
PCL 180  
printer 103, 116  
printer to printer group 129  
server 193  
gateway 230  
printer 118  
printer group 130  
server 197  
supervisor 200  
administration 85  
administrator  
set up 98, 100, 104, 107, 213  
application program  
specifying the print command 37  
auditing 85  
supervisor 203  
default destination  
set up 20  
default identifier (print job) 49  
define  
filter 165  
Axis 270  
job template 46, 174  
job template (simplified) 175  
loadable resource 171  
new font 152  
new font (simplified) 153  
new form 157  
B
BC-XOM 8  
C
change  
printer port 122  
server status 197  
supervisor status 203  
character pitch 72  
character set 72  
command  
new form (simplified) 157  
new supervisor 200  
new supervisor (simplified) 201  
PCL 185  
server 116  
server (simplified) 195  
xpadd 79  
user 133  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
delete  
delete 167  
filter 167  
font 154  
form 158  
gateway 229  
input data format 163  
modify attributes 168  
output data format 163  
remove from printer 170  
job template 177  
loadable resource 173  
PCL 181  
print job 65  
printer group 132  
server 196  
font 152  
add 152  
character pitch 72  
character set 72  
define 152  
delete 154  
supervisor 205  
user 137  
determine network structure 97, 104  
GENERIC 154, 155  
line spacing (vertical motion) 72  
modify attributes 155  
modify for document 24  
print quality 72  
display  
form 42  
job templates 45  
loadable resource 31, 173  
objects 55  
simplified definition 153  
style 72  
typeface 72  
printer 117  
form 156  
server 116  
add 157  
documents  
define new 157  
delete 158  
modify font 24  
print 17  
display 42  
print directly 37  
print parts 21  
print several copies 35  
use job template for printing 44  
double-sided printing 28  
GENERIC 156, 158, 160  
grant access 149, 150  
manual 41  
modify attributes 160  
simplified definition 157  
E
G
e-mail 5  
gateway  
activate 232  
Encrypted files 255  
evaluation period 243  
Extended options 38  
configure 213  
deactivate 230  
delete 229  
obtain information 233  
type LOCAL 214  
type PARTNER 214  
use 19  
F
fax 5  
files  
select for printing 17  
filters 162  
GENERIC (default font) 154, 155  
GENERIC (default form) 156, 158,  
160  
add 162  
assign to a printer 169  
define 165  
GENERIC (default PCL) 179  
282  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
H
extra feature 244  
installing 245  
site 244  
high availability configurations  
special features 102  
host  
line spacing 72  
loadable resources  
administering 74, 171  
defining 171  
configure 105  
configure new 98, 105  
delete user 135  
enter user 134  
parasite 99, 106  
host hierarchy 99, 106  
deleting 173  
display definition of 173  
private 32  
public 31  
using 30  
local gateway 214  
logging 85  
I
identifier  
global identifier 49  
format 50  
local identifier 49  
format 49  
lp (X/Open command) 17  
M
Migrated files 257  
modify  
information  
on gateway 233  
on objects 82  
installation  
filter attributes 168  
font attributes 155  
form attributes 160  
print job 61  
Windows NT 250  
server attributes 198  
supervisor attributes 204  
user privileges 135  
J
job identifier 50  
job template 174  
add on remote host 175  
customize 177  
define 46, 174  
delete 177  
N
native language selection 236  
network  
determine structure 97, 104  
display 45  
simplified definition 175  
use 44  
O
objects  
display 55  
permission lists 12, 75  
output devices 5  
K
key (license) 243  
output management system 1, 8  
L
LAN  
P
configure 235  
LANG= 87  
license 243, 251  
basic 243  
device upgrade 244  
pages  
print several copies 35  
select for printing 21  
parasite host 99, 106  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
partner gateway 214  
PCL 152, 179  
add to printer group 129  
assign default form 160  
assign filter to 169  
assign security level 124  
change port 122  
configure 117  
add 180  
add from remote host 180  
assign comment 182  
define 185  
delete 181  
GENERIC 179  
deactivate 118  
display 117  
name 180  
display status 121  
grant access 148  
move 122  
port 117  
remove 121  
PCL (printer capability list) 163  
permanent ID 50  
permission lists 12, 75  
port 117  
print  
remove filter 170  
remove from printer group 129  
replace 123  
directly 37  
documents 17  
double-sided 28  
job identifier 50  
notification of result 36  
parts of a document 21  
select files 17  
printer capability list (PCL) 152, 163  
printer group 126  
activate 131  
copy 128  
deactivate 130  
several copies 35  
use job template 44  
using forms 41  
via gateway 19  
print job  
delete 132  
grant access 149  
name 127  
remove printer 129  
set up 127  
default identifier 49  
printer port 117  
delete 65  
global identifier 49  
identifier 50  
change 122  
private loadable resources 32  
privileges 252  
local identifier 49  
maximum number 136  
modify after submission 61  
priority 136  
public loadable resources 31  
R
R/3 kit 8  
redirect  
redirect 61  
print job 61  
REFERENCED_BY 83  
remove  
redirect to another printer 61  
select 49  
status 37, 38  
printer 121  
print quality 72  
print queue  
delete print job 65  
printer  
S
SAP 8  
security level 137  
assign to a printer 124  
activate 118, 120  
add 103, 116  
284  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
assign to a user 141  
select  
U
user  
language 87  
print job 49  
selection criteria lists 52, 266  
administer 133  
assign security level 141  
current print quota 140  
define 133  
server 193  
activate 194, 197  
add 193  
define job priority 136  
delete 137  
change status 197  
deactivate 197  
define 116  
delete 196  
display 116  
delete from host 135  
display privileges 140  
display quotas 140  
enter for other hosts 134  
ID 133  
modify attributes 198  
simplified definition 195  
service 252  
information on 140  
maximum number of copies 136  
maximum number of jobs 136  
maximum number of pages 136  
maximum security level 137  
number of consumed jobs 139  
number of consumed pages 139  
privileges 135  
set up  
administrator 98, 100, 104, 107,  
213  
default destination 20  
printer group 127  
spooler administrator 101  
slave 235  
reset print quota 138  
user administration 133  
SNMP 268  
user ID 133  
spooler administrator  
set up 101  
spooler system  
stop 102  
user privileges  
grant access to form 149, 150  
grant access to printer 148  
grant access to printer group 149  
modify 135  
start 85  
stop 86  
user quotas  
supervisor 116, 200  
activate 201, 203  
add 200  
status display 140  
W
Windows NT 249  
Administrators group 253  
printer support 253  
worksheet 97, 104, 260  
change status 203  
deactivate 203  
define 200  
delete 205  
modify attributes 204  
simplified definition 201  
X
X/Open command  
lp 17  
xpadd  
T
typeface 72  
option -ah 175  
option -ca 182  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
option -cm 162  
option -tp 24, 162  
option -vm 25  
option -wa 38  
option -cn 172  
option -co 117  
option -cs 24  
option -da 117  
option -de 19  
option -dl 127  
option -dp 37  
option -ev 36  
option -fc 35  
xpadd command 79  
xpadd -dev 117, 124  
xpadd -dgr 127  
xpadd -flt 162  
xpadd -fnt 152  
xpadd -frm 157  
xpadd -hos 99, 106  
xpadd -jtp 174, 175  
xpadd -lrs 32, 171, 172  
xpadd -pcl 180  
option -fm 40  
option -fp 35  
option -fr 22  
option -ft 40  
xpadd -spv 116, 200  
xpadd -srv 116, 194  
xpadd -usr 98, 102, 105, 133  
xpchange  
option -hm 24  
option -ho 133, 200, 201  
option -it 162  
option -je 34  
option -cj 139  
option -js 34  
option -ll 27  
option -cp 139  
option -st 203  
option -lm 27  
option -lr 31, 32  
option -ls 25  
option -na 36  
option -nd 36  
option -nm 36  
option -ot 162  
option -pc 19, 117  
option -pl 27  
option -ps 21  
option -re 99, 106  
option -rm 33  
option -rp 37  
option -rw 37  
option -sd 28  
option -se 116, 200  
option -sh 99, 106  
option -sl 124  
option -sp 34, 116  
option -st 37  
xpchange command 82  
xpchange -dev 118, 120, 161, 169  
xpchange -dgr 118, 119, 130, 131  
xpchange -spv 201, 203  
xpchange -srv 194, 198  
xpchange -usr 139  
xpcopy  
option -ah 128, 176  
xpcopy -dgr 128  
xpcopy -flt 166  
xpcopy -fnt 153  
xpcopy -frm 158  
xpcopy -jtp 175, 176  
xpcopy -lrs 172  
xpcopy -srv 201  
xpdel command 80  
xpdel -dev 121  
xpdel -dgr 132  
xpdel -flt 167  
xpdel -fnt 154  
option -su 117  
xpdel -frm 159  
option -te 44  
xpdel -job 65  
option -tm 27  
option -to 22  
xpdel -jtp 177  
xpdel -lrs 173  
286  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
xpdel -pcl 181  
xpdel -spv 205  
xpdel -srv 197  
xpmod  
option -di LONG 152  
option -di REFERENCED_BY 83  
option -frm 42  
option -jtp 45  
option -ad 98, 102, 105  
option -aj 136  
option -ap 136  
option -cu 182  
option -da 122  
option -dl- 129  
option -dl+ 129  
option -fl 169  
xpshow -dev 123  
xpshow -flt 166  
xpshow -fnt 157  
xpshow -lrs 31, 172, 173  
xpshow -pcl 152, 157, 183  
xpshow -srv 116  
xpshow -usr 140  
xpstart 101  
option -fl- 170  
option -fm 161  
option -ho- 135  
option -ho+ 134  
option -nc 136  
option -pc 184  
option -pr 136  
option -pv 136  
option -sl 137  
option -ua 136  
xpmod command 81  
xpmod -dev 122, 123, 161, 169, 170,  
184  
xpstat 82  
xpstat -dev 121, 169  
xpstat -srv 196  
xpstat -usr 140  
xpmod -dgr 129  
xpmod -flt 168  
xpmod -fnt 155  
xpmod -frm 160  
xpmod -job 61  
xpmod -jtp 178  
xpmod -srv 199  
xpmod -sys 98, 102, 105  
xpmod -usr 134, 135  
xpmount 41  
option -d 41  
option -f 41  
option -s 41  
xppatch  
error messages 103  
option -dg 103  
xprdir 61  
xpsetuser 256  
xpshow 82  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fujitsu Siemens Computers GmbH  
User Documentation  
33094 Paderborn  
Comments  
Suggestions  
Corrections  
Germany  
Fax: (++49) 700 / 372 00001  
email: [email protected]  
http://manuals.fujitsu-siemens.com  
Submitted by  
Comments on Xprint V7.0  
User’s and Administrator’s Guide  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fujitsu Siemens Computers GmbH  
User Documentation  
33094 Paderborn  
Comments  
Suggestions  
Corrections  
Germany  
Fax: (++49) 700 / 372 00001  
email: [email protected]  
http://manuals.fujitsu-siemens.com  
Submitted by  
Comments on Xprint V7.0  
User’s and Administrator’s Guide  
U23841-J-Z915-6-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Lenovo Computer Drive 4304493 User Manual
LST Smoke Alarm HFM 153 27D User Manual
Magnavox CD Player AZ7275 17 User Manual
Makita Grinder 9523NBH User Manual
Manitowoc Ice Ice Maker K00129 User Manual
Marantz Stereo Receiver SR4003 User Manual
Martin Audio Portable Speaker C115 C115T User Manual
Maytag Mixer KV25MCXCU5 User Manual
McCulloch Trimmer 115376827 User Manual
Melissa Coffeemaker 745 194 User Manual